JP7218780B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a game machine represented by a pachinko machine.

2. Description of the Related Art In some game machines such as pachinko machines, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not a game ball wins a prize based on the entry of a game ball into a predetermined starting hole. In addition to the predetermined starting opening, there is known a winning opening in which prize balls are paid out when the ball wins. Among these conventional gaming machines, for example, there is a game machine designed to improve interest by varying the number of prize balls to be paid out when the ball wins according to the type of the prize winning opening.

Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2001-129177

However, there has been a demand for further enhancement of interest .

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of a player in playing a game.

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 is provided at a position where a game ball launched in a specific direction can enter, a first state in which the game ball can enter, and the first state. a second state in which a game ball is more difficult to enter than a second state; and a variable game execution means for executing a variable game in which the variable ball entry means is changed from the second state to the first state a predetermined number of times, and a first ball-entering means provided at a position where a game ball launched in the specific direction can enter; a first position where the game ball launched in the specific direction can enter the first ball-entering means; a second position where it is more difficult for the game ball to enter the first ball entry means than the first position; provided in the second ball entering means different from the first ball entering means, and a specific process that is not performed when the game ball enters the second ball entering means, thereby and means for increasing the degree of advantage when a game ball enters the first ball-entering means, wherein the second ball-entering means is operated in a state in which the variable means is changed to the first position. Provided at a position where a game ball that has flowed down in the direction of the variable means is more easily guided than a game ball that has flowed down in the direction of the variable means while the variable means is being varied to the second position. The variable means is changed to the first position while the variable ball-entering means is changed to the second state during execution of the variable game, and the variable ball-entering means is changed to the second state. It is a configuration that can be changed to the second position while being changed to one state, and the game machine includes a specific area through which at least a game ball shot in the specific direction can pass, and the specific area. It is possible to distribute the game ball that has reached to the first flow path that can enter the first ball entering means and the second flow path that cannot enter the first ball entering means. and a distribution means for adjusting the ratio of game balls distributed to the first flow path .

According to the gaming machine according to claim 1, a game ball launched in a specific direction is provided at a position where the game ball can enter, and a first state in which the game ball can enter, and a game ball more than the first state. a second state in which it is difficult to enter a ball; a variable ball-entering means that can be changed to a second state; a determination means that performs a determination based on the establishment of a determination condition; a variable game execution means for executing a variable game in which the variable ball entry means is varied from the second state to the first state a predetermined number of times, and the game ball launched in the specific direction is provided. a first ball entry means provided at a position where the ball can be entered, a first position where the game ball launched in the specific direction can enter the first ball entry means, and from the first position a second position at which a game ball is less likely to enter the first ball entering means; By performing a second ball entering means different from the first ball entering means and a specific process that is not performed when a game ball enters the second ball entering means, the first ball entering means means for increasing the degree of advantage when a game ball enters the game ball, wherein the second ball entry means moves the direction of the variable means in a state in which the variable means is changed to the first position; is provided at a position where the game ball that has flowed down in the direction of the variable means is more easily guided than the game ball that has flowed down to the second position, and The variable means is changed to the first position while the variable ball-entering means is changed to the second state during execution of the variable game, and the variable ball-entering means is changed to the first state. The game machine has a specific area through which at least a game ball shot in the specific direction can pass, and a game that has reached the specific area. a sorting means capable of sorting a ball into a first flow path that can enter the first ball-entering means and a second flow path that cannot enter the first ball-entering means; and is capable of adjusting the proportion of game balls distributed to the first flow path .

As a result, there is an effect that the player 's interest in the game can be improved .

1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to a first embodiment; FIG. 1 is a front view of a game board of a pachinko machine; FIG. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine. (a) is a diagram schematically showing area division setting and valid line setting of a display screen, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of an actual display screen. (a) is a diagram exemplifying a display screen on which a right-handed navigation is displayed, and (b) is a diagram exemplified by a display screen on which a right-handed warning image is displayed. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen during a big win, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen when a ball enters a large-value winning hole during a big win. (a), (b) is a figure which illustrated the display screen with which the warning image was displayed. It is a front view of a storage device. (a) is a diagram showing the traveling direction of a ball that has flowed into the storage device when the storage valve is closed; It is a figure which shows the advancing direction of a ball|ball. It is a diagram showing the upstream side of the path provided on the right side of the game board. It is a diagram showing the downstream side of the path provided on the right side of the game board. (a) is a diagram showing a state in which the first specific winning opening is opened, and (b) is a diagram showing a state in which the second specific winning opening is opened. (a) is a diagram showing the path of the ball when the first specific winning hole is closed, and (b) is a diagram showing the path of the ball when the first specific winning hole is open. (a) is a diagram showing the path of the ball when the second specific winning hole is closed, and (b) is a diagram showing the path of the ball when the second specific winning hole is open. (a) is a diagram showing the traveling direction of a ball entering the second variable winning device with the variable probability ball entrance closed, and (b) is a diagram showing the direction in which the variable probability ball entrance is opened. It is a figure which shows the advancing direction of the ball which entered the inside of the 2nd variable prize-winning device in the state where it is. (a) is a diagram showing changes over time between the state of the second specific winning port and the state of the flow path in the second variable winning device in the 12th round of the jackpot A; It is a figure which shows the time-measurement change with the state of the 2nd specific prize-winning hole in the th round, and the state of the flow path in a 2nd variable prize-winning device. 1 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a pachinko machine; FIG. (a) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the ROM in the main control device, (b) is a schematic diagram showing the correspondence relationship between the first hit type counter C2 and the jackpot type in the special symbol It is a figure and (c) is a schematic diagram which showed typically the correspondence of the 2nd winning random number counter C4 and the winning in a normal design. It is a figure which shows the outline|summary of various counters. 3 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a RAM within the main controller; FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a display control device; FIG. FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a display data table; FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a transfer data table; FIG. FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a drawing list; 4 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the main control unit; It is a flow chart showing a special symbol variation process executed by the MPU in the main controller. It is the flowchart which showed the special design fluctuation|variation start processing performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flow chart which shows the start prize-winning processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. 4 is a flow chart showing prefetching processing executed by an MPU in a main controller; It is a flow chart showing normal symbol variation processing that is executed by the MPU in the main controller. 4 is a flow chart showing through gate passage processing executed by an MPU in the main controller; 4 is a flow chart showing NMI interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the main controller; 4 is a flow chart showing start-up processing executed by an MPU in a main controller; 4 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by an MPU in a main controller; It is a flowchart which shows a big-hit control process performed by MPU in a main control device. It is a flow chart which shows big hit operation setting processing performed by MPU in a main control device. 4 is a flowchart showing ending processing executed by an MPU in the main controller; 4 is a flowchart showing winning processing executed by an MPU in the main controller; 4 is a flow chart showing abnormality processing executed by an MPU in a main controller; 10 is a flow chart showing winning command setting processing executed by the MPU in the main controller. Fig. 10 is a flow chart showing a start-up process performed by the MPU in the audio ramp controller; 4 is a flow chart showing main processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device; 4 is a flow chart showing command determination processing executed by an MPU in an audio lamp control device; 4 is a flowchart showing error notification processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device; FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing a winning notification process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device; FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing normal notification processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device; 4 is a flow chart showing a variable display setting process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device; 4 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by an MPU in the display control device; 4 is a flowchart showing boot processing executed by an MPU in a display control device; (a) is a flow chart showing command interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flow chart showing V interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. be. 4 is a flowchart showing command determination processing executed by an MPU in a display control device; (a) is a flowchart showing a variation pattern command process executed by the MPU in the display control device, (b) is a flowchart showing a stop type command process executed by the MPU in the display control device be. (a) is a flowchart showing opening command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing round number command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. . 4 is a flowchart showing ending command processing executed by an MPU in a display control device; (a) is a flow chart showing rear image change command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flow chart showing error command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device; be. 4 is a flowchart showing display setting processing executed by an MPU in the display control device; 4 is a flowchart showing warning image setting processing executed by an MPU in a display control device; 4 is a flow chart showing pointer update processing executed by the MPU in the display control device; (a) is a flow chart showing a transfer setting process executed by an MPU in a display control device, and (b) is a flow chart showing a resident image transfer setting process executed by an MPU in a display control device; be. 10 is a flowchart showing normal image transfer setting processing executed by the MPU in the display control device; 4 is a flowchart showing drawing processing executed by an MPU in a display control device; It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the second embodiment. (a) is a diagram illustrating a display screen when the storage valve of the second embodiment is closed, and (b) is a display screen when the storage valve of the second embodiment is open. FIG. 4 is an illustrative diagram; It is a front view of the storage device in 2nd Embodiment. (a) is a diagram exemplifying a case where a ball that has flowed into the storage device is guided to a large value winning opening when the storage valve is closed in the second embodiment; It is the figure which illustrated the case where the ball|bowl which flowed into the storage apparatus is guided to the small value prize winning opening when the storage valve is closed in 2 embodiment. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating the advancing direction of a ball that has flowed into the storage device when the storage valve is open in the second embodiment; It is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine in the second embodiment. (a) is a diagram showing the defined contents of the first winning type selection table in the second embodiment, and (b) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the RAM in the main controller in the second embodiment. be. It is a flow chart which shows the main processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 2nd embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control process 2 performed by MPU in the main controller in 2nd Embodiment. 9 is a flow chart showing storage control processing executed by an MPU in a main controller in the second embodiment; 9 is a flow chart showing command determination processing executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device in the second embodiment; 9 is a flow chart showing warning processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the second embodiment; FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing storage time notification processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the second embodiment; FIG. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing cancellation notification processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the second embodiment; FIG. It is the figure which illustrated the display screen during a big hit in the modification of 1st Embodiment. It is a diagram showing the downstream side of the path provided on the right side of the game board in the modification of the first embodiment. (a) is a plan view of the storage device and the second variable winning device in a state in which a slide member of a modified example of the first embodiment protrudes forward in a front view, and (b) is a modified example of the first embodiment; FIG. 10 is a plan view of the storage device and the second variable prize winning device in a state where the slide member of the example is buried on the back side in front view; It is a figure which shows the defined content of the 1st hit classification selection table in the modification of 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control process 3 performed by MPU in the main controller in the modification of 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot operation|movement setting process 2 performed by MPU in the main controller in the modification of 1st Embodiment. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing a prize winning process 2 executed by an MPU in a main controller in a modified example of the first embodiment; FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing winning opening closing processing executed by the MPU in the main controller in the modified example of the first embodiment. 9 is a flowchart showing error notification processing 2 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the modified example of the first embodiment; It is a flowchart which shows the hit time notification process 2 performed by MPU in the sound lamp control apparatus in the modification of 1st Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board in the modification of the second embodiment. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the traveling direction of balls that flow into the storage device in a state where the balls stored in the storage device are arranged disadvantageously for the player in a modification of the second embodiment; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the traveling direction of balls that flow into the storage device in a state where the balls stored in the storage device are arranged in an advantageous manner for the player in a modification of the second embodiment; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a suggestive display image displayed on the display screen in a modified example of the second embodiment; It is a block diagram which shows the electrical structure of the pachinko machine in the modification of 2nd Embodiment. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing main processing executed by an MPU in an audio lamp control device in a modified example of the second embodiment; FIG. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing cancellation suggestion display processing executed by an MPU in a sound lamp control device in a modification of the second embodiment; FIG. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing command determination processing executed by an MPU in an audio lamp control device in a modified example of the second embodiment; FIG. FIG. 12 is a flow chart showing a storage state command process executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device in a modified example of the second embodiment; FIG.

<First embodiment>
BEST MODE FOR CARRYING OUT THE INVENTION Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 whose outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 formed in substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. and an inner frame 12 supported so as to be openable and closable. In order to support the inner frame 12, the outer frame 11 is provided with metal hinges 18 at two upper and lower positions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1). A frame 12 is supported toward the front side so that it can be opened and closed.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning slots 63 and 64, etc. is detachably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back side. Balls (game balls) flow down in front of the game board 13 to play a pinball game. The inner frame 12 includes a ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 17) that shoots a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a shooting unit that guides the ball shot from the ball shooting unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) or the like is attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 covering the front upper side and a lower tray unit 15 covering the lower side are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower tray unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached at two upper and lower positions on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1). 14 and a lower tray unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are unlocked by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electric parts, and the like, and has a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening at its substantially central portion. A glass unit 16 having two sheet glasses is arranged on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front side of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.例文帳に追加

The front frame 14 has an upper tray 17 for storing balls projected to the front side and formed in a substantially box-like shape with an open upper surface, and the upper tray 17 discharges prize balls, rental balls, and the like. The bottom surface of the upper tray 17 is inclined downward to the right when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the inclination guides the ball thrown into the upper tray 17 to the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 17). A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17 . The frame button 22 is operated by the player when, for example, the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) is changed, or the content of the super ready-to-win effect is changed. be.

The front frame 14 is provided with light-emitting means such as various lamps around its periphery (for example, corner portions). These light emitting means are controlled to change the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking in response to changes in the game state such as when a big win is made or when a predetermined ready-to-win state is reached, and play a role of enhancing the effect during the game. Illuminated portions 29 to 33 containing light emitting means such as LEDs are provided on the periphery of the window portion 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these electric decoration parts 29 to 33 function as production lamps such as big win lamps, and the respective electric decoration parts 29 to 33 are lit by lighting or blinking of built-in LEDs at the time of a big win or a ready-to-win production. Alternatively, it flashes to indicate that the jackpot is in progress or that the player is in the process of reaching one step before the jackpot. In addition, an indicator lamp 34 is provided in the upper left part of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1).

In addition, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized on the lower side of the right electrical decoration part 32, and a pasting space K1 (Fig. 2) can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, in order to bring out more splendor, a plated member 36 made of ABS resin, which is plated with chrome, is attached to the area around the electric decorations 29-33.

A ball rental operation unit 40 is arranged below the window portion 14c. The ball rental operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41 , a ball rental button 42 and a return button 43 . When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with banknotes, cards, etc. inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the balls are released according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display section 41 is an area in which the balance information of the card or the like is displayed, and the built-in LED is turned on to display the remaining amount in numbers as the balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain lending balls based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and lending balls are supplied to the top tray 17 as long as the card or the like has a balance. be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit. A pachinko machine in which balls are directly lent to the upper tray 17 from a ball leasing device or the like without going through the card unit, that is, a so-called cash machine, does not require the ball leasing operation unit 40. A decorative seal or the like may be added to the installation portion to make the parts configuration common. It is possible to achieve commonality between a pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine.

In the lower tray unit 15 positioned below the upper tray 17, a lower tray 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper tray 17 is formed in a substantially box-like shape with an open upper surface. there is On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 is provided which is operated by the player to hit the ball in front of the game board 13. As shown in FIG.

Inside the operating handle 51, there are a touch sensor 51a for permitting the driving of the ball shooting unit 112a, a shooting stop switch 51b for stopping the shooting of the ball during the pressing operation, and a rotation of the operating handle 51. A variable resistor (not shown) for detecting a dynamic operation amount (rotational position) based on a change in electrical resistance is incorporated. When the operating handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes corresponding to the amount of rotation operation. A ball is shot with a strength (shooting intensity) corresponding to , and is hit in front of the game board 13 with a flying distance corresponding to the player's operation. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are turned off.

A ball extraction lever 52 is provided at the lower front portion of the lower tray 50 for operation when discharging the balls stored in the lower tray 50 downward. The ball extracting lever 52 is always biased to the right, and when it is slid to the left against the bias, the bottom opening formed in the bottom of the lower tray 50 is opened. The ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball extracting lever 52 is normally performed with a box (generally called a "senryo box") placed below the lower tray 50 to receive the balls ejected from the lower tray 50 . The operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower tray 50 as described above, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower tray 50 .

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a base plate 60 which is cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front. (not shown), rails 61, 62, general winning opening 63, first ball opening 64, second ball opening 640, first variable winning device 65, second variable winning device 650, normal ball opening ( Through gate) 67, variable display unit 80, storage device 600, etc. are assembled, and the peripheral portion thereof is attached to the back side of inner frame 12 (see FIG. 1). The base plate 60 is made of a light-transmissive resin material, and is formed so that the player can visually recognize various structures arranged on the rear side of the base plate 60 from the front side thereof. The general prize winning port 63, the first ball inlet 64, the second ball inlet 640, the first variable prize winning device 65, the second variable prize winning device 650, the variable display device unit 80, and the storage device 600 are made of the base plate 60 by router processing. , and fixed from the front side of the game board 13 by tapping screws or the like.

The front central portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. As shown in FIG. Mainly referring to FIG. 2, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described below.

In front of the game board 13, an outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially circular arc is planted, and a strip-shaped metal plate is placed inside the outer rail 62 in the same manner as the outer rail 62. An arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by is erected. The front outer periphery of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62, and the front and rear sides are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). A game area is formed in which a game is played by the behavior of . The game area is the front surface of the game board 13 and is defined by two rails 61 and 62 and a resin outer edge member 73 connecting the rails (a winning opening is provided and a shot is fired). area where the ball flows down).

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball shot from the ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 17) to the upper part of the game board 13. As shown in FIG. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip of the inner rail 61 (upper left part in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning into the ball guide passage again. be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flying portion of the ball. is attenuated and rebounded toward the center. Between the lower right tip of the inner rail 61 and the upper right tip of the outer rail 62, a resin-made arc member 70 is formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface side. It is fixed by driving it into the plate 60 .

In this pachinko machine 10, a lottery for a special symbol (first symbol) is conducted when a prize is won in the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640, and the ball enters the normal ball entrance 67. When it passes, a lottery for a normal pattern (second pattern) is performed. In the lottery for the special symbols performed for the balls entering the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is a big hit, and the special symbol is a big hit. When it is done, the judgment of the jackpot type is also performed. For convenience of explanation, the special symbol lottery performed for the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 will be referred to as "special symbol 1 lottery", and the lottery for the ball entering the second ball entrance 640 will be referred to as "special symbol 1 lottery". The lottery for the special symbol that is drawn is called "lottery for special symbol 2".

When the special pattern jackpot hits, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the special game state, and the first specific winning port 65a or the second specific winning port 650a, which is normally closed, is closed for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds elapses). (or until 10 balls are won) is repeated 15 times (15 rounds). More specifically, in the 1st to 11th rounds and the 13th to 15th rounds, the first specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have passed or until 10 balls have been won), and 12 In the round, the second specific prize winning opening 650a is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have passed or until 10 balls have won a prize). As a result, a large amount of balls enter the first specific winning hole 65a and the second specific winning hole 650a, so that a larger amount of prize balls than usual is paid out.

In addition, inside the second variable winning device 650, there are two types of entrances (probability variable entrance 654 and normal entrance) for determining the added value after the end of the jackpot given after the end of the special game state. A port 655) is provided (see FIG. 15). Details will be described later, but when a ball enters the probability variable entrance 654 in the special game state, "high probability state of special symbol" is given as added value after the end of the big win. On the other hand, when the ball does not enter the variable probability ball entrance 654 even once during the special game state, "ordinary pattern time saving state" is provided as an added value after the end of the big win. In addition, two kinds of "jackpot A" and "jackpot B" are provided as the jackpot types of the special symbols (see FIG. 18(b)). Although the details will be described later, the opening pattern of the second specific winning opening 650a is configured differently depending on the type of jackpot, and the ease with which a ball enters the variable probability opening 654 is made different.

When the special symbol (first symbol) lottery is performed, the variable display of the special symbol is started in the first symbol display device 37, and after a predetermined time (for example, 11 seconds to 60 seconds) has passed, the lottery result is displayed. A special symbol indicating is stopped and displayed. When the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 while the variable display is being performed on the first symbol display device 37, the number of times the ball enters is determined for each type of entrance. Each game is reserved up to four times, and the number of reserved balls is displayed by the first symbol display device 37 and also by the third symbol display device 81 . When the variable display is completed on the first symbol display device 37, the number of reserved balls for the first entrance 64 (the number of reserved balls for the special symbol 1), or the number of reserved balls for the second entrance 640 (special If the number of reserved balls of the symbol 2) remains, a lottery for the next special symbol is performed, and a variable display corresponding to the lottery is started. When both the number of reserved balls of special symbol 1 and the number of reserved balls of special symbol 2 remain, the lottery based on the reserved balls of special symbol 2 is preferentially executed.

On the other hand, in the normal symbol lottery performed for the passage of the ball through the normal ball entrance 67, the success or failure determination of whether or not the normal symbol wins is performed. When the normal pattern is won, the electric accessory 640a attached to the second ball entrance 640 is opened for a predetermined time (for example, 0.2 seconds or 1 second), and the ball enters the second ball entrance 640. become easy. That is, when the normal symbol wins, the ball is likely to enter the second ball entrance 640, and as a result, the lottery for the special symbol is likely to be performed.

Further, when the lottery for the normal design (second design) is performed, the fluctuation display of the normal design is started in the second design display device 83, and after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds, 30 seconds, etc.) has passed, A normal symbol indicating the result of the lottery is stopped and displayed. When the ball passes through the normal ball entrance 67 while the second symbol display device 83 is performing variable display, the number of passages is suspended up to four times, and the number of suspended balls is displayed by the first symbol display device 37. It is displayed and also shown in the second symbol reservation lamp 84 . When the variable display is completed in the second symbol display device 83, if the number of reserved balls for the normal ball entrance 67 remains, the lottery for the next normal symbol is performed, and the variable display corresponding to the lottery is displayed. be started.

When "jackpot A" and "jackpot B" are reached, the number of rounds becomes a special game state (15R jackpot) of 15 rounds. In addition, in the special game state, when a ball enters the variable probability ball entrance 654, as an added value after the end of the big win, the pachinko machine 10 keeps the special symbol high during the period from the end of the big win to the next big win. Move to the probability state (during the probability of special symbols). On the other hand, if the ball does not enter the variable probability entrance 654 even once in the special game state, as an added value after the end of the big win, the special symbol lottery will be completed 100 times after the end of the big win. During the period, it shifts to the time saving state of the normal pattern. In addition, when shifting to the time-saving state of the normal pattern after the end of the big hit, it also shifts to the low probability state of the special pattern. This special symbol low probability state continues until the next big hit. Although the details will be described later, in the "jackpot B", compared to the "jackpot A", it is easier to enter the ball into the variable probability entrance 654 during the special game state (during the jackpot state). That is, since the "jackpot B" is more likely to shift to the variable probability state of the special symbols after the jackpot is finished, the jackpot is likely to occur again in a short interval after the jackpot is finished. Therefore, the "jackpot B" is a jackpot that is more advantageous to the player than the "jackpot A".

Here, the "high probability state of special symbols" refers to a state in which the probability of a subsequent jackpot is increased as an added value after the end of the jackpot, during so-called probability fluctuation (during probability change), in other words, to a special game state. It is a game state that is easy to transition to. The high-probability state of the special symbols in the present embodiment (during the probability change of the special symbols) includes the state of the game in which the winning probability of the normal symbols (second symbol) is increased and the ball is likely to enter the second ball entrance 640. . On the other hand, the ``low probability state of special symbols'' refers to the time when the special symbols are not changing, and the probability of the big win is normal, that is, the state of the probability of big wins being lower than during the changing of the special symbols. In addition, the time saving state of normal symbols (during time saving) means a game state in which the winning probability of normal symbols is increased and the ball is likely to enter the second ball entrance 640 . On the other hand, the normal state is a game state in which neither the probability variation of the special symbols nor the time reduction of the normal symbols is performed (the state in which neither the jackpot probability nor the normal symbol (second symbol) winning probability is increased).

During the probability change of the special symbol or during the time reduction of the normal symbol, not only the probability of winning the normal symbol is increased, but also the time during which the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is opened is changed, and the normal state is achieved. A long time is set compared to When the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (open state), the ball enters the second ball entrance 640 more than when the electric accessory 640a is in the closed state (closed state). It becomes easy. Therefore, the ball is likely to enter the second ball entrance 640 during the probability variation of the special symbol or during the time saving of the normal symbol. That is, the lottery for the special symbols is facilitated.

In addition, instead of changing the opening time of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second ball entrance 640 during the probability change of the special symbol or during the time saving of the normal symbol, or in addition to changing the opening time , The number of times of opening the electric accessary 640a in the case of winning a normal symbol may be increased more than in the normal state. In addition, during the probability change of the special symbol or during the time reduction of the normal symbol, the winning probability of the normal symbol (second symbol) is not changed, the time when the electric accessory 640a attached to the second ball entrance 640 is opened, and At least one of the number of openings of the electric accessory 640a may be changed. In addition, during the probability change of the special symbol or during the time saving of the normal symbol, the time when the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is opened and the number of times the electric accessory 640a is opened are not changed, and the normal symbol ( The winning probability of only the second symbol) may be increased compared to the normal state.

In the present embodiment, when the variable probability state of the special symbol is given after the end of the special game state, the variable probability state of the special symbol is configured to continue until the next jackpot, but it is not limited to this, You can limit the number of times. Specifically, for example, after the special game state is completed, a special symbol probability changing state (high probability state) is provided until the special symbol lottery is completed 10 times, and after the special symbol lottery is completed 10 times. may be configured to be set to a normal state. In addition, the number of times that the special symbol is in the variable probability state is not limited to 10 times, and may be arbitrarily determined. Similarly, in the present embodiment, when the ball does not enter the probability variable entrance 654 in the special game state, it is configured to be in the time saving state of the normal symbol until the lottery of the special symbol is completed 100 times. However, the time period of normal symbols is not limited to 100 times, and may be arbitrarily determined.

A first pattern display provided with a plurality of light emitting diodes (hereinafter abbreviated as "LED") 37a and a 7-segment display 37b, which are light emitting means, on the upper right side of the game area when viewed from the front (upper right side in FIG. 2). A device 37 is provided. The first symbol display device 37 provides display corresponding to each control performed by the main control device 110, which will be described later, and mainly displays the game state of the pachinko machine 10. FIG. A plurality of LEDs 37a indicate by lighting state whether or not a special symbol lottery is being executed accompanying a ball entering the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 (start winning). or display a special pattern (first pattern) according to the lottery result of the special pattern as a stop pattern after the fluctuation is completed, or a ball entered into the first ball entrance 64. The number of held balls, which is the number of balls (held balls) for which variation has not been executed, is indicated by the lighting state.

When the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 while the special symbol (first symbol) is being displayed in this first symbol display device 37, The number of balls is reserved up to four times for each type of ball entrance. In the present embodiment, the balls entering the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640 are each suspended up to four times, but the maximum number of suspensions is limited to four. The number of times may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times).

The 7-segment display 37b displays the number of rounds during the jackpot and an error display. In addition, the LEDs 37a are configured so that each LED emits a different color (for example, red, green, and blue). Depending on the combination of the emitted colors, various game states (high-probability state of special symbols) of the pachinko machine 10 can be achieved with a small number of LEDs. , etc.) can be displayed. In addition, the LED 37a not only indicates whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol is a big win as a stop symbol after the end of the variation, but also indicates the big win type (big win A, big win B) in the case of a big win. A special symbol (first symbol) is shown.

The game area is also provided with a plurality of general winning holes 63 through which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win. A variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a third pattern display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as a "display device") and a second pattern display device 83 composed of LEDs. A center frame 86 is arranged in the variable display device unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third pattern display device 81 .

The third pattern display device 81 performs decorative display according to the display of the first pattern display device 37 . For example, when a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 (start winning), the first symbol display device 37 executes variable display of a special symbol (first symbol) using this as a trigger. Furthermore, in the third symbol display device 81, in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol, the variable display of the third symbol corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol is performed.

The third pattern display device 81 is composed of a 9-inch large liquid crystal display, and the display contents are controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 17), for example, upper, middle, and lower. Three symbol columns are displayed. Each pattern row is composed of a plurality of patterns (third patterns), and these third patterns are vertically scrolled for each pattern row to variably display the third pattern on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81. It's like In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the game state is displayed by the first symbol display device 37 under the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 17). A decorative display corresponding to the display of the device 37 is performed. Incidentally, instead of the liquid crystal display, for example, the third pattern display device 81 may be configured using a reel or the like.

Here, the display contents of the third pattern display device 81 will be described with reference to FIGS. 4 to 7. FIG. First, FIG. 4 is a drawing for explaining the display screen of the third pattern display device 81, and FIG. 4(a) is a diagram schematically showing area division setting and effective line setting of the display screen. FIG. 4B is a diagram showing an example of an actual display screen.

The third pattern consists of 10 types of main patterns numbered from "0" to "9". Each main design consists of a back design made of a wooden box with a number from "0" to "9". , Large numbers are added to almost the entire front of the wooden box. On the other hand, the main designs with even numbers (0, 2, 4, 6, 8) have attached designs that imitate characters such as planes, wrapping cloths, helmets, etc. that fill the front of the wooden box. An even number is added to the lower right side of the accessory pattern in a small green color so as to be displayed in front of the accessory pattern.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the result of the lottery of the special symbols performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 17) described later is a big win, a variable display in which the same main symbols are aligned is performed. , the jackpot is generated after the variable display is finished. On the other hand, when the lottery result of the special symbol is a loss, a variable display in which the same main symbols are not aligned is performed.

For example, if the lottery result of the special symbols is "jackpot A", a variable display is performed in which main symbols with even numbers "0, 2, 4, 6, 8" are added. On the other hand, if it is a "jackpot B", the main A variable display in which the patterns are aligned is performed. On the other hand, if the lottery result of the special symbol is out, a variable display is performed in which the main symbols of the same number are not aligned.

As shown in FIG. 4(a), the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 is roughly divided into two upper and lower parts. The upper one-third of the area is a sub-display area Ds for displaying an advance notice effect, characters, the number of pending balls, and the like.

The main display area Dm is divided into three left, middle and right display areas Dm1 to Dm3, and three pattern rows Z1, Z2 and Z3 are displayed in the three display areas Dm1 to Dm3, respectively. The above-described third symbols are displayed in a prescribed order in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. That is, the main symbols are arranged in ascending or descending numerical order in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and each symbol row Z1 to Z3 is periodically scrolled from top to bottom for variable display. In particular, the left symbol row Z1 is arranged so that the numbers of the main symbols appear in descending order, and the middle symbol row Z2 and the right symbol row Z3 are arranged so that the numbers of the main symbols appear in ascending order.

Further, in the main display area Dm, the third symbols are displayed in three stages of upper, middle and lower stages for each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. The middle part of the main display area Dm is set as the activated line L1, and the third symbols stop on the activated line L1 in the order of the left symbol row Z1→right symbol row Z3→middle symbol row Z2 in each game. Is displayed. When the third symbol is stopped, if a combination of big winning symbols (combination of the same main symbols in this embodiment) is aligned on the activated line L1, a big winning moving image is displayed as a big winning.

On the other hand, the sub-display area Ds is provided horizontally above the main display area Dm, and is divided into three equal sub-areas Ds1 to Ds3 in the horizontal direction. Of these, the small area Ds1 displays the number of held balls, which is the number of balls (held balls) for which variation has not been performed among the balls that have entered the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640. The small areas Ds2 and Ds3 are areas for displaying the preview effect image.

On the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 4(b), a total of nine main patterns of the third pattern are displayed in the main display area Dm. In the secondary display area Ds, a moving image is displayed in the right small area Ds3, suggesting to the player that the state is more likely to transition to a big win than usual. In the central small area Ds2, a predetermined character 710 (a boy wearing a headband in this embodiment) normally performs a predetermined action, and sometimes performs a special action different from the predetermined action, or another character performs a specific action. A notice effect is performed by appearing or the like.

On the other hand, when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 while the third symbol display device 81 (first symbol display device 37) is performing the variable display, The number of hits is reserved up to four times, and the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first pattern display device 37 and is also indicated in the small area Ds1 of the sub-display area Ds. In the small area Ds1, one reserved ball number pattern is displayed for one reserved ball number, and the number of reserved balls is displayed according to the number of displayed reserved ball number patterns. That is, when one reserved ball pattern is displayed in the small area Ds1, it indicates that the number of reserved balls is one, and when four reserved ball patterns are displayed, the number of reserved balls is Indicates 4 balls. Further, when the reserved ball number pattern is not displayed in the small area Ds1, it indicates that the number of reserved balls is 0, that is, there is no reserved ball. FIG. 4(b) is an example in which the number of held balls corresponding to the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 is four. When a held ball corresponding to a ball entering the second ball entrance 640 is generated, a held ball number pattern different from the held ball number pattern displayed in the small area Ds1 of FIG. 4(a) is displayed. be done. As a result, the player can easily check the number of reserved balls corresponding to the first ball entrance 64 and the number of reserved balls corresponding to the second ball entrance 640. can be confirmed.

In the present embodiment, the balls entering the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640 are configured to be held up to four times, respectively, but the maximum number of held balls is limited to four. However, the number of times may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Alternatively, instead of displaying the number of reserved balls in the small area Ds1, the number of reserved balls may be indicated by a number on a part of the third pattern display device 81, or an area divided into four areas may be changed by the number of reserved balls. (For example, colors or lighting patterns) may be displayed. Further, since the number of reserved balls is displayed by the first symbol display device 37, the third symbol display device 81 may not display the number of reserved balls. Furthermore, the variable display device unit 80 may be provided with four holding lamps indicating the number of holding balls, which is the maximum holding number, and the number of holding balls may be displayed according to the number of holding lamps in the lighting state.

Next, referring to FIG. 5(a), a display prompting the third symbol display device 81 to hit the ball aiming at the path (flow path) on the right side of the game board 13 (right-hand navigation) is displayed. The display contents when this occurs will be explained.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the electric accessory 640a becomes easier to open when the special symbol probability variable state or the normal symbol time saving state occurs, so that the ball moves to the right side of the game board 13. By hitting (right hitting), it becomes easier to enter the ball into the second ball entrance 640 . In addition, although the details will be described later, when a special symbol lottery (lottery of special symbol 2) performed based on the ball entering the second ball entrance 640 results in a big win, the first ball entrance 64 A "jackpot B" is more likely to occur than when a big win is achieved by a special pattern lottery (lottery for a special pattern 1) performed on the basis of the ball entering the heap. Therefore, in the variable probability state of the special symbols given after the end of the big hit, or in the time-saving state of the normal symbols, it is advantageous for the player to execute the right stroke. In other words, even if the variable probability state of the special symbol or the time saving state of the normal symbol is set, the ball cannot be entered into the second ball entrance 640 unless the player hits right. The player cannot fully receive the benefit of the probability variation state of the pattern and the time-saving state of the normal pattern.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, in the probability variable state of the special symbol or the time saving state of the normal symbol, by displaying the image (right-handed navigation) illustrated in FIG. And it is configured so that the benefits of being in a time-saving state of normal patterns can be obtained.

As exemplified in FIG. 5(a), in right-handed navigation, a character "Aim right!" Three arrows are displayed. By displaying these characters and arrows, it is possible to make the player feel that the ball should be launched to the path (flow path) provided on the right side of the game board 13 . Therefore, it is possible for the player to surely acquire the benefits of the variable probability state of the special symbols and the time saving state of the normal symbols.

Next, an example of a warning image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 5(b). The warning image exemplified in FIG. 5(b) indicates that the player should hit the ball to the right (hit to the right) even though it is not a period during which the player should hit the ball to the path (channel) provided on the right side of the game board 13. This is an image (right hitting warning image) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when it is determined that the game is being executed. More specifically, it is displayed when it is determined that the player is hitting to the right in the normal state (neither the probability changing state of the special symbols nor the time saving state of the normal symbols).

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the electric accessory 640a is controlled so as to be difficult to open in the normal state (even if the ball is hit rightward, it is difficult to enter the ball into the second hole 640). Therefore, if the player hits the ball right-handed in the normal state, the chances of receiving the lottery for the special symbol are reduced compared to hitting the ball aiming at the first ball entrance 64 in the left-handed state. That is, if the player hits right in the normal state, it is difficult for the player to win a big win, which is a loss for the player. Therefore, it is configured to prevent (suppress) the player from losing money by displaying a right-handed warning image to encourage left-handed hitting.

As illustrated in FIG. 5B, when it is determined that the player is hitting right in the normal state, the entire small display area Ds (small areas Ds1 to Ds3) is given a "warning". and the characters "Let's play with the left hand!!" are displayed. By displaying these characters, the player can be reminded that he/she should not hit with the right hand (should hit with the left hand). In addition, the hall clerk also confirms whether or not there is a right-hand hitting warning screen (see FIG. 5(b)) to determine whether or not there is a player who is executing an irregular game method in which the player hits right in the normal state. can be easily identified.

It should be noted that the method of determining whether or not the player is hitting right is based on whether or not the ball has entered the storage device 600 (see FIG. 8) into which the ball can flow when hitting right. . More specifically, when the ball enters one of the general winning holes 601, 602 or the out holes 603a to 603c provided inside the storage device 600 (see FIG. 8) (each ball entering hole When it is determined that the ball has passed through the provided ball entry switch), it is determined that the player is hitting right.

Here, the storage device 600 (see FIG. 8) is in a state in which the balls are likely to flow down to the general winning opening 601 (see FIG. 9A) and a state in which the balls flow down to the general winning opening 602 according to the game state. Two types of states are set, one being a state in which it is easy to activate (see FIG. 9(b)). In states other than the special game state (jackpot state) (probability variable state of special symbols, time-saving state of normal symbols, normal state), a state is set in which the balls are easily made to flow down to the general winning opening 601.例文帳に追加The general prize winning port 601 is a prize winning port in which the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters is smaller than that of the general prize winning port 602 (for example, 3). Therefore, even if the player hits to the right in the normal state, there is little advantage of entering the ball into the storage device 600 (the number of balls held cannot be increased). That is, if the player hits to the right in the normal state, the frequency of receiving the lottery for the special symbols decreases, and the number of balls held decreases, so that the disadvantage for the player increases. Therefore, in order to prevent the player from continuing to play a game method disadvantageous to him (a game method in which he hits to the right in the normal state), a warning image of hitting to the right (see FIG. 5(b)) is displayed. is configured as

It should be noted that, as a determination factor of whether or not to display the right-handed warning image (see FIG. 5(b)), not only entering the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601, which is likely to win in the normal state, but also winning The reason why it is determined whether or not a ball is entered into the general winning hole (high value winning hole) 602, etc., which is difficult to play, is that the possibility of illegal play is taken into consideration. That is, in a normal state, by continuing to illegally enter a ball into a general prize winning opening (large value winning opening) 602 with a large number of paid out prize balls (for example, 15 payouts), the player can avoid a big win. There is a possibility that a fraudulent game method to obtain a large amount of prize balls will be performed. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when it is detected that the ball has entered the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602 in the normal state, the player is hit left (right). A right hitting warning image (see FIG. 5(b)) is displayed to prompt the player not to hit. As a result, it is possible to suppress fraudulent games.

In this embodiment, when it is detected that a ball has entered one of the ball entrances (general winning entrances 601, 602, out exits 603a to 603c) provided in the storage device 600 in the normal state. In the above configuration, a warning image for striking to the right (see FIG. 5(b)) is displayed, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in a state other than the special game state (jackpot state), when it is detected that a ball has won a prize (entered a ball) into a general prize winning port (large value winning prize port) 602 where many prize balls are paid out, fraudulent games It may be configured to display a right-handed warning image by determining that the game is being played. As a result, the hall clerk can easily determine the presence or absence of fraud simply by confirming the presence or absence of the right-hand hitting warning image. In addition, in a state other than the special game state (jackpot state), when it is detected that the ball has entered the general prize winning port (high value prize winning port) 602, it means that the hole computer has been tampered with. may be configured to output a signal indicating As a result, the operator of the hall computer can easily determine whether or not there is a possibility that fraud is being committed and the machine number (position) of the pachinko machine 10 where fraud is being committed.

In this embodiment, the player hits right-handedly based on detection of a ball entering each ball hole (general winning holes 601, 602, out holes 603a to 603c) provided inside the storage device 600. Although it is determined that the player is hitting right, the method of determining whether or not the player is hitting right is not limited to this. For example, it may be configured to determine that the ball is hit to the right when the ball passes through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67, or a path (flow path) provided on the right side of the game board 13. A well-known sensor capable of detecting the passage of the ball may be arranged above the bowl, and it may be determined that the player is hitting to the right when the sensor detects the passage of the ball.

Next, an example of an image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 during the special game state (during the jackpot state) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 6(a) is a diagram showing an example of an image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the third round of the jackpot. As shown in the figure, when a jackpot is won, for example, an image of a boy character 710 discovering a treasure chest 715 filled with treasure is displayed. This treasure suggests a large amount of prize balls that the player gets in the special game state (jackpot state). This display can increase the joy of winning a prize ball, so that a sense of satisfaction can be given to the big win. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

A display area 714 for displaying the current number of rounds is provided in the upper left portion of the third symbol display device 81 . In the example of FIG. 6( a ), characters “ROUND3” are displayed in the display area 714 . By confirming this display, the player can recognize that the present is the third round of the jackpot. Therefore, the number of remaining rounds of the jackpot can be easily recognized by the player.

Furthermore, in the upper right portion of the third symbol display device 81, a right-handed navigation image is displayed in the same manner as during the probability variable state of the special symbol and during the time saving state of the normal symbol. That is, the characters "Aim right!" are displayed in the small area Ds3, and rightward arrows are displayed above and below the characters. By displaying this right-handed navigation image, the player is made to recognize that the ball should be shot to the path (flow path) provided on the right side of the game board 13 during the special game state (during the jackpot state). be able to. If a player hits left in spite of the special game state (big hit state), the path (channel) provided on the right side of the game board 13 is provided downstream, and is opened in the special game state (big hit state). It becomes impossible to enter the ball into the first specific winning hole 65a and the second specific winning hole 650a. That is, the player cannot win a large amount of prize balls, and the player loses money. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the right-handed navigation image (see FIG. 6(a)) is displayed even in the special game state (jackpot state) to encourage the player to hit right. As a result, the player can win prize balls in the big win.

In addition, in the lower right portion of the third symbol display device 81, a number-of-winnings display area MA for displaying the number of times of winning (entering a ball) to the general winnings opening 602 is formed. For example, characters such as "EXTRA BONUS×10" are displayed in the number-of-wins display area MA, as shown in 6(a). The characters "EXTRA BONUS" mean that prize balls are obtained by a method different from the prize balls obtained by entering the balls into the first specific prize winning opening 65a and the second specific prize winning opening 650a. ing. Specifically, it means that a prize ball is obtained by entering the ball into the general winning hole 602 . In addition, the character "x10" indicates the number of times the ball entered the general prize winning opening 602 in the big win. In the example of FIG. 6(a), it means that the ball was entered into the general winning hole 602 10 times in the 1st to 3rd rounds.

A schematic diagram of the storage device 600 is displayed above the characters "EXTRA BONUS x 10", and the characters "EXTRA BONUS gate open" are displayed above it. Thereby, the player can easily recognize that the storage valve 604a is set to the open state (released state). In addition, in the schematic diagram of the storage device 600 displayed on the third symbol display device 81, a speech balloon with the words "Aim!" . This balloon makes it possible for the player to recognize that entering the ball into the general winning hole 602 is advantageous (a large amount of winning balls can be obtained).

Also, FIG. 6(b) is a diagram showing the display contents when a ball enters the general winning hole 602 in the special game state (big win state). As shown in FIG. 6(b), when a ball entering the general prize winning opening 602 is detected during the jackpot, the characters "GET" are displayed in the portion where the schematic diagram of the storage device 600 is displayed. At the same time, an image is displayed in which a ball enters a location corresponding to the general prize winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 in the schematic diagram of the storage device 600 . Further, the display content is changed from "EXTRA BONUS x 10" to "EXTRA BONUS x 11" in the number-of-wins display area MA. As a result, the player can easily recognize that a prize ball has been obtained by entering the general prize winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 .

In this way, by displaying the number of times a ball enters the general winning hole 602 during the big win, the winning ball is displayed separately from the balls entering the first specific winning hole 65a and the second specific winning hole 650a. It is possible to make the player recognize the number of times that has been acquired. Therefore, the game can be played in anticipation of an increase in the number of "EXTRA BONUS" (the number of times a ball enters the general prize winning opening 602). Therefore, it is possible to enhance the player's interest in the game.

Next, various warning images will be described with reference to FIG. First, FIG. 7(a) is a diagram showing an example of a left-handed warning image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when a left-handed player is hit in the special game state (jackpot state). As shown in FIG. 7(a), when it is determined that the player is hitting to the left, a large display area 716 is formed in the central portion of the third symbol display device 81 for displaying a warning. Also, in the large display area, a large character "WARNING" is displayed, and below the "WARNING" character is displayed a character "Aim the attacker with a right-hand shot!". By displaying these characters in the large display area, the player can be made to recognize that the current game method (left-handed hitting) is an incorrect game method. Therefore, in the special game state (jackpot state), the player can surely win a large number of prize balls.

Whether or not the player is hitting left-handed is determined by whether or not the ball has entered the first ball entrance 64 . That is, by determining that the ball has entered the first ball entrance 64 during the special game state (during the jackpot state), it is determined that the player is hitting left, and a left-hand hitting warning image ( (see FIG. 7A)) is displayed.

In the present embodiment, the configuration is such that a left-handed hitting warning image (see FIG. 7A) is displayed when a ball entering the first ball entrance 64 is detected, but the present invention is not limited to this. . For example, a passage sensor that detects the passage of a ball is provided on the path (flow path) provided on the left side of the game board 13, and if the sensor detects the passage of the ball during a big hit, a left-handed warning image ( It may be configured to display FIG. 7(a)).

Next, with reference to FIG. 7B, a warning image displayed when it is detected that an abnormality has occurred in the storage device 600 will be described. Here, the abnormality of the storage device 600 is, for example, a case in which a ball is detected to enter the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601 in spite of the special game state (jackpot state), or a special game state (jackpot state). state), a warning image is displayed when it is determined that a ball has entered the general prize winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 even though it is not in the normal state.

As shown in FIG. 7(b), when it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in the storage device 600, a large character "WARNING" is displayed in the central portion of the third pattern display device 81. FIG. At the bottom of the screen, the characters "Please call the gate error attendant" are displayed. From these characters, the player can determine that an error has occurred in the pachinko machine 10, so that the player can promptly request repairs or the like from the pachinko hall clerk or the like.

In addition, if the wiring or the like is illegally changed and the ball is fixed in a state where it is easy for the ball to enter the general winning hole (large value winning hole) 602 that always pays out a large number of prize balls, etc. The store clerk can determine the possibility of fraudulent activity only by checking the warning image (see FIG. 7(b)). Therefore, the ball is fixed in a state in which it is easy for the ball to enter the general prize winning opening (high value winning opening) 602, and the ball is shot aiming at the storage device 600, thereby suppressing fraudulent acts that increase the number of balls without going through a big win. be able to.

Returning to FIG. 2, the description continues. The second symbol display device displays a symbol "O" and a symbol "X" as display symbols (second symbol (not shown)) each time the ball passes through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67. A variable display is performed by alternately lighting up for a predetermined period of time. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that a ball has passed through a normal ball entrance (through gate) 67, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if the winning lottery is won, the second symbol display device stops and displays the symbol "○" after the second symbol is variably displayed. Further, if the result of the winning lottery is a loss, the symbol "x" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variable display of the third symbol.

In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device stops at a predetermined symbol ("○" symbol in this embodiment), the electric accessory 640a attached to the second ball entrance 640 is displayed in a predetermined manner. It is configured to be activated (released) for a period of time.

The time required for the variable display of the second symbol (fluctuation time) is set so as to be shorter during the probability variation of the special symbol or during the time reduction of the normal symbol than during the normal state of the game state. As a result, the variable display of the second pattern is performed in a short time during the probability change of the special pattern and during the time saving of the normal pattern, so that the lottery of the normal pattern (second pattern) can be performed more often than during the normal state. can. Therefore, since the chances of winning the normal symbols increase, the player can be given many chances to open the electric accessory 640a of the second ball entrance 640.例文帳に追加Therefore, during the probability variation of the special symbol and during the time saving of the normal symbol, it is possible to make the ball easily enter the second ball entrance 640.例文帳に追加

In addition, during the probability change of the special symbol or during the time reduction of the normal symbol, the winning probability is increased, or the opening time or number of times of opening the electric accessory 640a is increased. When the ball is in a state where it is easy to win a prize, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be fixed regardless of the game state. On the other hand, if the time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set shorter than during the normal state during the probability change of the special symbol or during the time saving of the normal symbol, the probability of winning the normal symbol is constant regardless of the game state. Alternatively, the opening time and number of openings of the electric accessory 640a for one normal symbol hit may be fixed regardless of the game state.

The normal ball entrance 67 is assembled to the game board on the right side of the variable display device unit 80, and is configured to allow passage of some of the balls that flow down the right side of the game board among the balls that have been shot onto the game board. ing. When the ball passes through the normal ball entrance 67, a winning lottery for a normal symbol (second symbol) is performed. After the winning lottery, variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the result of the winning lottery is a win, a symbol "○" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display, and if the result of the winning lottery is a loss. For example, an "x" symbol is displayed as a variable display stop symbol.

The number of times the ball passes through the normal ball entrance 67 is reserved up to four times at maximum, and the number of reserved balls is displayed by the above-described first symbol display device 37, and the second symbol reservation lamp 84 is also lit and displayed. . Four second pattern holding lamps 84 are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third pattern display device 81 .

In addition, the variable display of the second pattern is performed by switching between lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second pattern display device as in the present embodiment. A part of the device 81 may be used. Similarly, the lighting of the second symbol reservation lamp may be performed by a part of the third symbol display device 81 . Also, the maximum number of held balls for passing the ball through the normal ball entrance 67 is not limited to 4 times, and may be set to 3 times or less or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). . Also, the number of normal ball entrances 67 to be attached is not limited to one, and may be plural (for example, two). Further, the mounting position of the normal ball entrance 67 is not limited to the right side of the variable display device unit 80, and may be the left side of the variable display device unit 80, for example. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol reservation lamp 84 may not be lit and displayed.

Below the variable display device unit 80, a first ball entrance 64 through which a ball can enter is provided. When a ball enters the first ball entry hole 64, a first prize entry switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control device is caused by turning on the first prize entry switch. At 110 (see FIG. 17), a lottery for a big win is made, and the first pattern display device 37 shows a display according to the lottery result.

On the other hand, on the right side of the variable display unit 80 in front view (below the normal ball entrance 67), a second ball entrance 640 through which a ball can enter is arranged. When the ball enters the second ball entrance 640, the second winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the second winning opening switch is turned on. A lottery for a big win is made by the main controller 110 (see FIG. 17), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37. FIG.

In addition, the first ball entry hole 64 and the second ball entry hole 640 are also one of winning holes from which five balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win. In this embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second ball entrance 640 are configured to be the same. However, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second ball entrance 640 may be different numbers. For example, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 is three, and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second ball entrance 640 is five. good too.

The second entrance 640 is accompanied by an electric accessory 640a. This electric accessory 640 a is configured to be openable and closable, and normally the electric accessory 640 a is in a closed state (reduced state), making it difficult for the ball to enter the second ball entrance 640 . On the other hand, as a result of the variable display of the second symbol triggered by the passage of the ball through the normal ball entrance 67, when the symbol "○" is displayed on the second symbol display device, the electric accessory 640a is in the open state. (expanded state), and the ball is likely to enter the second ball entrance 640 .

As described above, during the probability change of the special design and during the time saving of the normal design, the probability of winning the normal design is higher than during the normal state, and the time taken to display the fluctuation of the normal design is short, so the fluctuation of the normal design In the display, the pattern of "○" becomes easy to be displayed. Therefore, the number of times the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (enlarged state) increases. Furthermore, the time during which the electric accessary 640a is opened during the probability change of the special symbols and during the time saving of the normal symbols is longer than during the normal state. Therefore, during the probability variation of the special symbol and during the time saving of the normal symbol, it is possible to create a state in which the ball is more likely to enter the second ball entrance 640 than in the normal state. On the other hand, the first ball entrance 64 does not have an electric accessory like the second ball entrance 640, and is in a state where the ball can always win a prize.

Here, the probability of winning the jackpot when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 and when the ball enters the second ball entrance 640 is the same in both the low probability state and the high probability state. be. However, as the type of jackpot selected when a jackpot is won, the probability of a jackpot (jackpot B) that makes it easy for a ball to enter the variable probability ball inlet 654 during the special game state is the second ball inlet 640. The value is set higher when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 than when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 .

During normal operation, the electric accessory attached to the second ball entrance 640 is often in a closed state, and it is difficult to win the second ball entrance 640. A ball is shot toward the opening 64 so as to pass through the left side of the variable display device unit 80 (so-called "left-handed hitting"), and by winning the first ball entrance 64, there are many chances for a big winning lottery. Therefore, it is advantageous for the player to aim for a big win.

On the other hand, during the probability change of the special symbol or during the time saving of the normal symbol, by passing the ball through the normal ball entrance 67, the electric accessory 640a attached to the second ball entrance 640 is likely to be in an open state, and the second entrance. Since the ball is in a state where it is easy to win a prize at the ball opening 640, the ball is shot toward the second ball opening 640 so that the ball passes through the right side of the variable display device 80 (so-called "right hitting"), and the ball is normally entered. It is more advantageous for the player to aim for a big hit B by passing the ball hole 67 to open the electric accessory and winning the second ball hole 640.例文帳に追加

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment can be operated according to the game state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether the special symbols are changing probability, the normal symbols are in the time saving mode, or the normal state is in progress). Players can be made to change the way the ball is shot between "left-handed" and "right-handed." Therefore, it is possible to change the way the player hits the ball, so that the player can enjoy the game.

A first variable prize winning device 65 is disposed on the lower right side of the first ball inlet 64 (the lower left side of the second ball inlet 640), and a horizontally elongated rectangular first special prize prize hole is located substantially in the center thereof. (Large opening) 65a is provided. In the pachinko machine 10, after a predetermined time (fluctuation time) elapses when a special symbol lottery resulting from winning a prize in the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 results in a big win, The first symbol display device 37 is lit so as to be a jackpot stop symbol. In addition, a stop symbol corresponding to the big win is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to notify the occurrence of the big win. After that, the game state transitions to a special game state (jackpot) in which the ball is likely to win. As this special game state, the first specific winning port 65a which is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have passed or until 10 balls have been won).

The first specific winning opening 65a is closed after a predetermined period of time has passed, and after the closure, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined period of time. The opening and closing operation of the first specific prize winning port 65a can be repeated up to 14 times (14 rounds), for example. More specifically, the opening and closing operation of the first specific winning port 65a is executed in the 1st to 11th rounds and the 13th to 15th rounds of the special game state. The state in which this opening and closing operation is performed is one form of a special game state that is advantageous to the player, and the player is given a game value (game value) by paying out a larger amount of prize balls than usual. is done.

Specifically, the first variable prize winning device 65 includes a horizontally long rectangular opening/closing plate that covers the first specific prize winning opening 65a, and a large opening solenoid ( not shown). The first specific prize winning port 65a is normally in a closed state in which a ball cannot or hardly wins a prize. In the event of a big win, the opening/closing plate is tilted downward in the front by driving the large opening solenoid to temporarily form an open state in which the ball easily enters the first specific prize winning port 65a, and the open state and the normal state are formed. The closed state and the state of the closed state are alternately repeated.

A second variable prize winning device 650 is provided on the lower left side of the first variable prize winning device 65, and a horizontally long rectangular second specific prize winning port (second large opening) 650a is provided above it. . The opening/closing plate that covers the second specific winning opening 650a forms a closed state that prevents the ball from entering the second variable winning device 650 by protruding forward in a front view (see FIG. 14(a). ). On the other hand, a special symbol lottery results in a big win, and in the 12th round, the opening/closing plate covering the second specific prize winning opening 650a slides to the back side in the front view, so that it sinks to the back side of the game board 13, and the ball is pushed to the back side. 2 Forms an open state in which a ball can enter the variable winning device 650 (see FIG. 14(b)).

As described above, the ball entering the second specific winning hole 650a in the special game state (during the jackpot) enters the probability variable ball entering hole 654 provided inside the second variable winning device 650. , After the end of the jackpot, the special symbol shifts to a variable state. On the other hand, when the ball does not enter the second specific winning hole 650a in the special game state, or even if it enters the second specific winning hole 650a, all the balls enter the normal ball entering hole 655. If you do, after the end of the jackpot, it shifts to the time-saving state of normal symbols.

Incidentally, the special game state is not limited to the form described above. In addition to the first specific winning opening 65a and the second specific winning opening 650a, other winning openings may be provided as winning openings opened in the special game state. Conversely, only the first specific winning opening 65a may be used as the winning opening. Also, the arrangement position is not limited to the arrangement of this embodiment, and may be arranged at any position.

A storage device 600 is provided on the right side of the first variable winning device 65 . This storage device 600 is provided with a plurality of ball entrances (general winning entrances 601, 602, and out-ports 603a to 603c) in its interior, and the entering ball flows down to one of the entrances. be able to. In addition, the storage device 600 can store (stop the flow down) of only one ball that has entered its interior. Further, the storage device 600 is covered with a transparent cover body on the front side in front view, and it is possible to determine which ball entrance the ball that the player has entered (entered) into the storage device 600 enters. is configured so that it can be easily checked. Details of the storage device 600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 8 and 9. FIG.

FIG. 8 is a diagram showing an overview of the storage device 600. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 8, the storage device 600 is configured such that a ball can enter the inside of the storage device 600 via the guide channel 605 . The storage device 600 is configured so that when the player hits to the right, one ball hits about every three hit balls. Balls that do not enter the guide channel 605 flow down along the left upper portion of the storage device 600 toward the first specific winning port 65a and the second specific winning port 650a. That is, in the special game state, the player makes it so that some of the balls shot toward the first specific winning port 65a and the second specific winning port 650a enter the storage device 600 via the guiding flow path 605. is configured to

As shown in FIG. 8 , two types of flow paths branched by a branching member 604 are provided downstream of the guide flow path 605 inside the storage device 600 . Specifically, inside the storage device 600, a guide channel 606 is provided on the left side when viewed from the front. Most of the balls that have flowed down this guide channel 606 enter the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601 provided on the downstream side. A detection switch 601a (not shown) capable of detecting that a ball has entered (passed) is provided in the general winning hole (small value winning hole) 601 . When the detection switch 601a detects that a ball has entered the general prize winning opening (small value winning opening) 601, three winning balls are paid out. In addition, on the left and right sides of the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601, the ball which did not enter the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601 despite flowing down the guide channel 606 is discharged. Out ports 603a and 603b are provided for this purpose. These out ports can prevent (suppress) the accumulation of balls inside the storage device 600 and reliably discharge the balls that have flowed down the guide channel 606 . Further, detection switches 603a1 and 603b1 (not shown) are provided at these out-ports 603a and 603b, respectively, like the general prize-winning port (small value prize-winning port) 601. FIG. These detection switches 603a1 and 603b1 make it possible to accurately determine the number of ejected balls.

Inside the storage device 600, a guide channel 607 through which the balls can flow down is provided on the right side when viewed from the front. Most of the game balls that have flowed down this guidance channel 607 enter the general prize winning opening (large value winning prize opening) 602 provided on the downstream side. A detection switch 602a (not shown) capable of detecting that a ball has entered (passed through) is provided in the general winning hole (large value winning hole) 602 . When the detection switch 602a detects that a ball has entered the general prize winning opening (high value winning opening) 602, 15 prize balls are paid out. That is, more prize balls can be obtained when the ball enters the general prize winning opening (large value winning opening) 602 than when the ball enters the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601. can. Out-ports 603b and 603c are provided on the left and right sides of the general prize-winning port (high-value prize-winning port) 602, respectively. These out-ports prevent (suppress) the balls that have not entered the general prize-winning port (high-value prize-winning port) 602 from accumulating inside the storage device 600, and the balls that have flowed down the guide channel 607 are removed. can be discharged without fail. Further, the out port 603c is provided with a detection switch 603c1 (not shown) in the same way as the out ports 603a and 603b. The detection switch 603c1 makes it possible to accurately determine the number of ejected balls.

Although the details will be described later, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the special game state (jackpot state) is reached, the ball is set to be easily entered into the general winning hole (large value winning hole) 602. , In states other than the special game state (jackpot state), a state is set in which it is easy to enter the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601 . That is, in the special game state, in addition to obtaining a large amount of prize balls by opening the first specific prize winning port 65a and the second specific prize winning port 650a, the general prize winning port (large value winning prize) in the storage device 600 It is configured so that a prize ball can be obtained by winning a ball into the outlet 602 . As a result, it is possible to increase the number of prize balls that can be obtained in one special game state (big win state), so that the player's merit by winning a big win can be enhanced. Therefore, the player can play the game with more pleasure in winning a big win, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, in states other than the special game state (jackpot state), the general prize winning port (high value winning port) 602 with a relatively large number of prize balls to be paid out is closed by the storage valve 607a, and the relatively number of prize balls to be paid out is closed. A state is set in which the ball is likely to enter the general prize winning opening (small value winning opening) 601 with less value. That is, in a state other than the special game state, there is little merit in putting balls into the storage device 600, so even in a state other than the special game state, the player tries to receive a large amount of payout by always aiming at the storage device 600. An irregular game method can be prevented (suppressed). As described above, the storage device 600 is configured so that one out of every three balls hit right-handed will enter the storage device 600 . The number of prize balls paid out when the ball enters the general prize winning opening (small value winning opening) 601 is three balls. That is, even if right-handed hitting is executed in a normal state, it is difficult to draw a lottery for a special symbol, and the number of balls cannot be increased by payout based on the balls entering the general prize winning opening (small value winning opening) 601.例文帳に追加Therefore, in the normal state, it is possible to make the player want to hit left.

The guide channel 607 is provided with a storage valve 607a. The storage valve 607a can block the guide channel 607 by protruding forward in a front view, and can prevent the balls that have progressed to the guide channel 607 from flowing down. That is, the ball can be stopped (ball is stored) at the upper portion of the storage valve 607a. The storage valve 607a is configured to be driven by a storage device solenoid 610 (see FIG. 17). More specifically, by driving the storage device solenoid 610, the storage valve 607a protrudes forward in front view (a state in which the guide channel 607 is blocked) and the storage valve 607a protrudes toward the back in front view. It is configured to be switchable between a buried state (a state in which the ball can flow down the guide channel 607). The balls stored in the upper portion of the storage valve 607a are prevented (suppressed) from flowing out to the side of the guide channel 606 by being surrounded by the inner wall of the guide channel 607 and the branch member 604. . That is, the protruding portion 604a provided on the branch member 604 is set high enough to prevent the balls stored in the upper portion of the storage valve 607a from flowing out.

Next, with reference to FIG. 9, the operation of the ball entering the storage device 600 will be described for each of the two types of states that the storage valve 607a described above can take. FIG. 9(a) is a diagram showing the motion of a ball entering the storage device 600 with the storage valve 607a protruding forward, and FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the motion of a ball that enters the storage device 600 in a state of being buried in the ball.

As shown in FIG. 9( a ), more than half of the lower end of the guide channel 605 overlaps the upper end of the guide channel 607 . On the other hand, the upper end portion of the guide channel 606 is positioned to the left of the central axis 605 a of the guide channel 605 and hardly overlaps the lower end portion of the guide channel 605 . Therefore, the sphere that has flowed down the guide channel 605 can easily advance to the guide channel 607 .

The sphere that has advanced to the guide channel 607 is prevented from flowing down by the storage valve 607a and stops above the storage valve 607a (the sphere is stored). Then, when another ball newly flows down the guide channel 605 in the state where the ball is stopped (ball is stored) in the upper part of the storage valve 607a, the new ball flows down the guide channel 605. The sphere that has come into contact (interference) with the sphere stored on the storage valve 607a. Due to this contact (interference), the trajectory (flowing direction) of the sphere newly flowing down the guiding channel 605 is changed.

Since the guide channel 607 is provided slightly to the right of the guide channel 605 (see FIG. 9A), the spheres stored on the reservoir valve 607a are newly moved to the guide channel 605. In most cases, it stops on the right side of the falling ball. Therefore, the ball newly flowing down the guide channel 605 collides with the left side of the ball stored in the upper part of the storage valve 607a, and is repelled leftward in the front view. Therefore, the ball newly flowing down the guide channel 605 advances to the guide channel 606 provided on the left side in the front view. As described above, most of the balls that flow down the guide channel 606 enter the general prize winning opening (small value winning opening) 601 with a relatively small number of paid out prize balls (three prize balls). That is, in a state in which the storage valve 607a protrudes toward the near side in a front view and balls cannot flow down the guide channel 607 (a state in which the guide channel 607 is closed), most of the balls entering the storage device 600 are generally The ball is entered into a winning opening (small value winning opening) 601 .

On the other hand, when the storage valve 607a is buried on the back side in the front view (see FIG. 9B), there is nothing to prevent the balls that have progressed to the guide channel 607 from flowing down, so the guide channel 607 The ball that advances to , flows down the guiding channel 607 as it is, and enters the general prize winning opening (large value winning prize opening) 602 . As described above, the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602 is a winning opening with a relatively large number of paid out balls (15 pieces), so there are many merits for the player to win.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured so that the balls can flow down the guide channel 607 (see FIG. 9B) when the jackpot is won. Therefore, in the special game state, by making the ball enter the first specific winning hole 65a or the second specific winning hole 650a by hitting to the right in the special game state, in addition to obtaining a large amount of prize balls, it is possible to shoot by hitting to the right. Prize balls can be obtained by winning a part of the collected balls into a general prize winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 in the storage device 600 . As a result, it is possible to increase the number of prize balls that can be obtained in one special game state (big win state), so that it is possible to increase the player's merit by winning a big win. As a result, the player can play the game with a greater enjoyment of winning the jackpot, and thus the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, as described above, in states other than the special game state (jackpot state), the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602 with a relatively large number of winning balls to be paid out is closed by the storage valve 607a, and a relatively large number of winning balls are paid out. A state is set in which a ball can easily enter a general winning hole (small value winning hole) 601 in which the number of winning balls to be won is small. That is, in a state other than the special game state, there is little merit in putting balls into the storage device 600, so even in a state other than the special game state, the player tries to receive a large amount of payout by always aiming at the storage device 600. The game method can be prevented (suppressed).

In the present embodiment, the ball that has flowed down the guide channel 606 enters the general winning port (small value winning port) 601, and the ball that has flowed down the guide channel 607 enters the general ball inlet 602. However, it is not limited to this. For example, on the downstream side of each guide flow path, a known crew means having a plurality of winning holes is provided, and different prize balls are paid out according to the winning hole into which the ball enters. good too. As a result, even if the guide channel 606 is flown down, a large number of prize balls can be obtained by making the ball enter a prize-winning opening from which a relatively large number of prize balls are dispensed. Therefore, the player can watch with interest until the ball entering the storage device 600 enters one of the winning holes. Therefore, when the ball enters the storage device 600, the player can be more entertained.

In the present embodiment, the guide channel 607 is blocked by the reservoir valve 607a so that the spheres can be stored in the guide channel 607. It may be configured to store balls on the way of 607 . That is, an electromagnet is embedded in the inner wall portion of the guide channel 607, and is magnetized by energizing the electromagnet in a state other than the special game state (during the jackpot state). As a result, the spheres that first flowed into the guide channel 607 can be drawn to the location where the electromagnet is provided, and the downflow of the spheres can be stopped (the spheres can be stored at the position of the electromagnets). By configuring in this way, the space for burying the storage valve 607a can be reduced. Therefore, the storage device 600 can be made more compact.

Also, in the present embodiment, one ball is stored in the upper portion of the storage valve 607a, but this is not a limitation, and two or more balls may be stored. Furthermore, when storing a plurality of balls, they may be stored in the vertical direction, or may be configured so that they can be stored side by side.

In this embodiment, the outlet is provided inside the storage device 600, but instead of the outlet, a prize winning outlet through which prize balls are dispensed may be provided. Also, the number of prize balls to be paid out may be varied by entering the balls into the respective prize winning openings. More specifically, for example, instead of the out port 603a, a prize winning port with 6 prize balls is provided, in place of the out port 603b, a prize winning port with 10 prize balls is provided, and in place of the out port 603c, a prize winning port is provided. may provide 12 winning openings. As a result, it is possible to more interestingly observe when the ball flows down the guiding channel 606 and to which winning opening the ball enters the guiding channel 607 . Also, a member such as a nail that can change the flow direction of the ball may be provided downstream of the guide channel 606 or the guide channel 607 so that the winning opening into which the ball enters is more random. . As a result, when the ball has flowed into the storage device 600, it is possible to more interestingly observe the whereabouts of the ball until the ball enters one of the winning holes. In addition, by providing a nail or the like, it is possible for the staff of the hall to set a ball entrance into which the ball can easily enter. Therefore, the ball output rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be adjusted on the hall side.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 10 and 11, the path when the player shoots the ball to the right side of the game board 13 (when hitting right) will be described. First, FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a portion of the path (channel) provided on the right side of the game board 13, which is upstream of the storage device 600. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 10, a normal ball entrance 67 is provided in the upper part of the flow path (path) on the right side of the game board 13 . As described above, when the ball passes through the normal ball entrance 67, a lottery for normal symbols is executed. Then, when the win of the normal pattern is reached, the second pattern display device 83 executes the variation performance for showing the lottery result of the normal pattern, and then displays the ``○'' pattern indicating the win of the normal pattern. Then, based on the display of the "○" symbol on the second symbol display device 83, the electric accessory 640a associated with the second ball entrance 640 provided downstream of the normal ball entrance 67 is activated. It is opened for a predetermined period (0.2 sec x 1 time or 1 sec x 2 times). While the electric accessory 640 is open, it becomes easier for a right-handed ball to enter the second ball entrance 640 . As described above, during the probability change of the special symbols and during the time saving of the normal symbols, the probability of winning the normal symbols increases, the fluctuation time of the normal symbols shortens, and the open period of the electric accessory becomes longer. A ball is in a state where it is easy for the ball to enter the second ball entrance 640 . Therefore, by executing a right-hand shot, a special symbol lottery can be received without reducing the number of balls.

Next, with reference to FIG. 11, a portion downstream of the second ball entrance 640 in the path (channel) provided on the right side of the game board 13 will be described. As shown in FIG. 11 , a storage device 600 is provided downstream of a path (channel) provided on the right side of the game board 13 . A first variable winning device 65 is provided downstream of the entrance of the storage device 600, and a second variable winning device 650 is provided downstream of the first variable winning device 65. (see Figure 11). That is, when the player hits to the right, among the balls that have flowed downstream in the right path (channel), the ball that has flowed downstream without entering (entering) the storage device 600 is ranked first. 1 It flows down in the direction of the variable winning device 65 . Balls that flow down in the direction of the first variable winning device 65 and do not enter the first specific winning port 65 a flow down in the direction of the second variable winning device 650 .

In this way, the ball can flow down in the direction of the storage device 600, the first variable winning device 65, and the second variable winning device 650 only by the player hitting to the right. Therefore, in the special game state (jackpot state), the player can make the ball enter the first specific winning hole 65a or the second specific winning hole 650a only by hitting to the right. You can win prizes. Also, part of the ball hit aiming at the first specific winning hole 65 a or the second specific winning hole 650 a enters the storage device 600 . As described above, in the special game state (jackpot state), most of the balls that enter the storage device 600 enter the general winning hole (large value winning hole) 602 (see FIG. 9B). ), the player can win more prize balls during the special game state. As a result, the player can play the game with a greater enjoyment of winning the jackpot, and thus the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Next, specific operations of the first variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 650 will be described with reference to FIGS. 12 to 16. FIG. First, FIG. 12 is a diagram showing opening operations of the first variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 650. As shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 12(a), the first specific prize winning port 65a of the first variable prize winning device 65 is configured to be openable forward in a front view. By opening the first specific winning hole 65a, a game ball flowing down a path (channel) provided on the right side of the game board 13 can enter the first specific winning hole 65a. In addition, as described above, the first specific prize winning port 65a is used in the 1st to 11th rounds and the 13th to 15th rounds of the special game state (jackpot state) for a predetermined period (for example, until 30 seconds elapse, or until 10 balls (until you win a prize). Then, when a ball enters the first specific winning hole 65a, 15 prize balls are paid out per one ball entering. Therefore, the player can win a large amount of prize balls.

Further, as shown in FIG. 12(b), the second specific prize winning port 650 of the second variable prize winning device 650 can be buried inside the game board 13 by sliding to the back side in front view. configured as possible. As a result, the upper portion of the second variable prize winning device 650 is opened, and a game ball flowing down a path (channel) provided on the right side of the game board 13 can enter. As described above, the first specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined period of time (for example, until 30 seconds have passed or until 10 balls have been won) in 12 rounds of the special game state (jackpot state). Then, when a ball enters the second specific winning hole 650a, 15 prize balls are paid out per one entering ball. Therefore, the player can win a lot of prize balls.

Next, with reference to FIG. 13, the movement of the ball that has flowed down the path (flow path) on the right side of the game board 13 and reached the first specific winning hole 65a by hitting to the right will be described. First, FIG. 13(a) shows a case where the ball reaches the first specific winning opening 65a in a state where the first specific winning opening 65a is closed.

As shown in FIG. 13(a), when the ball reaches the first specific winning hole 65a with the first specific winning hole 65a closed, the ball enters the first specific winning hole 65a. , it falls into the space in front of the first specific winning opening 65a (see FIG. 13(a)). Then, the ball that has fallen to the front side of the first specific prize winning port 65a flows down a channel provided below the first specific prize winning port 65a. Since the flow path below the first specific winning hole 65a is inclined toward the second specific winning hole 650a, the ball flows down in the direction of the second specific winning hole 650a.

On the other hand, when the ball reaches the first specific winning hole 65a with the first specific winning hole 65a open, as shown in FIG. The opening portion of the 1 specific prize winning port 65a is located. Therefore, the ball enters the first specific winning hole 65a. As shown in FIG. 13(b), inside the first variable winning device 65, a ball discharge port 65c for discharging balls to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 is provided. By entering the ball discharge port 65c, winning of the ball is detected and the prize ball is paid out, and the ball enters the inside of the first variable winning device 65 from the first specific winning port 65a. can be discharged. In addition, since the bottom portion 65b of the first variable winning device 65 is inclined toward the ball discharge port 65c, all the balls entering the first specific prize winning port 65a enter the ball discharge port 65c. can be balled. Therefore, all the balls can be reliably discharged.

Next, with reference to FIG. 14, the motion of the ball that has flowed down the path (flow path) on the right side of the game board 13 and reached the second specific winning hole 650a by hitting to the right will be described. First, FIG. 14(a) shows a case where the ball reaches the second specific winning opening 650a in a state where the second specific winning opening 650a is closed.

As shown in FIG. 14(a), when the ball reaches the second specific winning port 650a with the second specific winning port 650a closed, the ball enters the second specific winning port 650a. , it flows down the upper part of the second specific winning port 650a and falls to the left side of the second variable winning device 650 (see FIG. 14(a)). Then, the ball dropped to the left side of the second specific winning hole 650a flows down to the out hole 66 (see FIG. 2) provided on the left side of the second specific winning hole 650a.

On the other hand, when the ball reaches the second specific winning opening 650a with the second specific winning opening 650a open, as shown in FIG. The opening portion of the 2 specific winning opening 650a is located. Therefore, the ball enters the second specific winning hole 650a. As shown in FIG. 14(b), inside the second variable winning device 650, a ball discharge port 650c for discharging balls to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 is provided. By entering the ball discharge port 650c, winning of the ball is detected and the prize ball is paid out, and the ball entering the inside of the second variable winning device 650 from the second specific winning port 650a. can be discharged. In addition, since the bottom portion 650b of the second variable prize winning device 650 is inclined in the direction of the ball discharge port 650c, all the balls entering the second specific prize winning port 650a enter the ball discharge port 650c. can be balled. Therefore, all the balls can be reliably discharged.

Next, with reference to FIG. 15, the downstream structure of the ball outlet 650c of the second variable winning device 650 will be described. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, in the special game state (jackpot state), when a ball enters the probability variable ball entrance 654 provided inside the second variable winning device 650, After the end of the big hit, it is configured to shift to the probability variable state of the special symbol. This variable ball inlet 654 is provided in one of the two flow paths (guide flow path 652 and guide flow path 653) provided downstream of the ball discharge port 650c (guide flow path 652). It is At the upper ends of the two flow paths, a flow path switching valve 650d is provided for setting the flow path through which the ball flows. The flow path switching valve 650d is provided to close one of the two flow paths so that the ball cannot advance, and to open the other flow path so that the ball can advance. It is The channel switching valve 650d can be rotated around the switching shaft 650e by driving the channel solenoid 611 (see FIG. 17). to switch the layout.

FIGS. 15(a) and 15(b) are diagrams showing the movement of the ball for each arrangement of the channel switching valve 650d. First, FIG. 15( a ) is a diagram showing a case where the channel switching valve 650 d is arranged to close the guide channel 652 . In the case of the arrangement in which the guide channel 652 is closed, the ball entering the ball discharge port 650c is prevented from proceeding to the guide channel 652 by being blocked by the channel switching valve 650d. Therefore, the sphere advances to the guiding channel 653 (see FIG. 15(a)). A ball inlet 655 is usually provided downstream of the guide channel 653 . That is, while the arrangement shown in FIG. In this embodiment, by turning off the flow path solenoid 611, the flow path switching valve 650d is arranged as shown in FIG. 15(a).

On the other hand, FIG. 15B is a diagram showing a case where the channel switching valve 650d is arranged to close the guide channel 653. As shown in FIG. This arrangement can be realized by turning on (exciting) the flow path solenoid 611 . In the arrangement in which the guide channel 653 is closed, the ball entering the ball discharge port 650c can proceed to the guide channel 652 without being blocked by the channel switching valve 650d. Therefore, the ball advances to the guide channel 653 and enters the variable probability ball entrance 654 provided downstream thereof.

When the ball enters the probability variable entry hole 654, it is set to shift to the probability variable state of the special symbol at the end of the big hit (at the start of the ending effect). Further, when the 12th round in which the second specific winning hole 650a is opened ends, a suggestion effect is executed to suggest to the player the game state after the end of the big win in subsequent rounds. That is, if the ball enters the probability variable entrance 654 in the 12th round, in the 13th to 15th rounds, the third symbol display device 81 provides a display effect that suggests that the special symbol will shift to the probability variable state. is executed in On the other hand, if the ball does not enter the probability variable entrance 654 in the 12th round, in the 13th to 15th rounds, the third symbol display device 81 provides a display effect suggesting a shift to the time-saving state of the normal symbol. is executed in In this way, by setting the 12th round as the round in which the big 2 specific winning hole 650a is opened, a sufficient period of time for executing the suggestive effect suggesting the game state after the end of the big win is ensured in the remaining rounds of the big win. be able to.

In addition, as described above, in the path (channel) provided on the right side of the game board 13, the second variable prize winning device 650 is provided downstream of the entrance of the pooling device 600, so that the balls flow into the pooling device 600. The easier it is for the ball to flow in, the more difficult it is for the ball to reach the second variable winning device 650 . If it becomes difficult for the ball to reach the second variable winning device 650, it becomes difficult for the ball to enter the variable probability ball entrance 654 in the 12th round of the big win B. Conversely, the more difficult it is for the ball to flow into the storage device 600, the easier it is for the ball to reach the second variable winning device 650, so the ball is more likely to enter the variable entry hole 654 in the 12 rounds of the big win B. Become. Therefore, by adjusting the ease with which balls flow into the storage device 600, the rate of ball entry into the variable probability entrance port 654 can be changed. Here, as a method of adjusting the ease of inflow into the storage device 600, for example, adjusting a nail (see FIG. 11) provided at the inlet portion of the storage device 600 can be mentioned. That is, the more the two pegs provided at the inlet portion of the storage device 600 are adjusted to approach each other, the more difficult it is for the ball to pass through between these two pegs, and thus the more difficult it is for the ball to flow into the storage device 600. . Therefore, in 12 rounds of the big hit B, the ball is easily entered into the probability variable entrance 654, so that the transition to the probability variable state of the special symbol can be easily performed. On the other hand, the more the two pegs provided at the inlet portion of the storage device 600 are adjusted to separate them from each other, the easier it is for the ball to pass between the two pegs, and the easier it is for the ball to flow into the storage device 600. . Therefore, in the 12th round of the big hit B, the balls are likely to flow into the probability variable entrance 654, so that it is possible to make it difficult to shift to the probability variable state of the special symbol. Therefore, by adjusting the nail provided at the entrance portion of the storage device 600, the specs of the pachinko machine 10 (ratio of probability variable state of special symbols) can be varied, so that pachinko can be adapted to the business policy of each hall. The specifications of the machine 10 can be changed.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the operation of the flow path switching valve 650d has the same pattern regardless of the type of jackpot. On the other hand, the opening pattern of the second specific winning opening 650a differs between the jackpot A and the jackpot B. As a result, in the special game state (big win state), it is easier for the ball to enter the variable probability ball entrance 654 in the big win B than in the big win A. The relationship between the switching pattern of the channel switching valve 650d and the opening pattern of the second specific prize winning opening 650a will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 16(a) is a diagram showing changes in timing of the second specific prize winning opening (second large opening opening) 650a and the channel switching valve 650d in the 12th round of the jackpot A. FIG. The upper graph in FIG. 16(a) shows the time-measured change (whether it is open or closed) of the second specific prize winning opening (second large open opening) 650a. The figure on the lower side is a diagram showing the chronological change of the flow path switching valve 650d (whether the downstream left guiding flow path 652 of the ball discharge port 650c is open or the right guiding flow path 653 is open). be.

As shown in FIG. 16(a), when the 12th round is started, the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a is opened for a predetermined time (for example, 0.2 seconds), and the predetermined time After (for example, 0.2 seconds) has passed, the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a is closed. The closed state is maintained until 7 seconds have passed since the start of the 12th round, and the open state is set based on the lapse of 7 seconds. This open state continues until the end of the 12th round. Specifically, the opening state is set until 10 balls enter the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a, or until 30 seconds elapse from the start of the 12th round. be done. Then, when the 12th round ends, the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a is closed. This closed state continues until the special game state (big win state) ends and the next 12 rounds of big wins.

In addition, in the 12th round of the jackpot A, the flow path switching valve 650d is set to close the induction flow path 653 provided on its right side and allow the ball to flow down the left induction flow path 652 (Fig. 15 (b)). This state continues for 6.5 seconds after the start of the 12th round, and when 6.5 seconds have passed, the flow path switching valve 650d is reversed. That is, the guide channel 652 is closed by the channel switching valve 650d, and a state is set in which the ball can flow down the guide channel 653 provided on the right side of the channel switching valve 650d (see FIG. 15(a)). Since this switching operation is completed in a period of 0.5 seconds or less, the channel can be switched before the second specific prize winning opening (second large opening) 650a is opened.

After the direction of the flow path switching valve 650d is switched, the state (the state in which the ball can flow down the guide flow path 653) is maintained. The state in which the ball can flow down the guide channel 653 is the next big win, which continues until the 11th round is completed. Then, when the 11th round ends and the 3-second interval period starts, a state is set in which the ball can flow down the guiding channel 652 (the channel solenoid 611 is turned on). In other words, during most of the period in which the player is playing the game, the ball can pass through the guide channel 653 provided on the right side of the channel switching valve 650d. The state in which the ball can pass through the guidance channel 652 is limited from the interval period (3 seconds) set before the start of 12 rounds to 6.5 seconds after the start of 12 rounds. There is only a period (9.5 seconds). Therefore, even if the ball enters the second specific winning hole (second large open hole) 650a other than the 12th round in the special game state, the ball enters the variable probability ball hole 654. Since it is possible to prevent (suppress) the ball from being thrown, it is possible to prevent (suppress) from illegally acquiring the probability variable state of the special symbol.

Note that the timing for switching the channel switching valve 650d is not limited to this. For example, the guide channel 652 may be configured to switch to an open state at the start of 12 rounds, or in the middle of an interval period set after the 11 rounds (for example, after the interval starts). 0.5 second) may be configured to switch. As a result, the period in which the guide channel 652 is opened can be shortened, so that the ball can enter the inside of the second variable prize winning device 650 illegally while the second specific prize winning port 650a is closed. Even if it does, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the ball from entering the variable probability ball entrance 654 . That is, fraud can be prevented.

In this way, in the 12th round of the jackpot A, the period during which the induction channel 652 provided on the left side of the channel switching valve 650d is open, and the second specific winning port (second large opening port) 650a is open. The opening pattern of the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a is set so that the period during which the game is played hardly overlaps (overlaps only for 0.2 seconds immediately after the start of 12 rounds). Therefore, in many cases of a big hit A, the balls do not enter the variable probability ball entrance 654 during the special game state (during the big win), so that it is difficult to set the variable probability state of the special pattern after the end of the big win.

The reason why the second specific prize winning opening (second large open opening) 650a is opened in 0.2 seconds immediately after the start of the 12 rounds is to make it difficult to understand that the jackpot A is received immediately after the start of the 12 rounds. is. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. ) 650a is opened. Therefore, by sharing the operation of the second specific prize winning port (second large opening port) 650a immediately after the start of 12 rounds between the big win A and the big win B, it is expected that the big win this time is the big win B. be able to.

Next, with reference to FIG. 16(b), changes in timing of the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a and the channel switching valve 650d in the 12th round of the jackpot B will be described. The graph on the upper side of FIG. 16(b) shows the timing change (whether it is in the open state or the closed state) of the second specific prize winning port (second large opening port) 650a. The figure on the lower side shows the chronological change of the flow path switching valve 650d (whether the downstream left guiding flow path 652 of the ball discharge port 650c is open or the right guiding flow path 653 is open). be.

As shown in FIG. 16(b), when the 12th round is started, the second specific prize winning opening (second large open opening) 650a is set to the open state. The open state is maintained until 5 seconds have passed since the start of the 12th round, and the closed state is set based on the lapse of 5 seconds. Even if 10 balls enter the second specific prize winning opening (second large opening) 650a before 5 seconds elapse, the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a Closed. This closed state continues until the special game state (big win state) ends and the next 12 rounds of big wins.

In addition, as described above, in the 12th round of the big win B, the passage switching valve 650d is set to perform the same operation as that of the big win A. That is, based on the start of the interval period set at the end of the 11th round, the guide channel 653 provided on the right side of the channel switching valve 650d is closed so that the ball can flow down the guide channel 652 on the left side. (see FIG. 15(b)). Then, when 6.5 seconds have passed since the 12th round started, the channel switching valve 650d is switched to the reverse direction. That is, the guide channel 652 is closed by the channel switching valve 650d, and a state is set in which the ball can flow down the guide channel 653 provided on the right side of the channel switching valve 650d (see FIG. 15(a)). After the direction of the flow path switching valve 650d is switched, the state (the state in which the ball can flow down the guide flow path 653) is maintained.

In this way, in the 12th round of the jackpot B, the period during which the induction channel 652 provided on the left side of the channel switching valve 650d is open, and the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a is open. The opening pattern of the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a is set so that the period overlaps with the period of 5 seconds at maximum. Therefore, in many cases when the jackpot B is reached, the ball can be entered into the probability variable entrance 654 during the special game state (during the jackpot), so the special symbol probability variable state is set after the jackpot. easier.

In addition, the opening pattern of the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a is not limited to this. It may be determined arbitrarily as long as it is possible to set a pattern in which it is difficult for the ball to enter the ball. Moreover, the switching pattern of the flow path switching valve 650d is not limited to the mode of this embodiment, and can be arbitrarily determined. For example, the flow path switching valve 650d is set so that the ball can flow down the guide flow path 653 at the start of 12 rounds (see FIG. 15(a)), and a predetermined time (eg, 6.5. 5 seconds) has elapsed, the flow path switching valve 650d may be set so that the ball can flow down the guide flow path 652 (see FIG. 15(b)).

Also, the number of rounds in which the second specific prize winning opening (second large open opening) 650a is opened is not limited to the 12th round, and may be set to any round. Furthermore, the second specific prize winning opening 650a may be configured to be opened in a plurality of rounds. can be set to As a result, it is possible to increase the chances for the ball to enter the probability variable entrance 654, so that after the big win B is finished, the probability variable state of the special symbol can be more likely to be obtained. Therefore, even though the jackpot B is won, the ball cannot be entered into the second specific prize winning opening (second large open opening) 650a, and the player's motivation for playing the game is lowered. It can be prevented (suppressed).

Returning to FIG. 2, the description continues. An affixing space K<b>1 for affixing a certificate stamp, an identification label, etc. is provided in the lower right corner of the game board 13 . 35 (see FIG. 1).

The game board 13 is provided with a first outlet 71 . Balls that flow down the game area and do not win in any of the winning holes 63, 64, 65a, 640 are guided through the first out hole 71 to a ball discharge path (not shown). The first out port 71 is arranged below the first ball entrance 64 .

Furthermore, the game board 13 is provided with an out port 66 . Balls that do not enter any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a, 601, 602, 650a and the out-openings 603a to 603c are guided through the out-opening 66 to a ball discharge path (not shown). The game board 13 is provided with a large number of nails for properly dispersing and adjusting the falling direction of the balls, and various members (accessories) such as windmills.

As shown in FIG. 3, on the rear side of the pachinko machine 10, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main controller 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

The back pack unit 94 is formed by unitizing a back pack 92 forming a protective cover portion and a dispensing unit 93 . In addition, each control board has an MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that manages each control, a port that communicates with various devices, a random number generator that is used for various lotteries, and is used for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit or the like is mounted as required.

The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113, the display control device 114, the payout control device 111, the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . Each of the board boxes 100 to 104 has a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other to accommodate each controller and each board.

In addition, the board box 100 (main controller 110) and the board box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and firing control device 112) connect the box base and the box cover in an unopenable manner (caulking structure) by means of a sealing unit (not shown). consolidation). A sealing seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. The sealing seal is made of a brittle material, and if the sealing seal is peeled off in order to open the circuit board boxes 100, 102, or if the circuit board boxes 100, 102 are forcibly opened, the box base and the box may be damaged. Cover side and cut. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether the substrate boxes 100, 102 have been opened.

The dispensing unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and open upward, a tank rail 131 connected to the lower side of the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a tank rail 131 downstream of the tank rail 131. and a payout device 133 which is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and which pays out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 17). ing. The tank 130 is successively replenished with balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall, and a payout device 133 pays out the required number of balls as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131 .

In addition, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with an operation knob 121 of a variable resistor, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state recovery switch 120 is operated to eliminate ball clogging (return to normal state) when a dispensing error such as ball clogging occurs in the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 17). The operating knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when the pachinko machine 10 is to be returned to its initial state.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the first embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 17 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG.

The main control unit 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 storing various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202. A RAM 203 and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit are incorporated. In the main control unit 110, the MPU 201 performs main processing of the pachinko machine 10, such as the setting of the jackpot lottery, the display settings of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and the lottery of the display results of the second symbol display device. Execute.

In addition, various commands are transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub-controller by the data transmission/reception circuit in order to instruct the operation of the sub-controller such as the payout controller 111 and the sound lamp controller 113. Such commands are sent in only one direction from the main controller 110 to the sub-controllers.

First, the contents of the ROM 202 will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 18(a), the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 contains a first winning random number table 202a, a first winning type selection table 202b, and a second winning random number table 202c as part of the above fixed value data. , and a variation pattern selection table 202d are stored at least.

The first winning random number table 202a (not shown) is a data table in which a jackpot determination value of a first winning random number counter C1, which will be described later, is stored. Although the details will be described later together with the description of the first winning random number counter C1, the value of the first winning random number counter C1 obtained based on the starting winning is one of the determination values defined in the first winning random number table 202a. , it is determined to be a special symbol jackpot.

The first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 18(b)) is a data table in which the determination value for determining the jackpot type is stored. , And it is defined in association with the type of entrance that triggered the lottery of special symbols. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when it is determined to be a special symbol jackpot, the value of the first winning type counter C2 acquired based on the start winning is compared with the first winning type selection table 202b. A jackpot type corresponding to the value of the winning type counter C2 is selected.

Specifically, when the special symbol 1 lottery (lottery based on the ball entering the first entrance 64) results in a big hit, the value of the first winning type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 49". is defined in association with the jackpot A (see 202b1 in FIG. 18(b)). As described above, when the jackpot A is won, most of the period in which the second specific winning opening (second large opening opening) 650a is opened in the 12th round is the induction provided on the right side of the flow path switching valve 650d. It is configured to be a period during which the channel 653 is open (see FIG. 16(a)). Therefore, since it becomes difficult to let the ball flow down to the guide channel 652 provided on the left side of the channel switching valve 650d, the ball is moved to the constant variable entrance ball port 654 provided downstream of the guide channel 652. It becomes difficult to let the ball enter. That is, when the jackpot A is achieved, it becomes difficult to shift to the variable probability state of the special symbols after the jackpot is completed.

In addition, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined in the range of "50 to 99" in association with the jackpot B (see 202b2 in FIG. 18(b)). As described above, when the jackpot B is obtained, the entire period in which the second specific winning opening (second large opening opening) 650a is opened in the 12th round is the guidance provided on the left side of the flow path switching valve 650d. It is configured to overlap with the period during which the channel 652 is open (see FIG. 16(b)). Therefore, while the second specific prize winning port (second large opening) 650a is open, the flow path switching valve 650d can be opened simply by entering the ball into the second specific prize winning port (second large opening) 650a. The sphere can flow down to the guiding channel 652 provided on the left side of the . Further, as described above, the variable probability entrance 654 is provided downstream of the guiding flow path 652 . Therefore, when the jackpot B is reached, it becomes easier to shift to the probability variable state of the special symbols after the jackpot is completed.

On the other hand, when the special pattern 2 lottery (lottery based on the ball entering the second ball entrance 640) results in a big hit, the value of the first winning type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 19". A jackpot A is associated and defined (see 202b3 in FIG. 18(b)). In addition, the value of the first winning type counter C2 is defined in the range of "20 to 99" in association with the big winning B. That is, the number of determination values for the big win B is increased when the special symbol 2 lottery results in a big win compared to the case where the special symbol 1 lottery results in a big win. Therefore, when the lottery of the special pattern 2 results in a big win, the big win B is more likely to occur.

As described above, during the probability change of the special symbol, the probability of winning the normal symbol is increased, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is shortened (3 seconds), and the opening time of the electric accessory 640a when the normal symbol is hit. It is set to be longer (1 second x 2 times). Therefore, it becomes easier to enter the ball into the second ball entrance 640, so that the lottery for the special symbol 2 becomes easier. Therefore, once it is possible to shift to the definite variable state of the special symbols, the definite variable state of the special symbols is likely to be a big hit of the special symbols, and when it becomes a big hit, the definite variable state of the special symbols is likely to be a big hit B, and the definite variable of the special symbols after the end of the big win. Since the big winning B, which tends to be in the state, is likely to be repeated, the player can easily win a large number of prize balls. As a result, the player can play the game while strongly anticipating that the special symbols will shift to the variable probability state, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

The second hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 18(c)) is a data table in which hit determination values for normal symbols are stored. Specifically, in the normal state of the normal design, "5 to 28" is defined as the determination value for winning the normal design (see 202c1 in FIG. 18(c)). In addition, in the high-probability state of the normal symbol, "5 to 204" is defined as the determination value for winning the normal symbol (see 202c2 in FIG. 18(c)). In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 obtained based on the ball passing through the normal ball entrance 67 and the second winning random number table 202c are referred to, and the normal symbol is displayed. It is determined whether it is a hit or not.

The variation pattern selection table 202d (not shown) is a data table in which the determination value of the variation type counter CS1 for determining the display mode of the variation pattern is defined for each display mode. The details of the variation pattern selection table 202d will be described later together with the description of the variation type counter CS1.

Returning to FIG. 17, the description continues. In the main control device 110, the special symbol lottery, the normal symbol lottery, the display setting in the first symbol display device 37, the display setting in the second symbol display device 83, and the display setting in the third symbol display device 81 Main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as The RAM 203 is provided with various counters for controlling these processes. Here, with reference to FIG. 19, counters and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 will be described. These counters, etc. are the special symbol lottery, the normal symbol lottery, the setting of the display in the first design display device 37, the setting of the display in the second design display device 83, and the setting of the display in the third design display device 81. etc., it is used in the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 .

In order to select the special symbol lottery and the setting of the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the first winning random number counter C1 used for the special symbol lottery and the special symbol jackpot type. 1st per type counter C2 used for , stop type selection counter C3 used for selecting the stop type of out of special symbols, and first initial value random number used for initial value setting of 1st per random number counter C1 A counter CINI1 and a variation type counter CS1 used for variation pattern selection are used. Also, the second winning random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of normal symbols, and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second winning random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value each time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

Each counter is updated, for example, at intervals of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 25), and some counters are updated irregularly during the main processing (see FIG. 34). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 . In the RAM 203, a special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a corresponding to the winning of the first ball entrance 64 consisting of one execution area and four reserved areas (reservation first to fourth areas) and a second ball entry are stored. A special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203 b corresponding to the winning to the mouth 640 is provided, and each of these areas has a ball entering timing to the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 In addition, each value of the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 is stored. In addition, the RAM 203 is provided with a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c consisting of one execution area and four reserved areas (first to fourth reserved areas). The value of the second winning random number counter C4 is stored in time with the timing of passing through the entrance (through gate) 67. FIG.

Each counter will be described in detail with reference to FIG. The first hit random number counter C1 is incremented by 1 in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 399). It is configured to return to In particular, when the first winning random number counter C1 completes one cycle, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first winning random number counter C1.

The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter updated within the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, if the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take values from 0 to 399, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter that ranges from 0 to 399. This first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once each time the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 25) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main processing (see FIG. 34).

The value of the first winning random number counter C1 is, for example, periodically updated (once per timer interrupt processing in this embodiment), and is the timing at which the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640. is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203. The value of the random number for the special symbol jackpot is set by a first winning random number table 202a (not shown) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, and the value of the first winning random number counter C1 is If the value of the random number that becomes a big hit set by the first winning random number table 202a matches, it is determined as a special symbol big win. In addition, this first random number table 202a is for when the probability of special symbols is low (a period in which the probability of special symbols is low), and when the probability of winning a special symbol is high (special The number of random numbers that will be the big hits included in each type is set differently. In this way, by varying the number of random numbers that result in a big win, the probability of a big win is changed between when the probability of special symbols is low and when the probability of special symbols is high.

Here, the first winning random number table 202a will be described. The first winning random number table 202a is a table in which random numbers (determination values) determined as winning in each game state are set in the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Specifically, in the case of the probability variable state of the special symbol, in the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the value of the acquired first random number counter C1 is "0 to 9" If it is judged and it is any of "0 to 9", it is judged to be a big hit. Among the 400 possible values of ``0 to 399'' of the first winning random number counter C1, there are 10 judging values of ``0 to 9'' to be a big hit. The probability of becoming is 1/40 (10/400). In addition, when the special symbol is in a low probability state, it is determined whether the value of the acquired first winning random number counter C1 is "200", and if "200", it is determined to be a big hit. Among the 400 possible values of ``0 to 399'' of the first winning random number counter C1, the decision value for a big hit is only ``200'', so that the special symbol is in the low probability state of the special symbol. The probability of winning a jackpot is 1/400.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the random number value for the jackpot stored in the first winning random number table for the low probability time and the random number value for the jackpot stored in the first random number table for the high probability time. In order to avoid duplicate values, random numbers are set for each jackpot. Here, if there is a value that is always used as the jackpot random value regardless of the state of the pachinko machine 10, there is a risk that the random value will be input from the outside and the jackpot will be illegally assigned. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, depending on the situation (that is, depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol high probability state or a special symbol low probability state), the random number value for the big win is changed. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to predict the random number value that will be the jackpot of the special symbol, so that fraud can be suppressed.

The first win type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when a special symbol jackpot is won, and adds 1 in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99). and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take values from 0 to 99). The value of the first winning type counter C2 is, for example, periodically updated (once per timer interrupt processing in this embodiment), and at the timing when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64, the special symbol 1 of the RAM 203 is displayed. It is stored in the reserved ball storage area 203a.

Here, if the value of the first winning random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is not a random number that becomes a special symbol jackpot, that is, the special symbol If it is a random number that will result in a loss, the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 will be the one when the special symbol is lost.

On the other hand, if the value of the first winning random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is a random number for a special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device. The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed in 37 is the one at the time of the special symbol jackpot. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the big hit is the display mode indicated by the value of the first winning type counter C2 stored in the same special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a.

Further, the value of the first win type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is configured as a loop counter within the range of 0-99. Then, when the special symbol 1 is selected by lottery and the jackpot is won, and the random number is any one of "0 to 49" in the first win type counter C2, the jackpot type is "jackpot A". In addition, when the special symbol 1 is drawn by lottery and the random number is any one of "50 to 99", the type of jackpot is "jackpot B". Furthermore, the special symbol 2 is drawn by lottery, and the jackpot type is "jackpot A" when the random number is any one of "0 to 19" in the first hit type counter C2. In addition, when the special pattern 2 is drawn by lottery and the random number is any one of "20 to 99", the type of jackpot is "jackpot B".

In this embodiment, there are two types of jackpots, but the present invention is not limited to this, and one type or two or more types may be provided. In addition, the same jackpot type is selected with the same value of the first win type counter C2 in the case of the big win by the lottery of the special pattern 1 and the case of the big win by the lottery of the special pattern 2.例文帳に追加You may By configuring in this way, the amount of data in the first winning type selection table 202b can be reduced, so the capacity of the ROM 202 can be reduced.

The fluctuation type counter CS1 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 198, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). The variation type counter CS1 determines a rough display mode such as so-called short-time lag, long-time lag, normal reach, super reach, and the like. Determination of the display mode is, specifically, determination of the variation time of the symbol variation. Based on the variation time determined by the variation type counter CS1, the reach type of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the detailed symbol variation mode are determined by the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. be. The value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated once each time the main process (see FIG. 34), which will be described later, is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process. The variation pattern selection table 202d, which stores a random value for determining one variation time of symbol variation from the value (random value) of the variation type counter CS1, is provided in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 as described above. ing.

In the fluctuation pattern selection table 202d, for example, as fluctuation patterns for failure, "loss (for long time)", "loss (for short time)", various types of "loss normal reach", and various types of "loss super reach" are defined. , Various "normal reach" and various "super reach" are defined as variation patterns for big hits. Then, a variation pattern is selected from various variation patterns defined in the variation pattern table according to the predicted lottery result and the predicted stop type (jackpot type in the case of a jackpot).

The second hit random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that increments by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 239, for example, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 239). Further, when the second winning random number counter C4 completes one cycle, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second winning random number counter C4. In this embodiment, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 is updated, for example, periodically for each timer interrupt process, and is acquired when it is detected that the ball has passed through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67. , is stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203 c of the RAM 203 .

Then, the value of the random number that becomes the normal winning pattern is set by the second winning random number table 202c (see FIG. 18(c)) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device, and the value of the second winning random number counter C4. is equal to the winning random number value set by the second winning random number table 202c, it is determined that the winning is a normal symbol. In addition, this second winning random number table 202c is for normal design low probability time (period in which normal design is normal state) (see 202c1 in FIG. 18(c)) and normal design winning time from the low probability time. It is divided into two types for (see 202c2 in FIG. 18 (c)) and (see 202c2 in FIG. 18(c)) when the probability is high (normal pattern time saving state, and special pattern variable state period), and included in each The number of random numbers to be a jackpot is set differently. In this way, by differentiating the number of random numbers to be hit, the probability of winning at the time of low probability of normal design (normal state of normal design) and high probability of normal design (time saving state of normal design) is changed.

As shown in FIG. 18(c), when the probability of a normal symbol is low, there are 24 random numbers that normally win a symbol, and the range is "5 to 28" (202c1 in FIG. 18(c) reference). In this way, when the probability of normal symbols is low, the total number of random numbers for a big hit is 24 out of the total number of random numbers of 240, so the probability of a big win for special symbols is "1/10".

When the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of normal symbols, when the ball passes through the normal ball entrance 67, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is acquired, and the normal symbols are displayed on the second symbol display device 83. A variable display is performed for 30 seconds. Then, if the acquired value of the second winning random number counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 28", it is determined to be a winning, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the stop symbol (second symbol ), and the electric accessory 640a associated with the second ball entrance 640 is opened only for "0.2 seconds x 1 time". In this embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of normal symbols, the electric accessory 640a is opened only for "0.2 seconds x 1 time" when the normal symbols are won. The time and number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, it may be opened "0.5 sec x 2 times".

On the other hand, when the probability of the normal design is high (during the time reduction of the normal design, and during the probability change of the special design), there are 200 random numbers that will be the jackpot of the normal design, and the range is "5 to 204". . These random numbers are stored in the second winning random number table 202c for high probability (see 202c2 in FIG. 18(c)). In this way, when the probability of the special symbol is low, the total number of random numbers that will be a big hit is 200 out of the total number of random numbers of 240, so the probability of a big win of the special symbol is "1/1.2".

When the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of normal symbols, when the ball passes through the normal ball entrance 67, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is acquired, and the normal symbols are displayed on the second symbol display device 83. A variable display is performed for 3 seconds. Then, if the value of the obtained second winning random number counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined to be elected, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the stop symbol (second symbol ), the symbol “◯” is lit and displayed, and the electric accessory 640a associated with the second ball entrance 640 is opened “1 second×2 times”. In this way, when the probability of normal symbols is high, the variable display time is very short, from 30 seconds to 3 seconds, compared to when the probability of normal symbols is low. Since it becomes very long as “0.2 seconds×1 time→1 second×2 times”, the ball can easily enter the second ball entrance 640 . In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 is at the time of high probability of normal symbols, the electric accessory 640a associated with the second ball entrance 640 is activated "1 second x 2 times" when the normal symbols are won. However, the opening time and number of times can be set arbitrarily. For example, it may be opened "3 seconds x 3 times".

The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated within the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and is updated once per timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 25). In addition, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main processing (see FIG. 34).

In this way, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and the main controller 110 controls the big winning lottery and the display on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 according to the values of the counters and the like. Main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of the display result in the second pattern display device 83 can be executed.

Returning to FIG. 17, the description is continued. In addition to the various counters shown in FIG. 19, the RAM 203 includes a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201, various flags and counters, I/O, and the like. and a work area (work area) in which the value of is stored.

The RAM 203 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

When power is interrupted due to power failure or the like, the RAM 203 stores the stack pointer and the values of each register at the time of power interruption (including power failure; the same applies hereinafter). On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including when the power is turned on due to the cancellation of the power failure; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203 . Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (see FIG. 34) when the power is turned off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed by the start-up process (see FIG. 33) when the power is turned on. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. , NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 32) is immediately executed as power failure processing.

Details of various flags and counters stored in the RAM 203 will now be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 20, the RAM 203 has a special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, a special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c, a special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d, and a special symbol 2 reserved ball. Number counter 203e, normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f, variable probability flag 203g, variable probability setting flag 203h, variable probability passage counter 203i, winning number counter 203j, operation counter 203k, remaining ball timer flag 203m, remaining ball timer 203n, variable probability effective flag 203o , a probability variable effective timer 203p, a discharge number counter 203q, a time saving medium counter 203r, and other memory areas 203z.

The special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a has one execution area and four reserved areas (first reserved area to fourth reserved area), and each of these areas has a first ball entrance. Each value of the first winning random number counter C1 and the first winning type counter C2 obtained based on the winning of the 64 is stored.

More specifically, at the timing when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 (start winning), each value of each counter C1 to C3 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas (holding number Area 1 to reserved area 4) are stored in ascending order of area numbers (first to fourth). That is, the smaller the area number, the data corresponding to the oldest winning is stored, and the first reserved area stores the data corresponding to the oldest winning. If data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, in the main control device 110, when a special symbol lottery is performed, each value of each counter C1 to C3 stored in the reserved first area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is transferred to the execution area. Based on the values of the respective counters C1 to C3 that are shifted (moved) and stored in the execution area, determination such as lottery for special symbols is performed.

When data is shifted from the first reservation area to the execution area, the first reservation area becomes empty. Therefore, there is a shift process that packs the winning data stored in other reservation areas (second reservation area to fourth reservation area) to reservation areas (first reservation area to third reservation area) with an area number smaller by 1. done. In this embodiment, in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, data shift is performed only for the reserved areas (second reserved area to fourth reserved area) in which winning data is stored.

The special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is different from the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a only in that the counter values acquired for the winning to the second ball entrance 640 are respectively stored. , and other configurations are the same, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Like the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c has one execution area and four reserved areas (first reserved area to fourth reserved area). area). Each of these areas stores a second winning random number counter C4.

More specifically, at the timing when the ball passes through the normal entrance 67, the value of the counter C4 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in the four reservation areas (reservation first area to reservation fourth area). Among the vacant areas, the areas with the smallest area numbers (first to fourth) are stored in order. That is, like the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 202b, the data corresponding to the winning are stored while the winning order is maintained. Note that if data is stored in all of the four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, in the main controller 110, when the normal symbol winning lottery is performed, the value of the counter C4 stored in the first reserved area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is shifted to the execution area ( ), and based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area, a determination such as a lottery for winning a normal symbol is performed.

In addition, when the data is shifted from the first reserved area to the execution area, the first reserved area becomes vacant. is shifted to a reserved area with an area number smaller by one. Also, the data shift is performed only for the reserved areas in which the winning data are stored.

The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is a variable display (first It is a counter that counts the number of pending balls (number of waiting times) of the variable display performed by the 3-symbol display device 81 up to a maximum of 4 times. The initial value of this special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is set to zero, and each time a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 and the number of reserved balls displayed in a variable display increases, the value reaches a maximum value of 4. 1 is added (see S404 in FIG. 28). On the other hand, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 each time a special symbol variable display is newly executed (see S210 in FIG. 26).

The value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (number of times N1 of holding variable display in special symbol 1) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the reserved ball number command (see S211 in FIG. 26 and S405 in FIG. 28). ). The reserved ball number command is a command transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sound lamp controller 113 every time the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is changed.

The voice lamp control device 113 suspends the variable display suspended in the main controller 110 by the suspended ball number command sent from the main controller 110 every time the value of the special symbol 1 suspended ball number counter 203d is changed. You can get the value of the number of balls itself. As a result, the number of holding balls of variable display managed by the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223b of the sound lamp control device 113 is changed to the actual number of holding balls of variable display that was held by the main controller 110 due to the influence of noise or the like. Even if it deviates from the number, the deviation can be corrected by the next received ball number command.

In addition, the voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of held balls based on the number of held balls command, and every time the number of held balls changes, the display control device 114 is notified of the number of held balls. Send a pitch command. The display control device 114 displays the number of reserved balls pattern (reserved pattern) of the third pattern display device 81 based on the number of reserved balls notified by the number of reserved balls command for display.

The special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e differs from the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d in that the number of reserved balls that have entered the second ball entrance 640 and are reserved is stored. Since it is only different, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f maximizes the number of reserved balls (number of standby times) of the variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) performed by the second symbol display device 83 based on the passage of the ball through the normal ball entrance 67. A counter that counts up to four times. The initial value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is set to zero. (See S704 in FIG. 31). On the other hand, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is decremented by 1 each time the variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is newly executed (see S605 in FIG. 30).

When the ball passes through the normal ball entrance 67, if the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f (the number of times M of holding variation display in normal symbols) is less than 4, the value of the second random number counter C4 The acquired data is stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c (S705 in FIG. 31). On the other hand, when the ball passes through the normal ball entrance 67, if the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is 4, nothing is newly stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c (see FIG. 31). S703: No).

The variable probability flag 203g is a flag indicating whether or not the current gaming state is the variable probability state of the special symbol (during the variable probability of the special symbol). When the probability variation flag 203g is set to ON, it indicates that the gaming state is the probability variation state of the special symbols, and when it is OFF, it indicates that the special symbols are in the low probability state. In the present embodiment, when the variable probability setting flag 203h, which will be described later, is set to ON at the end of the jackpot game, the variable probability flag 203g is set to ON (see S1304 in FIG. 37). Further, the variable probability flag 203g is set to OFF when a special symbol lottery results in a big win and the start of the big win is set. In addition, in the initialized state (that is, the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10 with the RAM erase switch 122 pressed), the probability variation flag 203g is reset to off, and a normal power cut occurs. In this case, the configuration is such that the state immediately before the power cutoff occurs is backed up.

The variable probability setting flag 203h is a flag indicating whether or not to shift the game state to the variable probability state of the special symbols after the end of the big hit. In the pachinko machine 10, whether or not the game state is set to the variable probability game state is determined by whether or not the game ball enters the variable probability entrance 654 during the special game state (jackpot state). . When a game ball enters the variable probability entrance 654, the ball is detected by a variable probability switch (not shown), and the variable probability setting flag 203h is set to ON (S1412 in FIG. 38). On the other hand, the variable probability setting flag 203h is set to OFF based on the variable probability flag 203g being set to ON (see S1305 in FIG. 37). The variable probability setting flag 203h is backed up when the power is turned off, and is set to the state immediately before the power is turned off when the power is restored (when the power is turned on). Also, it is set to off in the initialized state.

If the variable probability setting flag 202h is set to ON when the power is turned on, it is determined whether or not the variable probability switch has been passed before the power is cut off, and if it is determined that the variable probability switch has been passed, the variable probability setting flag 203h may be configured to formally set to ON and return. In this case, whether or not the variable probability switch has been passed before the power is cut off can be determined by whether the variable probability passage counter 203i, which will be described later, is greater than zero. By configuring in this way, in a state where the power is turned off, it is possible to reduce the damage on the side of the amusement arcade by discriminating fraud such as rewriting only the probability variable setting flag 203h to ON and turning on the power again. can.

The variable probability passage counter 203i is a counter for counting the number of game balls that have passed through the variable probability switch in one round (in this embodiment, the twelfth round of the jackpot) during the jackpot state. It is possible to determine whether or not all the game balls that have flowed into the second variable winning device 650 have been discharged from the sum of the probability variable passage counter 203i and the discharge number counter 203q, which will be described later. This variable probability passing counter 203i is updated by being incremented by one when passing the variable probability switch (S1411 in FIG. 38). Also, after executing the process of whether or not the number of game balls that have flowed into the inside of the second variable winning device 650 and the number of discharged game balls match, the initial value is reset to "0" (FIG. 39). S1511). It should be noted that the value of the probability variable passage counter 203i is backed up when the power is turned off. Also, when the pachinko machine 10 is initialized, the value is reset to zero.

The number-of-winning-wins counter 203j counts the first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a of the first variable winning device 65 and the second specific winning opening (second It is a counter for counting the number of balls entering the large opening) 650a. Specifically, when a winning sensor (not shown) provided in each of the first specific winning opening 65a and the second specific winning opening 650a detects that a ball has entered the game, 1 is added and updated. (S1403 in FIG. 38). On the other hand, when one round is completed, the number of winnings of the first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a and the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a (the value of the winning number counter 203j ) and the ejected number (total value of the ejected number counter 203q and the variable probability passage counter 203i) are matched, then reset to the initial value "0". The value of the winning number counter 203j is backed up when the power is turned off. Also, it is reset to 0 when the pachinko machine 10 is initialized.

As described above, in the 1st to 11th rounds and the 13th to 15th rounds, only the first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a is opened. Basically, the number of balls entered into the first specific winning hole (first large opening) 65a is counted. On the other hand, in the 12th round, only the second specific prize winning opening (second large opening) 650a is opened, so in the 12th round, the winning number counter 203j is substantially the second specific winning opening (second The number of balls entering the large opening 650a is counted.

In the present embodiment, when it is detected that a ball has entered either the first specific prize winning port (first large opening) 65a or the second specific prize winning port (second large opening) 650a, a prize is won. It is configured to add 1 to the value of the number counter 203j. A separate counter may be provided to count the number of balls struck.

The operation counter 203k is a counter for measuring (counting) the elapsed time after the guiding flow path 652 provided on the left side of the flow path switching valve 650d is set to the open state (see FIG. 15(b)). . That is, the operation counter 203k measures (counts) the elapsed time after the passage solenoid 611 is turned on and the ball is set to enter the variable probability entrance 654. In the pachinko machine 10, the flow path solenoid 611 is turned on (excited) based on the completion of 11 rounds of jackpots, so that the flow path switching valve 650d rotates clockwise about the switching shaft 650e. Guide channel 652 is opened.

At the end of the 11th round, a counter value corresponding to the period during which the channel solenoid 611 is turned on (excited) is set in the operation counter 203k. That is, a counter value corresponding to a total of 9.5 seconds, which is an interval period of 3 seconds before the start of the 12th round and 6.5 seconds after the start of the 12th round, is set. On the other hand, in the process of S1409 of the winning process (see FIG. 38) executed by the MPU 2011 of the main controller 110, the value is decremented by one and updated. Further, based on the determination that the value of the operation counter 203k is 0, the flow path solenoid 611 is turned off. The value of the operation counter 203k is backed up even if the power is cut off. Moreover, it is reset to 0 which is an initial value by initializing the pachinko machine 10 .

The remaining ball timer flag 203m is a flag indicating that the first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a and the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a are closed in one round. When the remaining ball timer flag 203m is set to ON, the first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a or the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a is open in one round. to the closed state. By setting the remaining ball timer flag 203m to ON, the remaining ball timer 203n, which will be described later, is updated by being incremented by one (see S1505 in FIG. 39). The remaining ball timer 203n is a counter for determining the time after the first specific prize winning port (first large opening) 65a or the second specific prize winning port (second large opening) 650a is closed, It is a counter for determining whether or not the time required for the game balls that have flowed into the first variable winning device 65 or the second variable winning device 650 to be discharged has passed.

The remaining balls timer 203n is set when one preset round ends and the first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a is closed (1st to 11th rounds, 13th to 15th rounds), or when the second When the specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a is closed (12 rounds), it is necessary for the game balls that have flowed into the inside of the first variable winning device 65 or the second variable winning device 650 to be discharged. A counter for determining whether time has passed. In this embodiment, the time required for the first variable winning device 81 to discharge the winning game ball is 2 seconds. The counter value is set as the upper limit value of the remaining ball timer 203n. The value of this remaining ball timer 203n is updated, and when the value reaches the upper limit (3 seconds), the first variable winning device 65 (1st to 11th rounds and 13th to 15th rounds) or the second variable winning device 650 It is determined whether or not the number of prizes won in (12 rounds) matches the number of discharge (S1507 in FIG. 39). Then, when it is determined that the winning number and the discharged number do not match, an error command is set to notify that fact. Therefore, it is possible to inform early that ball clogging occurs inside the first variable winning device 65 or the second variable winning device 650 . Therefore, the ball is left in the second variable winning device 650 in the 12 rounds of the jackpot, and an impact or the like is applied at the start timing of the next 12 rounds of the jackpot to enter the ball into the probability variable ball entrance 654. Fraud can be curbed.

In addition, if the winning number and the discharge number do not match, a dedicated flag is set to ON, and if the flag is ON, even if the ball enters the probability variable entrance 654, the probability variable setting The configuration may be such that the flag 203h is not set to ON. By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress that the probability variable gaming state is incorrectly given.

Further, in the present embodiment, it is determined that either the first specific prize winning port (first large opening) 65a or the second specific prize winning port (second large opening) 650a is switched from the open state to the closed state. When it is detected, updating of the counter value by the remaining ball timer 203n is started, but it is not limited to this. For example, separate counters may be provided for the first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a and the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a.

The variable probability valid flag 203o is a flag for determining whether or not to validate the ball when the game ball enters the variable probability entrance 654 after the passage solenoid 611 is set to be off. is. When the probability variable effective flag 203o is set to ON, based on the fact that the flow path solenoid 611 is ON, the ball that has flowed into the induction flow path 652 (see FIG. 15(b)) This indicates that the time required for the ball to enter the mouth 654 is less than that. In other words, it indicates that entering the variable probability entrance 654 is a normal operation.

The variable probability valid timer 203p is a counter for counting the time after the variable probability valid flag 203o described above is set to ON. After the flow path solenoid 611 is turned off by this variable probability valid timer 203p, it is possible to determine the period required for the ball to enter the variable probability entrance 654 normally. In this embodiment, it takes one second for the ball that has flowed into the guide channel 652 to enter the variable probability entrance 654 . The upper limit value of the variable probability valid timer 203p is set to a counter value corresponding to 1.2 seconds with a margin of 0.2 seconds added. If the ball enters the variable probability entrance 654 after 1.2 seconds have elapsed, there is a high possibility that some kind of fraudulent act has occurred, so control is performed so that the variable probability setting flag 203h is not updated. .

As a result, in a state where the flow path switching valve 650d closes the induction flow path 652 (a state in which the ball is not guided to the variable probability entrance 654), the ball is entered into the variable probability entrance 654, or From the downstream of the opening 654, the game ball is pushed up with a piano wire or the like to pass through the variable probability ball entrance 654, or the electric wave etc. misdetects that the ball has entered the variable probability entrance 654. can be suppressed.

The discharged number counter 203q is a counter for counting the number of balls discharged from the first variable winning device 65 or the second variable winning device 650 in one round. The first variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 650 are each provided with a ball discharge port switch (not shown) for detecting the discharge of the balls. The discharge number counter 203q adds 1 to the value each time the discharge of the ball is detected by the ball discharge port switch (see S1503 in FIG. 39). On the other hand, after it is determined whether or not the number of balls entering the first variable winning device 65 or the second variable winning device 650 matches the number of balls discharged, the value of the discharge number counter 203q is set to the initial value. is reset to 0 (S1511 in FIG. 39).

The time saving medium counter 203r is a counter for counting the remaining time period (number of fluctuations of special symbols) in the time saving state of normal symbols. This time saving medium counter 203r is set to 100 when the variable probability setting flag is off at the end of the jackpot (see S1307 in FIG. 37). That is, in the present embodiment, if the variable probability gaming state is not set after the jackpot game, the time-saving state of normal symbols is given 100 times.

The other memory area 203z is set (stored) with other data necessary for the game, counters, flags, and the like.

Returning to FIG. 17, the description continues. An input/output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 comprising an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 205 includes the payout control device 111, the sound lamp control device 113, the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol display device 83, the second symbol reservation lamp 84, and the lower side of the opening/closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for driving opening and closing to the front side and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected, and the MPU 201 sends various commands and control signals to these through the input/output port 205. to send.

The input/output port 205 is connected to various switches 208 including a switch group and a sensor group (not shown) and a RAM erasure switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply 115, which will be described later. and the RAM erasing signal SG2 output from the RAM erasing switch circuit 253, various processes are executed.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 storing control programs executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory and the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211, the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211, and various flags and counters. , and a work area (work area) in which values such as I/O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. As with the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 32) is immediately executed as power failure processing.

An input/output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 215 is connected to the main controller 110, the dispensing motor 216, the launch controller 112, and the like. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected with a prize ball detection switch for detecting paid prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout controller 111 but not to the main controller 110 .

The shooting control device 112 controls the ball shooting unit 112a so that the shooting strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51 when the main controller 110 issues an instruction to shoot the ball. The ball shooting unit 112a has a shooting solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operating handle 51, and the operating handle is activated under the condition that the stop switch 51b for stopping the shooting of the ball is turned off (not operated). A shooting solenoid is energized corresponding to the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51, and the ball is shot with strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operating handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 outputs audio from an audio output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs lighting and extinguishing from a lamp display device (electrical parts 29 to 33, an indicator lamp 34, etc.) 227, and changes production (variation It controls the setting of the display mode of the third pattern display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as display) and advance notice effect. The MPU 221, which is an arithmetic device, has a ROM 222 storing control programs executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory and the like.

An input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 comprising an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 225 is connected to the main controller 110, the display controller 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the frame button 22, and the like.

The sound lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, changes the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81, It controls the voice output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 and instructs the display control device 114 to change the contents of the presentation. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the stage after the change is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to display the rear image corresponding to the stage after the change on the third pattern display device 81. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third design, which is the main image to be displayed on the third design display device 81 .

The audio lamp control device 113 determines an error according to the command from the main control device 110 and the status of various devices connected to the audio lamp control device 113, and displays and controls the error command including the error type. Send to device 114 . The display control device 114 controls the third symbol display device 81 to display an error message image corresponding to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command without delay.

The ROM 222 of the sound ramp control device 113 stores a variation pattern selection table 222a and various data and programs required for game control.

In the variation pattern selection table 222a, variation patterns of each variation pattern type (completely out of range, out of reach, various types of reach, etc.) are set in counter values for selecting a variation pattern (not shown). The sound ramp control device 113 selects a detailed variation pattern based on the variation pattern type indicated by the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110, the result of the suitability determination, and the acquired counter value for selection. This allows the audio ramp control device 113 to select a wide variety of variation modes while strictly observing rough information such as the variation time and the type of variation pattern. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the same variable display mode from being displayed frequently, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored early.

The RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 includes a winning information storage area 223a, a special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b, a special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c, a fluctuation start flag 223d, and a stop type selection flag 223e. And, probability variation state flag 223f, time saving state counter 223g, flag 223h during jackpot, and allowable time counter 223i are provided at least.

The winning information storage area 223a has one execution area and four areas (first area to fourth area), each of which stores winning information. Based on the information stored in the prize winning information storage area 223a, the sound lamp control device 113 can determine the lottery result of the reserved ball and the like before the change starts.

The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b, like the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d of the main controller 110, is a variable effect (variable display) performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81). ), which is a counter that counts up to four times the number of pending balls (number of standby times) of the variable effect that is being held in the main controller 110 . That is, the number of reserved balls corresponding to the first special symbol is set based on the reserved ball number command output from main controller 110 .

As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 and acquire the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of reserved balls based on the number of reserved balls command transmitted from the main controller 110, and manages the number of reserved balls by the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b. It has become.

Specifically, in the main controller 110, when the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 (start winning) adds the number of pending balls in the variable display, or in the main controller 110, the variable display in the special symbol is executed and the number of reserved balls is subtracted, a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203 d after addition or after subtraction is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 .

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main controller 110, it acquires the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d of the main controller 110 from the reserved ball number command, It is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b (see S1908 in FIG. 43). In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b according to the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main controller 110, so that the special symbol 1 reserved ball of the main controller 110 Its value can be updated in synchronization with the number counter 203d.

The value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b is used for the display of the reserved ball number pattern in the third symbol display device 81. FIG. That is, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the number of reserved balls indicated by the command in response to the reception of the number of reserved balls command in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b, and the special symbol 1 reserved ball number after storage. In order to notify the display control device 114 of the value of the counter 223b, a display reserved ball number command is transmitted to the display control device 114. FIG.

When the display control device 114 receives this display reserved ball number command, the value of the reserved ball number indicated by the command, that is, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b of the audio lamp control device 113. Image drawing is controlled so that several patterns are displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third pattern display device 81. FIG. As described above, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b is changed while synchronizing with the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d of the main controller 110 . Therefore, the number of pending ball number symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can also be changed while synchronizing with the value of the special symbol 1 pending ball number counter 203d of the main controller 110. FIG. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of held balls whose variable display is held.

The special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c stores the number of reserved balls corresponding to the second special symbol in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b based on the reserved ball number command output from the main controller 110. The only difference is that they are different, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The fluctuation start flag 223d is turned on when a fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110 is received (see S1902 in FIG. 43), and is turned off when the fluctuation display in the third pattern display device 81 is set. (See S1902 in FIG. 43). When the fluctuation start flag 223d is turned on, a fluctuation pattern command for display is set based on the fluctuation pattern extracted from the received fluctuation pattern command.

The display variation pattern command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is executed by the MPU 221 in the command output process (S1802) of the main process (see FIG. 42). It is transmitted toward the display control device 114 . In the display control device 114, by receiving this display variation pattern command, the variation pattern indicated by this display variation pattern command is used to perform the variation display of the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81. Display control of the variable effect is started.

The stop type selection flag 223e is turned on when a stop type command transmitted from the main controller 110 is received (see S1905 in FIG. 43), and turned off when the stop type is set in the third symbol display device 81. (See S2007 in FIG. 47). When the stop type selection flag 223e is turned on, the stop type is set as it is based on the stop type (jackpot type in the case of a jackpot) extracted from the received stop type command.

The variable probability state flag 223f is a flag indicating whether or not the game state of the pachinko machine 10 is a variable probability state of special symbols. If this variable probability state flag 223f is on, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol probability variable state, and if it is off, it indicates that it is in a special symbol low probability state. This variable probability state flag 223f is updated according to the content of notification of the state command output from main controller 110 (see S1711 in FIG. 41 and S1910 in FIG. 43). Depending on the state of the probability variation state flag 223f, it is determined whether or not the current state is the probability variation state of the special symbol, and the corresponding effect is set. More specifically, it is determined whether or not to display a right-handed navigation image (see FIG. 5(a)) displayed in the probability variable state of the special symbol, or a right-handed warning image (see FIG. 5(b)). is displayed.

The time saving state counter 223g is a flag indicating whether or not the game state of the pachinko machine 10 is the normal symbol time saving state. If the time saving state counter 223g is ON, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal pattern time saving state, and if it is OFF, it indicates that it is in the normal state (low probability state) with normal patterns. The time saving state counter 223g is updated according to the notification contents of the state command output from the main controller 110 (see S1711 in FIG. 41 and S1910 in FIG. 43). Depending on the state of the time saving state counter 223g, it is determined whether or not the current state is the time saving state of normal symbols, and the corresponding performance is set. More specifically, it is determined whether or not to display the right-handed navigation image (see FIG. 5(a)) displayed in the time-saving state of the normal symbol, or the right-handed warning image (see FIG. 5(b)). is displayed.

The jackpot flag 223h is a flag indicating whether or not the game state of the pachinko machine 10 is a special game state (jackpot state). If the jackpot flag 223h is on, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in a special game state (jackpot state), and if it is off, a state other than the special game state (jackpot state) (variable special symbol probability state, normal It indicates that it is either the time saving state of the pattern or the normal state). This jackpot middle flag 223h is set to ON when an opening command is received from main controller 110 (see S1914 in FIG. 43). That is, it is set to ON when the special game state (jackpot state) is started. On the other hand, the jackpot medium flag 223h is set to OFF when an ending command is received from the main controller 110 (see S1917 in FIG. 43). In other words, it is set to OFF when the special game state (jackpot state) ends. A corresponding effect is set according to the state of the jackpot middle flag 223h. More specifically, it is determined whether or not to display the right-handed navigation image (see FIG. 6(a)) displayed in the special game state (jackpot state), or the left-handed warning image (see FIG. 7(a)) is displayed. See) is to be displayed.

The permissible time counter 223i determines whether the ball that has flowed into the guide channel 606 or the guide channel 607 immediately before switching the state of the storage valve 607a enters either ball entrance (general prize winning port 601 or general winning prize port 602). It is a counter for counting the time until entering the ball (ball throwing time). By counting the ball sweeping period, when the ball enters the general prize winning opening 601 or the general prize winning opening 602, it is determined more accurately whether or not the ball entering is a normal operation. be able to. This permissible time counter 233i is set to a counter value corresponding to one second each time an opening command or an ending command is received (see S1914 and S1917 in FIG. 43). Also, each time the variable display setting process (see FIG. 47), which is one process in the main process (see FIG. 42), is executed, the value is decremented by one (see S2015 in FIG. 47).

As described above, with the reservoir valve 607a closed, the ball enters the general winning port 602 provided downstream of the reservoir valve 607a, or enters the general winning port 601 with the reservoir valve 607a opened. A warning image (see FIG. 7(b)) is displayed when the ball enters the ball. However, if the ball flows into the guide channel 607 immediately before the storage valve 607a switches from the open state to the closed state, the ball enters the general winning port 602 after the storage valve 607a switches to the closed state. sometimes. Similarly, if the ball flows into the guide channel 606 immediately before the storage valve 607a switches from the closed state to the open state, the ball enters the general winning port 601 after the storage valve 607a switches to the open state. There is a case to ball. In order to treat these as normal ball entries (not to display a warning image), in this embodiment, when the state of the storage valve 607a is switched, the permissible time counter 233i is set to Set the corresponding counter value. Until one second set as the counter value elapses, when the ball enters the general winning opening 601 or the general winning opening 602, it is determined that the operation is normal (the warning image is not displayed). is configured as

The number-of-winning-awards counter 223j is a counter for counting the number of times a ball enters the general winning opening (high-value winning opening) 602 in a big win. The winning frequency counter 223j is reset to 0 at the start of a big win, and resets to 1 each time a winning information command corresponding to a ball entering the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602 is received in the big winning. are added one by one (see S1944 in FIG. 45). As described above, in the present embodiment, the third symbol display device 81 is configured to display the number of times the ball enters the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602 in the special game state (big win state). (see FIG. 6(a)). The number-of-winning-awards counter 223j is referred to for accurately updating the number of times of winning displayed on the third symbol display device 81 .

The RAM 223 also has a command storage area (not shown) for temporarily storing commands received from the main controller 110 until processing corresponding to the commands is performed. The command storage area is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination processing (see FIG. 43) of the audio ramp processing device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area is read out, and the command determination processing The command is parsed and the processing according to the command is performed.

The display control device 114 is connected to the sound lamp control device 113 and the third pattern display device 81, and based on the command received from the sound lamp control device 113, the third pattern display device 81 performs variable display (variation) of the third pattern. production) and advance notice production are controlled.

The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to power failure, etc., and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). and an erase switch circuit 253 . The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies necessary operating voltages to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an overview, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volts supplied from the outside, various switches such as the various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, a voltage of 12 volts for driving a motor, etc. A voltage of 5 volts for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, etc. are generated, and these 12 volts, 5 volts and backup voltages are supplied to the controllers 110 to 114 and the like as necessary voltages.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 at the time of power failure due to power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of stable DC 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power shutdown, power shutdown) has occurred when this voltage is less than 22 volts. Then, a power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute NMI interrupt processing. Even after the stable DC voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the driving voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing. is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 32).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main controller 110 clears the backup data when the RAM erase signal SG2 is input, and controls the payout initialization command for clearing the backup data in the payout control device 111. Send to device 111 .

Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 21 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the display control device 114. As shown in FIG. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. have.

The output side of the sound lamp control device 113 is connected to the input side of the input port 238 , and the MPU 231 , work RAM 233 , character ROM 234 and image controller 237 are connected to the output side of the input port 238 via the bus line 240 . . A resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236 are connected to the image controller 237 , and an output port 239 is connected via a bus line 241 . A third pattern display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239 .

Even if the pachinko machine 10 is a different model with a different lottery probability of a special symbol jackpot or a different number of prize balls paid out for one special symbol jackpot, the symbols displayed by the third symbol display device 81 are different. Since there are models with exactly the same specifications, the display control device 114 is made a common component to reduce costs.

The MPU 231, character ROM 234, image controller 237, resident video RAM 235, and normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described below.

First, the MPU 231 controls the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the audio ramp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110 . The MPU 231 incorporates an instruction pointer 231a, reads and fetches the instruction code stored at the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. The MPU 231 is designed so that a system reset is applied from the power supply 115 immediately after power is turned on (including recovery from a power failure; the same shall apply hereinafter). is automatically set to “0000H” by the hardware of the MPU 231 . Each time an instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is incremented by one. Further, when the MPU 231 executes an instruction pointer setting instruction, the value of the pointer indicated by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

Although the details will be described later, in this embodiment, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are stored in a dedicated program ROM as in a conventional game machine. The image data to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing the data.

Although the details will be described later, the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity with a small area. As a result, not only image data but also control programs and the like can be sufficiently stored. If the control program and the like are stored in the character ROM 234, there is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in failure rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a problem that the read speed becomes slow especially when performing random access. For example, when reading data continuously arranged in a plurality of pages, the data of the second and subsequent pages can be read at high speed. It takes a long time before the data is output. Also, when reading discontinuous data, a long time is required each time the data is read. As described above, since the NAND flash memory has a slow read speed, if the MPU 231 is configured to directly read the control program from the character ROM 234 and execute various processes, it takes time to read the instructions that make up the control program. However, even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may deteriorate.

Therefore, in this embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. to store. The MPU 231 then executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233 . The work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM (Dynamic RAM), as will be described later, and reads and writes data at high speed. Therefore, the MPU 231 can read instructions constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third pattern display device 81 can be used to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores control programs executed by the MPU 231 and image data displayed on the third pattern display device 81 , and is connected to the MPU 231 via a bus line 240 . The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, and transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the character ROM 234 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 transfers image data stored in a character storage area 234a2 of the character ROM 234 to a resident video RAM 235, which is connected to the image controller 237. Transfer to the normal video RAM 236 .

The character ROM 234 is constructed by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR ROM 234d.

The NAND type flash memory 234a is a non-volatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234, and stores most of the control program executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data for driving the third symbol display device 81. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 for storage and a character storage area 234a2 for storing data of an image (such as a character) to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG.

Here, the NAND type flash memory has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained in a small area, and the capacity of the character ROM 234 can be easily increased. Thus, in this pachinko machine, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of, for example, 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. can. Therefore, the images displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated in order to increase the interest of the player.

In addition, the NAND flash memory 234a can store control programs and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 while storing a large amount of image data in the character storage area 234a2. In this way, the control program and fixed value data are provided to store the data of the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without providing and storing a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional game machine. Since the characters can be stored in the character ROM 234, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in the failure rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234. For example, based on the address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the corresponding data is retrieved from the NAND flash memory 234a or the like. is read out and output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240 .

Here, the NAND type flash memory 234a, due to its nature, generates a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which erroneous data is written) when writing data, and generates defective data blocks into which data cannot be written. or Therefore, the ROM controller 234b applies known error correction to the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and avoids bad data blocks when reading and writing data to the NAND flash memory 234a. data address translation.

The ROM controller 234b corrects errors in the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a including error bits. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the MPU 231 from performing processing and the image controller 237 from generating various images.

In addition, since the ROM controller 234b analyzes the defective data block of the NAND flash memory 234a and accesses to the defective data block are avoided, the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 can store different defective data in each NAND flash memory 234a. Access to the character ROM 234 can be easily performed without considering the address position of the block. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, it is possible to prevent the access control to the character ROM 234 from becoming complicated.

The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When an address assigned to the character ROM 234 is designated from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b reads one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) of data corresponding to the designated address. is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If not set, one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is read from the NAND flash memory 234a (or NOR ROM 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. do. Then, the ROM controller 234 b outputs the data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240 after performing known error correction processing.

The buffer RAM 234c is composed of two banks, and one page of data of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set in each bank. As a result, the ROM controller 234b, for example, outputs the data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside by using the other bank while data is set in one bank, or outputs the data specified by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. One page of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is transferred from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and set, and the data corresponding to the address specified by the MPU 231 or image controller 237 is transferred to the other bank. The processing of reading from the bank and outputting to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 can be processed in parallel. Therefore, the responsiveness in reading the character ROM 234 can be improved.

The NOR-type ROM 234d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub-storage unit in the character ROM 234, and is intended to complement the NAND-type flash memory 234a. ). Among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, the NOR-type ROM 234d stores programs that are not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND-type flash memory 234a. At least a first program storage area 234d1 is provided for storing a portion of the boot program to be executed.

The boot program is a control program for activating the display control device 114 so that various controls on the third pattern display device 81 can be executed, and the MPU 231 first executes this boot program after releasing the system reset. As a result, the display control device 114 can be put into a state in which various controls can be executed. The first program storage area 234d1 stores the boot program within the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a), which should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. A predetermined number of instructions (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, instructions for 1024 words (1 word=2 bytes)) are stored. The number of instructions of the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 only needs to be within the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and is appropriately set according to the specifications of the display control device 114. There may be.

When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to "0000H" by hardware and instructs the bus line 240 to specify the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address "0000H" is specified on the bus line 240, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d is transferred to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. , and outputs the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231 .

When the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, it executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, adds 1 to the instruction pointer 231a, and transfers the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. to specify. Then, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234, while the address specified by the bus line 240 is the address indicating the program stored in the NOR ROM 234d, selects the program previously set in the buffer RAM 234c from the NOR ROM 234d. , the instruction code of the corresponding address is read from the buffer RAM 234 c and output to the MPU 231 .

Here, in this embodiment, instead of storing all the control programs in the NAND flash memory 234a, a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR ROM 234d. The reason for storing in is as follows. That is, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a is unique to the NAND flash memory in that it takes a long time to read the data of the first page after the address is specified until the data is output. There's a problem.

When all the control programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 in order to fetch the instruction code that the MPU 231 should execute first after the system reset is released. If so, the character ROM 234 must read one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to read out and set the data in the buffer RAM 234c. You spend a lot of time waiting to receive your code. Therefore, the time taken to start the MPU 231 becomes longer, and as a result, there arises a problem that the control of the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, since the NOR type ROM is a memory from which data can be read at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR type ROM 234d. Thus, when the address "0000H" is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately stores the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d into the buffer RAM 234c. , and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231 . Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", and the MPU 231 can be activated in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the control of the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

The boot program is a control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, a control program other than the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d. , fixed value data (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc., which will be described later) used in the control program are stored in the program storage area of the work RAM 233 by a predetermined amount (for example, the capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a). 233a and the data table storage area 233b. The MPU 231 first sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after the system reset is released. While using a bank different from the bank of the buffer RAM 234c that is stored, a predetermined amount is transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a.

Here, since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity corresponding to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, as described above, the address of the internal bus is designated as "0000H". When the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c in response to this, the boot program is set only in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when transferring the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a according to the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c is transferred to the program storage area 233a. The transfer process can be performed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in storage area 234d1. Therefore, after the transfer process, there is no need to set the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 again in the buffer RAM 234c, so the time required for the boot process can be shortened.

When a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 transfers the command pointer 231a to the program storage area 233a. It is programmed to be set to a first predetermined address. As a result, when the MPU 231 transfers a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a after the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined number in the program storage area 233a. Set to a street address.

Therefore, when a predetermined amount of the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads out the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a, Various processing can be executed. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instruction, but rather reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. and execute various processes. As will be described later, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even if most of the control program is stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch instructions at high speed and process the instructions.

Here, the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 include remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 by a predetermined amount from the second program storage area 234a1. The instruction pointer 231a is programmed so as to include the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as a first predetermined address.

As a result, the MPU 231 transfers a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1. Execute the rest of the boot program contained in the control program.

In this remaining boot program, the remaining control programs that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a and fixed value data (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc., which will be described later) used in the control programs are all stored in the second program. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. Also, at the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, the initialization process (see S2202 in FIG. 49) executed after the boot process (see S2201 in FIG. 49) by the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the second predetermined address. Set the start address of the program corresponding to .

By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all the control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. When the boot program is executed to the end by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed using the control program.

Therefore, even if most of the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the control program is transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. Thus, the MPU 231 can read the control program from the work RAM configured by the DRAM with high read speed and perform various controls. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third pattern display device 81 can be used to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

Further, as described above, instead of storing all the boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. Even if it is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time simply by adding the NOR type ROM 234d with a very small capacity. can be done.

The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and causes the third pattern display device 81 to display the drawn image at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on a drawing list (see FIG. 24) sent from the MPU 231 to be described later, and draws a frame in either a first frame buffer 236b or a second frame buffer 236c, which will be described later. The image drawn in the buffer is developed, and the image information for one frame previously developed in the other frame buffer is output to the third pattern display device 81 to display the image on the third pattern display device 81.例文帳に追加. The image controller 237 performs the one-frame image drawing process and the one-frame image display process within the one-frame image display time (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) on the third pattern display device 81 . parallel processing in

The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter referred to as a “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing processing for one frame is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects this V interrupt signal, the MPU 231 executes V interrupt processing (see FIG. 50(b)) and instructs the image controller 237 to draw the image for the next one frame. In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes the drawing process of the image for the next one frame, and also executes the process of causing the third pattern display device 81 to display the image developed by the previous drawing.

In this manner, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt process in response to the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 and issues a drawing instruction to the image controller 237. Therefore, the image controller 237 performs image drawing processing and display. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 at each processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image before the image drawing processing or display processing is completed. It is possible to prevent an image from being developed in accordance with a new drawing instruction in a frame buffer storing image information being displayed.

The image controller 237 also executes processing for transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 and normal video RAM 236 based on transfer instructions from the MPU 231 and transfer data information included in the drawing list.

Image drawing is performed using the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 . That is, the image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236 based on instructions from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

Here, the NAND type flash memory makes it easy to increase the capacity of the ROM, but its read speed is slower than other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. is configured to As will be described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled so as to be resident without being overwritten.

As a result, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is completed after the power is turned on, the image is drawn by the image controller 237 while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. can be processed. Therefore, if the image data used for drawing processing is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, when drawing the image. , the time required for reading the image can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .

In particular, image data of frequently displayed images and image data of images to be displayed immediately after display is determined by main controller 110 or display controller 114 are permanently resident in resident video RAM 235. Even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a, it is possible to maintain high responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG.

Further, when the display control device 114 draws an image using non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235, before the drawing is performed, the display controller 114 stores necessary data for drawing from the character ROM 234 in the normal video RAM 236. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal-use video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for image drawing. Since it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of , and the time required for reading the data can be saved, the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. can.

Further, by storing the image data in the normal video RAM 236 as well, there is no need to keep all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235, so there is no need to prepare a large-capacity resident video RAM 235. FIG. Therefore, an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed.

The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a composed of an SRAM of 132 kilobytes, which is the capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

The image data transfer instruction given to the image controller 237 by the MPU 231 based on the transfer instruction or the transfer data information of the drawing list includes the head address (storage source head address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. Final address (storage source final address), transfer destination information (information indicating whether to transfer to resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236), and top of transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) Contains an address. Note that the data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the storage source final address.

The image controller 237 reads one block of data from a predetermined address in the character ROM 234 according to various information of this transfer instruction, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and stores it in the buffer RAM 237a when the resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236 is not in use. , is transferred to the resident RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 . Then, the processing is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored in the storage source start address to the storage source end address indicated by the transfer instruction are transferred.

As a result, the image data read out from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236 in a short time. can be done. Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long period of time by transferring the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of image data, these video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for image drawing processing. , it is possible to prevent the display on the third pattern display device 81 from being too late.

In addition, since image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 by the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are used for image drawing processing and third symbol display. It is possible to easily determine the period during which the display processing on the device 81 is not used, and to simplify the processing.

The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 can be retained while the power is turned on without being overwritten. 235e and an error message image area 235f are provided, and at least a power-on variation image area 235b and a third pattern area 235d are provided.

The power-on main image area 235a is the power-on main image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 after power is turned on until all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. This is an area for storing corresponding data. In the power-on variation image area 235b, a game is started by the player while the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance are displayed. This is an area for storing image data corresponding to a power-on variable image that displays the results of the lottery performed by the main controller 110 in a variable effect when a ball entering the mouth 640 is detected.

The MPU 231 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on varying image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a when power supply from the power supply unit 251 is started. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the controller 237 (see S2103 and S2104 in FIG. 48).

Here, the power-on variation image will be described. Immediately after the power is turned on, the display control device 114 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on varying image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on varying image area 235b. Subsequently, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 . While the remaining image data is being transferred, the display control device 114 uses the image data previously stored in the power-on main image area 235a to transfer the power-on main image to the third symbol display device. 81 is displayed.

At this time, when receiving a display variation pattern command transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a variation pattern command from the main controller 110, which is an instruction command to start variation, the display control device 114 displays the main image when the power is turned on. On the display screen of , a variation image at the time of power-on with an "○" symbol at the lower right position of the screen, and a variation image at the time of power-on with an "X" symbol at the same position as the "○" symbol are displayed during the variation period. Medium, alternately displayed repeatedly. Then, based on the variation pattern command and the stop type command from the main controller 110, the lottery performed by the main controller 110 is selected from the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113. Judging the result, if it is a ``special pattern jackpot'', the ``○'' pattern is displayed for a certain period after stopping the fluctuation production, and if it is ``off the special pattern'', the ``x'' pattern is displayed after the fluctuation production is stopped. Display for a certain period of time.

The MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to use the image data stored in the power-on main image area 235a until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Instructs to draw the main image when the power is turned on. As a result, while the rest of the image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person involved in the hall can confirm the power-on main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. can. Therefore, the display control device 114 takes time to transfer the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the main image on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on. be able to. Also, since the player or the like can recognize that some processing is being performed while the main image is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the remaining image to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is displayed. To wait until the transfer of image data to the resident video RAM 235 is completed without worrying whether the operation is stopped until the data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235.例文帳に追加can be done.

Also, in an operation check at a factory or the like at the time of manufacture, since the main image is immediately displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, the operation of the third pattern display device 81 is started without any problem when the power is turned on. Furthermore, by using the NAND type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress deterioration in the efficiency of the operation check.

Also, when the power is turned on, while the main image is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player starts the game, and the ball entering the first entrance ball 64 or the second ball entrance 640 is detected. , the power-on varying image is drawn using the image data corresponding to the power-on varying image resident in the power-on varying image area 235b, and the power-on varying image is alternately displayed on the third pattern display device 81. , the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to display . As a result, a simple variation effect can be performed using the power-on variation image. Therefore, even while the main image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation performance.

Further, at the stage when the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation effect image is already resident in the power-on fluctuation image area 235b. When the entry of the first entrance ball 64 is detected while the main image is being displayed on the third pattern display device 81, the corresponding variation effect can be immediately displayed on the third pattern display device 81.例文帳に追加can.

Returning to FIG. 21, the description is continued. The back image area 235c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the back image displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG. The back image is an image displayed on the back side of the main pattern (third pattern), and for example, a city, the sea, the sky, or the like is displayed. Also, a right-hand navigation image (see FIG. 5A) and the like are stored in the back image area 235c as a back image.

The third symbol area 235d is an area for permanently storing the third symbol used in the variable effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. FIG. That is, in the third pattern area 235d, image data corresponding to the above ten types of main patterns (see FIG. 4) with numbers "0" to "9" as the third patterns are resident. As a result, when the third pattern display device 81 performs a variable effect, it is not necessary to read the image data from the character ROM 234 one by one. It is possible to quickly start a variable production. Therefore, even though the first pattern display device 37 has started the variable performance after the ball enters the first ball entrance 64, the third pattern display device 81 immediately starts the variable performance. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which it is not possible.

In addition, in the third design area 235d, as the main designs to which the numbers "0" to "9" are not attached, the main design consisting of the rear design such as a wooden box, and the rear design and characters such as planes, wrapping cloths, helmets, etc. The image data corresponding to the main pattern consisting of the accessory pattern which imitates is also resident. These image data are used for a demonstration effect displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the next variable effect associated with the starting prize is not started even after a predetermined time has elapsed since one variable effect was stopped. be done. Thus, when the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the main symbol with no number is displayed as the third symbol in the demonstration effect. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is in the demonstration state by visually recognizing the main symbols with no numbers from the display image of the third symbol display device 81.例文帳に追加

The character design area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to character designs used in various effects displayed on the third design display device 81. FIG. In this pachinko machine 10, various characters such as "Boy" are displayed according to various effects, and data corresponding to these characters are resident in the character design area 235e to control the display. When the device 114 changes the character design based on the content of the command received from the sound lamp control device 113, instead of newly reading out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, the image data is stored in the character design area 235e of the resident video RAM 235. By reading the image data resident in advance, the image controller 237 can draw a predetermined image. As a result, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, so even if the character ROM 234 uses the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the character design can be changed immediately.

The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. FIG. In the pachinko machine 10, for example, when vibration is detected by the sound ramp control device 113 from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back surface of the game board 13, the sound ramp control device 113 detects the occurrence of a vibration error. Notify the display controller 114 with an error command. Also, when the audio lamp control device 113 detects the occurrence of another error, the audio lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the error occurrence together with the error type by an error command. The display control device 114 is configured to display an error message corresponding to the received error on the third symbol display device 81 when an error command is received.

Here, the error message is required to be displayed almost simultaneously with the occurrence of the error from the standpoint of preventing fraud by the player and protecting the player against errors. In the pachinko machine 10, image data corresponding to various error messages are pre-resident in the error message image area 235f. By reading the image data previously resident in the image area 235f, the image controller 237 can immediately draw each error message image. This eliminates the need to sequentially read image data corresponding to error messages from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even if the NAND type flash memory 234a having a slow read speed is used as the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is read after receiving an error command. It can be displayed immediately.

The normal video RAM 236 is used so that data is overwritten and updated as needed, and is provided with at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b and a second frame buffer 236c.

The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, among the image data necessary for drawing an image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of sub-areas, and the type of image data to be stored in each sub-area is predetermined.

The MPU 231 extracts image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and that is required for subsequent image drawing from the character ROM 234 in the subarea provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. , instructs the image controller 237 to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub-area for storing. As a result, the image controller 237 reads the image data instructed by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to a specified sub-area of the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

The transfer instruction of the image data is performed by including transfer data information in a later-described drawing list in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image. As a result, the MPU 231 can issue an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction simply by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, thereby reducing the processing load.

The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for developing an image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG. The image controller 237 writes the one-frame image drawn according to the instruction from the MPU 231 to either one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, thereby rendering the one-frame image to the frame buffer. While the image is developed and the image is developed in one of the frame buffers, the image information for one frame previously developed is read out from the other frame buffer, and sent to the third pattern display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transmitting the image information with the third pattern display device 81, a process for displaying the image for one frame is executed.

In this way, by providing two frame buffers, the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, the image controller 237 can expand the one-frame image drawn in one of the frame buffers, and simultaneously , the image of one frame developed earlier can be read from the other frame buffer, and the image of the read one frame can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .

A frame buffer for developing an image for one frame and a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame for displaying an image on the third pattern display device 81 are used for drawing processing of an image for one frame. Every 20 milliseconds of completion, the MPU 231 alternately designates either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c.

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image of one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of the image of one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. be.

After the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. be. After that, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame are set to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternating designations, it is possible to continuously perform display processing of an image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing drawing processing for an image for one frame.

The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing control programs and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and for temporarily storing work data and flags used when various control programs are executed by the MPU 231. Configured. The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a clock counter 233h, and an opening data transfer flag. 223i, a stored image data determination flag 233i, and a rendering target buffer flag 233j.

The program storage area 233a is an area for storing control programs executed by the MPU 231 . When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in the program storage area 233a. After storing all the control programs in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 thereafter executes various controls using the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device 81 can be used to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

The data table storage area 233b includes a display data table describing display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the passage of time for one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main control device 110, and a display data table. This is an area for storing transfer data information of image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among the image data used in one effect displayed by the table and a transfer data table defining transfer timing.

These data tables are normally stored as a type of fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and according to the boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. , these data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in the data table storage area 233b. After all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 using the data tables stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third symbol display device 81 can be used to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

Here, details of various data tables will be described. First, the display data table is prepared one by one for each effect mode of each effect displayed on the third pattern display device 81 based on a command from the main control device 110. For example, a variable effect, an opening effect, , round effects, ending effects, and demonstration effects are provided.

The variation effect is an effect that is started in the third symbol display device 81 when a display variation pattern command from the sound lamp control device 113 is received. In addition, when the display variation pattern command is received, the display stop type command indicating the stop type of the variation effect is also received. For example, when the variable performance is started, if the stop type of the variable performance is off, the stop symbol indicating the failure is finally stopped and displayed, and the stop type of the variable performance is the jackpot A or the jackpot B. If it is either, the stop symbol indicating each jackpot is finally stopped and displayed. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbols in this variable effect, and can easily determine the game value to be given according to the jackpot type.

The opening performance is for notifying the player that the pachinko machine 10 will shift to the special game state and that the first specific prize winning port 65a and the second specific prize winning port 650a that are normally closed will be opened. The round effect is a effect for notifying the player of the number of rounds to be started from now on. The ending effect is a effect for notifying the player of the end of the special game state (big win state).

As described above, the demonstration effect is the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variable effect associated with the start winning does not start even after a predetermined time has elapsed since one variable effect was stopped. , the third pattern composed of the main patterns with no numerals "0" to "9" is stopped and displayed, and only the rear image changes. If the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player and the persons involved in the hall can recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is not playing a game.

The data table storage area 233b stores one display data table each corresponding to the opening effect, the round effect, the ending effect and the demonstration effect. In addition, if there are 32 variable performance patterns to be set, the variable display data table, which is a display data table for the variable performance, is prepared with one table for one variable performance pattern and a total of 32 tables.

Details of the display data table will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 22 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the variable display data table among the display data tables. The display data table should be displayed at that time in association with an address that represents the time (in this embodiment, 20 milliseconds) during which an image for one frame is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 as one unit. It defines in detail the content (drawing content) of an image for one frame.

The drawing contents specify the type of sprite for each sprite that is a display object that constitutes an image for one frame, and display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, and translucency according to the type of sprite. Rendering information for causing the third pattern display device 81 to render sprites, such as values, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, is defined.

The sprite type is information for specifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third pattern display device 81 where the sprite should be displayed. The enlargement ratio is information for designating an enlargement ratio with respect to a standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite to be displayed is specified according to the enlargement ratio. If the magnification is greater than 100%, the sprite will be displayed larger than the standard size, and if the magnification is less than 100%, the sprite will be displayed smaller than the standard size. Is displayed.

The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when rotating and displaying the sprite. The translucency value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite, and the higher the translucency value, the more the image displayed behind the sprite can be seen through. The α-blending information is information for specifying known α-blending coefficients used when performing superimposition processing with other sprites. Color information is information for designating the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. The filter designation information is information for designating an image filter to be applied to the sprite when rendering the designated sprite.

In the variable display data table, the drawing contents for one frame defined corresponding to each address are one rear image, nine third patterns (design 1, design 2, . Rendering information for each sprite, such as an effect that expresses the insertion of a character, a character used for various effects such as boy images and characters, is defined for each address. One or a plurality of information regarding effects and characters are defined according to the content to be displayed in the frame.

Here, the display position of the rear image is fixed to the entire screen of the third pattern display device 81, and the magnification ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information are changed over time. Since it is fixed, only the back surface type, which is information for specifying the back image type, is defined in the variable display data table. This back face type is to display one of the back faces A to C corresponding to the stage selected by the player (one of "town stage", "empty stage", and "island stage"), or display back faces A to C. Information specifying whether to display a rear image different from C is described. Further, when specifying to display a back image different from back faces A to C, the back face type also describes information specifying which back face image to display.

When the type of back face specifies that one of the back faces A to C is to be displayed, the MPU 231 specifies the back face image corresponding to the stage specified by the player among the back faces A to C as the object to be drawn. Also, the range of the rear image to be displayed for that frame is specified according to the lapse of time. On the other hand, when it is specified to display a rear image different from the rear faces A to C, the rear face image to be displayed is specified from the rear face type.

In the present embodiment, a description will be given of a case in which only the back surface type is specified as the drawing content of the back surface image in the display data table. may be defined as position information indicating whether the should be displayed. This position information may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position was displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 identifies the range of the back image to be displayed for that frame based on the elapsed time since the back image in the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information was displayed.

Further, the position information may be information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on this display data table (or the display of the third pattern display device 81) was started. In this case, the MPU 231 displays the range of the rear image to be displayed for that frame at the stage when the drawing of the image (or the display of the third pattern display device 81) is started based on the display database. It is specified based on the position of the back image and the elapsed time since the drawing of the image indicated by the position information (or the display of the third pattern display device 81) was started.

Furthermore, the position information is information indicating the elapsed time since the back image in the range corresponding to the initial position was displayed, and the image drawing based on the display data table (or the third pattern display device 81) according to the back surface type. display) may indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time since the start of the display, or along with the back surface type and position information, the type information of the position information (for example, the range corresponding to the initial position It is information indicating the elapsed time since the back image was displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display database (or the display of the third pattern display device 81) was started. (information indicating whether or not the back surface image is drawn) may be defined as the drawing content of the back image. Alternatively, the position information may be information indicating an address in which the range of the rear image to be displayed is stored, instead of information indicating the elapsed time.

The third symbols (symbol 1, symbol 2, . . . ) describe symbol type offset information as symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information representing the difference between the numbers attached to the respective third symbols. Rather than directly specifying the type of the third symbol, the offset information is specified because the display of the third symbol in the variable effect is the stop symbol of the variable effect performed one before and the variable effect performed this time. This is because it changes according to the stop pattern, and in the pattern offset information from the start of the variation until the predetermined time elapses, the offset information from the stop pattern of the previous variation performance is described. As a result, the variable performance is started from the stop symbol in the previous variable performance.

On the other hand, after a predetermined time has passed since the start of the fluctuation, the offset from the stop pattern set according to the stop type command (stop type command for display) received from the main control device 110 via the sound lamp control device 113 Include information. As a result, the variable effect can be stopped with a stop symbol corresponding to the stop type specified by the main controller 110. - 特許庁

In addition, since each third symbol is assigned a unique number, the variable symbol in the previous variable effect or the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type specified by the main controller 110 can be selected as the third symbol. , and the offset information is represented by the difference between the numbers attached to each third pattern, the third pattern to be displayed can be easily specified from the offset information.

In addition, in the pattern offset information, the third pattern fluctuates at high speed during the predetermined time when the offset information of the stop pattern of the variable performance performed immediately before is switched to the offset information of the stop pattern of the variable performance performed this time. It is set to be the displayed time. While the third pattern is being variably displayed at high speed, the third pattern is invisible to the player. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop pattern of the variable performance being performed this time, even if the continuity of the numbers of the third pattern is interrupted, the player does not recognize the interruption of the continuity of the numbers. be able to.

"Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described at "0000H", which is the top address of the display data table, and the last address of the display data table ("02F0H" in the example of FIG. 22) is the data table. "End" information indicating the end of is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the drawing contents corresponding to the presentation mode to be defined in the display data table are displayed. is described.

The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, and displays the selected display data table. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Each time drawing processing for one frame is completed, the pointer 233f is incremented by 1, and in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, based on the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f, the next A drawing list (see FIG. 24), which will be described later, is created by specifying the image contents to be drawn. By transmitting this drawing list to the image controller 237, a drawing instruction for the image is given. As a result, as the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing contents are identified in the order defined in the display data table, so the image as defined in the display data table is displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

Thus, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 responds to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. Instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. .

Here, as in the conventional pachinko machine, when the program executed by the MPU 231 is started each time the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, the effect image becomes more diverse. Therefore, the processing capacity of the display control device 114 is limited, and there is a risk that the diversification of controllable effect images will be limited. there were. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed only by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. Regardless of the processing capability of the control device 114, various modes of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81. - 特許庁

In this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each rendering mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the rendering mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is generated for each frame according to the set data table. The reason why it can be created is that the pachinko machine 10 determines in advance the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the result of the lottery performed based on the starting prize. On the other hand, in game machines other than pachinko machines, the display contents change on the spot based on the user's operation, so the display contents cannot be predicted. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to the mode of presentation. Thus, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each presentation mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the presentation mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created for each frame according to the set data table. Such a configuration can be realized only when the pachinko machine 10 is configured to determine the presentation mode to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the starting prize.

Next, details of the transfer data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 23 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table prepared for each effect. Transfer data information for transferring image data not resident in the video RAM 235 for normal use from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236 for normal use and its transfer timing are defined.

If all the image data of the sprites used in the effects specified in the display data table are stored in the resident video RAM 235, no transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is prepared. As a result, an increase in capacity of the data table storage area 233b can be suppressed.

The transfer data table contains transfer data information of sprite image data (hereinafter referred to as "transfer target image data") that should be transferred at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table in correspondence with the address. (corresponding to addresses "0001H" and "0097H" in FIG. 23). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined in association with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

On the other hand, if there is no transfer target image data to start transferring at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table, there is no transfer target image data to start transferring corresponding to that address. (corresponding to address "0002H" in FIG. 23).

The transfer data information includes the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236). is included.

It should be noted that, similarly to the display data table, "Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described in "0000H", which is the top address of the transfer data table, and the end address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. 23, "02F0H") describes "End" information indicating the end of the data table. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data to be defined in the transfer data table is described.

When the MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, the display data table exists, the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in a transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233, which will be described later. Then, every time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing contents defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f are identified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 24), which will be described later, is created. At the same time, from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite whose transfer is to be started at that time is acquired, and the transfer data information is added to the created drawing list. to add.

For example, in the example of FIG. 23, when the pointer 233f is "0001H" or "0097H", the MPU 231 creates the transfer data information defined for the address in the transfer data table based on the display data table. The drawing list is added, and the drawing list after the addition is transmitted to the image controller 237 . On the other hand, when the pointer 233f is "0002H", Null data is defined at the address "0002H" of the transfer data table. The drawing list is sent to the image controller 237 without adding transfer data information to the drawing list.

When transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. process.

Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is specified for a predetermined address, by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, When drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 required for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail. Using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a, a predetermined sprite can be drawn based on the display data table.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the image required for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay, so that the image can be displayed. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. - 特許庁Also, only the image data temporarily resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 by the description of the transfer data table.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 responds to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, and displays the display data. When the table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. It is possible to reliably transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

The transfer data table defines transfer data information so that image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 on a sprite-by-sprite basis, the transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load on transfer.

The transfer data table has a data structure similar to that of the display data table, and is associated with an address defined in the display data table. Since the data information is defined, the image data is reliably stored in the normal video RAM 236 before the image data of the predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. As described above, since the timing of starting transfer can be instructed, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, various effects images can be easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81. be able to.

The simple image display flag 233c is a flag indicating whether or not to display the power-on image (power-on main image and power-on fluctuation image) on the third pattern display device 81 . This simple image display flag 233c is set after the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and power-on varying image is transferred to the power-on main image area 235a or power-on varying image area 235b of the resident video RAM. , is set to ON in the main process (see FIG. 48) executed by the MPU 231 (see S2105 in FIG. 48). Then, when all the resident object image data are stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer processing of the image transfer processing, in order to display an image other than the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81, It is set to OFF (see S3705 in FIG. 59(b)).

The simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 each time the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S2401 in FIG. 50B). When the image display flag 233c is ON, the simple command determination process (see S2408 in FIG. 50B) and the simple display setting process (see S2408 in FIG. 50(b) S2409) is executed. On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is off, command determination is performed so that various images are displayed according to commands transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on commands from the main control device 110 or the like. Processing (see FIGS. 51 to 55) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 56 to 58) are executed.

Further, the simple image display flag 233c is referenced in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 during the V interrupt process (see S3601 in FIG. 59A), and when the simple image display flag 233c is on. Since there is resident target image data that is not stored in the resident video RAM 235, resident image transfer setting processing (see FIG. 59(b)) is executed to transfer the resident target image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. If the simple image display flag 233c is off, the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 60) is executed to transfer the image data required for the drawing process from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. FIG.

The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in response to commands and the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on commands and the like from the main control device 110. It is a buffer for The MPU 231 determines the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the command or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113, and stores the display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. It selects and stores the selected display data table in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f by 1, and based on the drawing contents defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image controller 237 A later-described drawing list (see FIG. 24) is generated in which the content of the instruction for drawing an image is described. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 displays an effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d.

While incrementing the pointer 233f by 1, the MPU 231 draws an image to the image controller 237 for each frame based on the drawing contents defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. A drawing list (see FIG. 24), which will be described later, is generated in which the content of the drawing instruction is described. As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 .

The transfer data table buffer 233e transfers a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d according to a command or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. is a buffer for storing When the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 selects the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b, and transfers the selected transfer data table. Store in the data table buffer 233e. If all of the sprite image data used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to that display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents of the transfer data table buffer 233e by writing Null data indicating that there is no transfer target image data.

While incrementing the pointer 233f by one, the MPU 231 defines the transfer data information of the transfer target image data specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. (that is, if Null data is not described), the transfer data information is included in a later-described rendering list (see FIG. 24) describing the content of image rendering instructions to the image controller 237 generated for each frame. to add.

As a result, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the transfer process. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Transfer data information of transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address. Therefore, by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in this transfer data table, when drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, the image data necessary for drawing the sprite can be obtained. Image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236, so that the image can be displayed. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. - 特許庁Also, only the image data temporarily resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 by the description of the transfer data table.

The pointer 233f is an address at which transfer data information of corresponding drawing contents or transfer target image data should be obtained from the display data table and the transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively. is for specifying The MPU 231 once initializes the pointer 233f to 0 when the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, display setting processing for V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 based on a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when drawing processing for one frame of image is completed (see FIG. 50(b)). )), pointer update processing (see S3305 in FIG. 58) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is incremented by one.

Every time the pointer 233f is updated, the MPU 231 identifies the drawing content defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and stores the drawing content in the drawing list described later. (see FIG. 24), acquires the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite whose transfer is to be started at that time from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and obtains the transfer data Add information to the created drawing list.

As a result, an effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. FIG. Therefore, the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed only by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Therefore, regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 341, various effects can be displayed.

In addition, when the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite is displayed based on the transfer data table before the corresponding display data table starts drawing a predetermined sprite. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 used for drawing can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail. As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236, so that the image can be displayed. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. - 特許庁Also, only the image data temporarily resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 by the description of the transfer data table.

The drawing list area 233g is used by the image controller to draw an image for one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is an area for storing a draw list instructing 237.

Details of the drawing list will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 24 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame, and as shown in FIG. Symbol 2, ...), effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...), character (character 1, character 2, ..., number of reserved balls pattern 1, number of reserved balls pattern 2, ..., error (pattern) describes detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite for each sprite. The drawing list also describes transfer data information for causing the image controller 237 to transfer predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 .

The detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the type of RAM (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, and its type. The image controller 237 acquires the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and address. The detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, magnification, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information. A standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is scaled according to the enlargement ratio, rotated according to the rotation angle, and translucent according to the translucency value. alpha blending information, compositing with other sprites, color tone correction according to color information, and filtering according to filter specification information. After that, an image obtained by performing various processes at the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. Then, the drawn image is developed by the image controller 237 in either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j.

In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 stores the drawing content defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f and the content of other images to be drawn (for example, the pending number of balls to be displayed). Image, warning image that notifies the occurrence of an error, etc.), generates detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used to draw the image for one frame, and provides the detailed information for each sprite. Create a draw list by sorting.

Here, among the detailed information of each sprite, the RAM type and address for storing the data of the sprite (display object) are the sprite type defined in the display data table and the sprite type specified from other image contents. Generated accordingly. That is, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 can store the image data according to the sprite type. , the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

In addition, the MPU 231 sets other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, alpha blending information, color information, and filter designation information) among the detailed information of each sprite as defined in the display data table. copy the information as is.

Further, in generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the sprites to be arranged in the order of the sprites to be arranged in the front side from the sprites to be arranged in the rearmost side in the image for one frame, and provides detailed drawing information for each sprite. Describe (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, the detailed information corresponding to the back image is described first, followed by the third pattern (pattern 1, pattern 2, . . . ), effect (effect 1, effect 2, . Detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described in the order of (character 1, character 2, . . . , reserved ball pattern 1, reserved ball pattern 2, .

The image controller 237 executes drawing processing for each sprite according to the order described in the drawing list, and develops the drawn sprites in the frame buffer by overwriting. Therefore, in the one-frame image generated by the drawing list, the first-drawn sprite can be arranged on the rearmost side, and the last-drawn sprite can be arranged on the frontmost side.

In the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the MPU 231, when the transfer data information is described at the address indicated by the pointer 233f, transfers the transfer data information (character in which the transfer target image data is stored). The storage source start address and storage source end address in the ROM 234, and the storage destination start address of the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a where the image data to be transferred is to be stored are added to the end of the drawing list. If the transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the image controller 237 draws an image from a predetermined area of the character ROM 234 (the area indicated by the storage source start address and the storage source end address) based on the transfer data information. The data is read out and transferred to a predetermined sub-area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236 a of the normal video RAM 236 .

The clock counter 233h is a counter that counts the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. When one display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 sets time data indicating the effect time of the effect to be displayed based on the display data table. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the performance time by the image display time for one frame on the third pattern display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this embodiment).

Then, based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when drawing processing and display processing for one frame image are completed, the MPU 231 executes V interrupt processing (FIG. 50(b)). )) is executed, the timer counter 233h is decremented by one (see S3307 in FIG. 56). As a result, when the value of the clock counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 judges that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d has ended, and performs the effect in accordance with the end of the effect. perform various operations to

The storage image data discrimination flag 233i is set to indicate whether image data corresponding to all sprites whose corresponding image data are not resident in the resident video RAM 235 are stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. It is a flag indicating a storage state indicating whether or not there is.

This stored image data determination flag 233i is generated by initial setting processing (see S2102 in FIG. 48) executed by the MPU 231 in the main processing when power is turned on. The storage image data determination flag 233i generated here is set to "OFF" indicating that the storage status for all sprites is not stored in the image storage area 236a.

The storage image data determination flag 233i is updated when an instruction to transfer image data to be transferred corresponding to one sprite is set during normal image transfer setting processing (see FIG. 60) executed by the MPU 231. will be In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite for which the transfer instruction is set is set to "on" indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. Also, image data of other sprites to be stored in the same sub-area of the image storage area 236a as that one sprite will always be in a non-stored state when the image data of one sprite is stored. Therefore, the stored state corresponding to the other sprites is set to "off".

Also, when transferring the image data of a sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, the MPU 231 refers to the stored image data determination flag 233i and determines the sprite to be transferred. It is determined whether image data has already been stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 235 (see S3813 in FIG. 60). Then, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "OFF" and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, an instruction to transfer the image data is set (see S3814 in FIG. 60). , causes the image controller 237 to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "on", the corresponding image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a, so the transfer processing of that image data is stopped. As a result, unnecessary transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 can be suppressed, and the processing load on each unit of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240 can be reduced. can.

The drawing target buffer flag 233j selects a frame buffer for developing an image drawn by the image controller 237 (hereinafter referred to as a "drawing target buffer") from among two frame buffers (the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c). ), and when the drawing object buffer flag 233j is 0, it designates the first frame buffer 236b as the drawing object buffer, and when it is 1, it designates the second frame buffer 236c. The information of the specified drawing target buffer is sent to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S3902 in FIG. 61).

As a result, the image controller 237 executes the drawing process of developing the image drawn based on the drawing list on the specified drawing target buffer. In parallel with the drawing process, the image controller 237 reads the drawn image information previously developed from the frame buffer different from the drawing target buffer, and transmits the image to the third pattern display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transferring the information, display processing for displaying an image on the third pattern display device 81 is executed.

The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated as the drawing target buffer information is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is done by inverting the value of the drawing target buffer flag 233j, that is, by setting the value to "1" if it was "0" and to "0" if it was "1". done by As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted. Also, the transmission of the drawing list is executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing and display processing of the image for one frame are completed. This is performed each time the drawing process of the process (see FIG. 50B) is executed (see S3902 in FIG. 61).

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image of one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of the image of one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. be.

After the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. be. After that, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame are set to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternating designations, it is possible to continuously perform display processing of an image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing drawing processing for an image for one frame.

<Regarding the control process of the main controller in the first embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flow charts of FIGS. 25 to 39. FIG. The processing of the MPU 201 can be broadly classified into a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the start-up process, and a timer that is started periodically (at intervals of 2 milliseconds in this embodiment). There are interrupt processing and NMI interrupt processing that is activated by input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. and main processing.

FIG. 25 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 . Timer interrupt processing is periodic processing that is executed, for example, every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, various winning switch reading processes are executed (S101). That is, it reads the states of various switches connected to the main controller 110, determines the states of the switches, and saves detection information (winning detection information).

Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (399 in this embodiment). Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM203. Similarly, 1 is added to the second initial random number counter CINI2, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0, and the updated value of the second initial random number counter CINI2 is cleared. is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203 .

Further, the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second winning random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second hit random number counter C4 are each incremented by 1, and their counter values are the maximum values (in this embodiment 399, 99, 239), respectively, are cleared to 0 respectively. Then, the updated values of the respective counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203. FIG.

Next, a special symbol variation process for setting the variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 and the like is executed as well as the processing for displaying on the first symbol display device 37 (S104). After that, start winning processing associated with winning (start winning) to the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 is executed (S105). The details of the special symbol variation process and the starting winning process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

After executing the starting winning process, the normal symbol variation process, which is the process for performing display on the second symbol display device, is executed (S106), and the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67 is opened as the ball passes through. A gate passage process is executed (S107). Details of the normal symbol variation processing and the through gate passage processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 30 and 31, respectively. After executing the through gate passage processing, the firing control processing is executed (S108), and other processing to be periodically executed is executed (S109), and the timer interrupt processing ends. Note that the shooting control process is performed on the condition that the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 and that the shooting stop switch 51b for stopping shooting is not operated. This is the process of deciding on/off of firing. Main controller 110 gives a ball launch instruction to launch controller 112 when ball launch is on.

Next, with reference to FIG. 26, the special symbol variation process (S104) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 26 is a flow chart showing this special symbol variation process (S104). This special symbol variation process (S104) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 25), and the variation display of the special symbol (first symbol) performed in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device This is a process for controlling the variable display of the third pattern performed in 81.

In this special symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is in the midst of a big hit at the moment (S201). During the special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game), and the special symbol. During the predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game. As a result of the determination, if the jackpot of the special symbol is in progress (S201: Yes), this processing is finished as it is.

If the special symbol jackpot is not being won (S201: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202), and the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing. If not (S202: No), the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e (number of times N2 of suspension of variable display in special symbols) is acquired (S203). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is greater than 0 (S204).

If the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is not 0 (S204: Yes), the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is subtracted by 1 (S205), and changed by calculation. A reserved ball number command (special figure 2 reserved ball number command) indicating the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is set (S206). The reserved ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 during the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 34), which will be described later. , is sent to the audio ramp controller 113 . When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted values in the RAM 223. Stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c, respectively.

After setting the special figure 2 reserved ball number command by the processing of S206, the data stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is shifted (S207). In the process of S207, the data stored in the reservation first area to the reservation fourth area of the special symbol 2 reservation ball storage area 203b are sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the first holding area → execution area, the second holding area → the first holding area, the third holding area → the second holding area, the fourth holding area → the third holding area, etc. Shift data. After shifting the data, a special symbol variation start process is executed to start the variation display in the first symbol display device 37 (S213). The special symbol variation start process will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, in the process of S204, when it is determined that the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is 0 (S204: No), the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (N1) is obtained (S208), and it is determined whether the obtained value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is greater than 0 (S209). When it is determined by the process of S209 that the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is 0 (S209: No), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is not 0 (S209: Yes), the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is subtracted by 1 (S210). , Set a reserved ball number command (special figure 1 reserved ball number command) indicating the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d changed by calculation (S211). After setting the special figure 1 reserved ball number command by the process of S211, the data stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted (S212), and the process proceeds to S213.

In the processing of S202, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202: Yes), it is determined whether or not the variation time of the variation display being executed in the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed. (S214). The variation time of the variation display executed in the first pattern display device 37 is determined according to the variation pattern selected by the variation type counter CS1 (determined according to the variation pattern command), and this variation time has not elapsed (S214: No), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S214, if it is determined that the variable time has passed (S214: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S215). The setting of the stop symbols is performed in advance by special symbol variation start processing (S213), which will be described later with reference to FIG. When this special symbol variation start process is executed, a special symbol lottery is performed based on the values of various counters stored in the execution areas of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. will be More specifically, whether or not the special symbol jackpot is determined according to the value of the first winning random number counter C1, and in the case of the special symbol jackpot, depending on the value of the first winning type counter C2. It is determined whether the jackpot A or the jackpot B will be given.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the jackpot A is achieved, the blue LED in the first symbol display device 37 is turned on. In addition, when the jackpot B is obtained, a red LED is lit, and when the winning is a loss, a green LED is lit. The display of each LED is turned off when the next variable display is started, but it may be turned on only for several seconds after the variable display is stopped.

After the process of S215 is completed, when the variation display being executed in the first symbol display device 37 is started, the special symbol lottery result (this lottery result) performed by the special symbol variation start process is It is determined whether or not it is a special symbol jackpot (S216). If the result of the lottery this time is a special symbol jackpot (S216: Yes), an opening scenario for a specific winning opening is set based on the jackpot type (S217), and then the start of the jackpot is set (S218). The opening scenario specifically indicates the setting of the opening patterns of the first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a and the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a. That is, in the 1st to 11th rounds and the 13th to 15th rounds, the first specific winning opening (first open opening) 65a is opened for a predetermined period of time (until 30 seconds have passed or until 10 balls have won). , and in 12 rounds, the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a is set to be opened in a pattern (see FIG. 16) corresponding to the jackpot type. When the processing of S218 is completed, a notification counter corresponding to the jackpot type is set (S219), and this processing is completed.

On the other hand, in the process of S216, if the lottery result of this time is out (S216: No),
It is determined whether the value of the time saving counter 203r is 1 or more (S220), and if it is determined that the value is not 1 or more (that is, 0) (S220: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the time saving counter 203r is 1 or more (S220: Yes), the value of the time saving counter 203r is decremented by 1 (S221), and this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 27, the special symbol variation start process (S213) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 27 is a flow chart showing the special symbol variation start process (S213). This special symbol variation start process (S213) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 26) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 25). Based on the values of various counters stored in the common execution area with the symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, a "special symbol big hit" or "special symbol omission" lottery (determination of success or failure) is performed, and the first It is a process for determining the effect pattern (variable effect pattern) of the variable effect performed by the symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 .

In the special symbol variation start process, first, the first winning random number counter C1 and the first winning type counter C2 stored in the common execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. , stop type selection counter C3, and stop type counter CN1 (S301).

Next, it is determined whether the probability variation flag 203g of the RAM 203 is on (S302). Based on the special symbol big hit random number table, the lottery result of whether or not the special symbol big win is obtained from the first winning random number table 202a (S303). Specifically, the value of the first winning random number counter C1 is compared one by one with 10 random numbers defined in the first winning random number table 202a. As described above, 10 random numbers from "0 to 9" are set as the random numbers that become the jackpot of special symbols, and the value of the first winning random number counter C1 and the random numbers that become these winnings match. If so, it is determined to be a special symbol jackpot. When the lottery result of the special symbol is obtained, the process proceeds to S305.

In the present embodiment, the lottery for the special symbol 1 and the lottery for the special symbol 2 have a common determination value for a big hit, but depending on whether the lottery for the special symbol 1 or the lottery for the special symbol 2 Different random values may be used. By constructing in this way, a random number determined to be out of the first special symbol is determined to be a hit in the second special symbol, and bias in the jackpot can be suppressed.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the lottery for the special symbol 1 and the lottery for the special symbol 2 are set to the same number of determination values for the big hit, but the lottery for the special symbol 1 and the lottery for the special symbol 2 are set to the same number. , the number of judgment values that result in a big hit may be varied. By constructing in this way, the probability of big win can be made different between the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and when the lottery is executed with the special symbol with the higher probability of big win, the player is allowed to win. It is possible to have expectations for a big hit.

On the other hand, in the process of S302, if it is determined that the variable probability flag 203g is not ON (that is, it is OFF) (S302: No), the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal state (low probability game state) with special symbols, Based on the value of the first winning random number counter C1 obtained in the process of S301 and the first winning random number table 202a for low probability, the lottery result of whether or not the special symbol is a big hit is obtained (S304). Specifically, the value of the first winning random number counter C1 is compared with the random value of 1 stored in the first winning random number table 202a for low probability. One of "200" is set as the random number value for the special symbol jackpot, and when the value of the first winning random number counter C1 matches the random number value for the special symbol jackpot. It is determined that When the lottery result of the special symbol is obtained, the process proceeds to S305.

Then, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol acquired by the process of S303 or S304 is a special symbol jackpot (S305), and when it is determined to be a special symbol jackpot (S305: Yes). , sets the display mode at the time of the big win indicating the big win (S306). More specifically, the value of the first winning type counter C2 acquired in the process of S301 is compared with the random number value stored in the first winning type selection table 202b, and two types of special symbol jackpots (jackpot It is determined what the jackpot type is among A and jackpot B).

In the process of S306, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 (lighting state of the LED 37a) is set according to the determined jackpot type (jackpot A, jackpot B). In addition, the jackpot types (jackpot A, jackpot B) are set as the stop types so that the stop symbols corresponding to the jackpot types are stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 .

Next, the variation pattern at the time of the big win is determined (S308). When the variation pattern is set in the process of S308, the variation time (display time) of the variation effect in the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the third symbol display device 81 until it stops at the jackpot symbol. A pattern variation time is determined. At this time, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is confirmed, and based on the value of the variation type counter CS1, the variation time of symbol variations such as normal reach and super reach is determined. As described above, the relationship between the value of the variation type counter CS1 and the variation time is specified in the variation pattern selection table 20d.

Variation patterns defined in this variation pattern selection table 202d include, for example, variation patterns for deviation, such as "loss (for long time)", "loss (for short time)", "loss normal reach", " Outgoing Super Reach” and “Outgoing Special Reach” are stipulated. In addition, as fluctuation patterns for both jackpot A and jackpot B, various "common normal reach" types, "shared super reach" types, and "shared special reach" types are defined, and as fluctuation patterns for jackpot B, various "special reach" types are defined. As fluctuation patterns for common wins and losses, various "common normal reach" types, "common super reach" types, and "common special reach" types are defined.

On the other hand, in the processing of S305, when it is determined that the special symbol is out (S305: No), the display mode at the time of being out is set (S308). In the process of S308, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to the display mode corresponding to the off symbol, and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is changed. Based on this, as the stop type to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, it is set whether it is a front-rear out-of-reach reach, a reach other than front-rear out-of-order, or a complete out-of-order.

Here, if the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol probability variable state, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 acquired in the process of S301 is compared with the random number stored in the stop type selection table for high probability. to set the stop type. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 89", complete out is set, and if it is in the range of "90 to 97", reach other than front and rear out is set, and "98 , 99”, set the front-rear out-of-reach reach. On the other hand, if the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal state with special symbols, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is compared with the random number value stored in the stop type selection table for low probability, and the stop type is set. do. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 79", set the complete out. , 99”, set the front-rear out-of-reach reach.

Next, the variation pattern at the time of deviation is determined (S309). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the variation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the lost symbol is determined. At this time, as in the processing of S307, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is confirmed, and based on the value of the variation type counter CS1, the variation time of the pattern variation such as normal reach, super reach, etc. to decide.

When the process of S307 or the process of S309 ends, next, a variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the variation pattern determined in the process of S307 or S309 is set (S310). Next, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the process of S306 or S308 is set (S311). These fluctuation pattern commands and stop type commands are stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and these commands are sent to the sound lamp control device 113 in the processing of S1001 of the main processing (see FIG. 34). sent. The audio lamp control device 113 transmits the stop type command to the display control device 114 as it is. When the processing of S312 ends, the process returns to the special symbol variation processing.

Next, the starting winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 28 is a flow chart showing this starting winning process (S105). This starting winning process (S105) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 25), and determines whether or not there is a winning (starting winning) to the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640. , when there is a starting prize, various random number counters are acquired, and processing for holding the value is executed.

When the starting winning process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has won the first ball entrance 64 (starting winning) (S401). Here, the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 is detected over three times of timer interrupt processing. Then, when it is determined that the ball has won the first ball entrance 64 (S401: Yes), the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (number of times N1 of holding variable display in the special symbol) is acquired (S402). ). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is less than the upper limit (4 in this embodiment) (S403).

Then, if there is no winning to the first ball entrance 64 (S401: No), or even if there is a winning to the first ball entrance 64, the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is 4. If not less than (S403: No), the process proceeds to S407. On the other hand, if there is a winning to the first ball entrance 64 (S401: Yes) and the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is less than 4 (S403: Yes), special symbol 1 reserved 1 is added to the value (N1) of the ball number counter 203d (S404). Then, a reserved ball number command (special figure 1 reserved ball number command) indicating the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d changed by the calculation is set (S405).

The pending ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 during the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 34), which will be described later. , is sent to the audio ramp controller 113 . When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. Store.

After setting the pending ball number command by the process of S405, each value of the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 updated in the process of S103 of the timer interrupt process described above is changed. , stored in the first area of the vacant reservation areas (reservation first area to reservation fourth area) of the special symbol 1 reservation ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203 (S406). In addition, in the processing of S406, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is referred to, and if the value is 0, the first reserved area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

Next, in each process of S407-S412, the same process as each process of S401-S406 is executed for the winning of the second ball entrance 640. FIG. Each of the processes of S407 to S412 is different only in that the process of holding the held ball corresponding to the winning of the second ball entrance 640 is executed, and the other processes are the same as those of S401 to S406. Since they are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted. Further, when the processes of S407 to S412 are finished, the prefetch process is executed (S413), and this process is finished.

Next, referring to FIG. 29, the prefetching process (S413) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 29 is a flow chart showing this prefetching process (S413). This look-ahead process (S413) is executed in the starting winning process (see FIG. 28).

In this look-ahead processing, first, it is determined whether or not there is a new winning at the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 (S501), and either the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 is If there is no new winning (S501: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that there is a new winning at the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 (S501: Yes), it is determined whether or not the game state at the time of start of fluctuation is the probability variable state of special symbols. If it is determined (S502), and if it is a probability variable state of special symbols (S502: Yes), the lottery result is obtained based on the first winning random number table for high probability (S503), and the process proceeds to S505.

In the process of S502, when it is determined that the game state is not the probability variable state of the special symbol (S502: No), the lottery result is acquired based on the first winning random number table for low probability (S504), and the process is S505. to move to. In the processing of S505, each value of the first hit type counter C2 and the stop type selection counter C3, which are the judgment results of the big hit, are stored in the special symbol reserved ball storage area (S505). Next, a winning information command including the jackpot determination result is set (S506), and this process is terminated.

Next, referring to FIG. 30, the normal symbol variation process (S106) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 30 is a flow chart showing this normal symbol variation process (S106). This normal symbol variation processing (S106) is executed in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 25), and is associated with the variation display of the second symbol performed in the second symbol display device 83 and the second entrance 640. This is a process for controlling the opening time of the electric accessory.

In this normal symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol (second symbol) is currently hitting (S601). During the winning of the normal symbol (second symbol), the second symbol display device 83 is displaying the winning, and the opening and closing control of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second ball entrance 640 is performed. including while As a result of the determination, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is in the process of hitting (S601: Yes), this process is finished as it is.

On the other hand, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hit (S601: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is fluctuating (S602), and the second symbol display device is determined. is not fluctuating (S602: No), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (the number of times of suspension of variable display in normal symbols M) is obtained (S603). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal design reserved ball number counter 203f is greater than 0 (S604), and if the value (M) of the normal design reserved ball number counter 203f is 0 (S604: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the normal design reserved ball number counter 203f is not 0 (S604: Yes), the value (M) of the normal design reserved ball number counter 203f is subtracted by 1 (S605).

Next, the data stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is shifted (S606). In the process of S606, the data stored in the first reservation area to the fourth reservation area of the normal symbol reservation ball storage area 203c are sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the first holding area → execution area, the second holding area → the first holding area, the third holding area → the second holding area, the fourth holding area → the third holding area, etc. Shift data. After shifting the data, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is obtained (S607).

Next, it is determined whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the time-saving state of normal symbols (S608), and when it is determined that it is in the time-saving state of normal symbols (S608: Yes), the present is a special symbol jackpot. It is determined whether or not it is in the middle (S609). During the special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game), and the special symbol. During the predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol jackpot is in progress (S609: Yes), the process proceeds to S611. In the present embodiment, during the jackpot of special symbols, it is difficult to win the lottery of normal symbols. This is to make it easier for the balls to enter the first specific winning opening 65a and the second specific winning opening 650a during the special symbol jackpot (that is, during the special game state). That is, if it is easy to hit the normal pattern, the ball hit to the right will easily enter the second ball entrance 640, so the first specific winning opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 650a. And the ball becomes difficult to reach. Therefore, during the special game state (during the jackpot state), the winning probability of normal symbols is prevented from increasing, and the balls are configured to easily reach the first specific winning port 65a and the second specific winning port 650a. there is

In the process of S609, if the special symbol jackpot is not in effect (S609: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the special symbol jackpot and the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time-saving state, so obtained in the process of S607. Based on the value of the second winning random number counter C4 and the second winning random number table 202c for high probability, the lottery result as to whether or not the normal symbol wins is obtained (S610). Specifically, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the second winning random number table 202c for high probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined that it is a hit of the normal symbol, and if it is in the range of "0 to 4,205 to 239", It is determined that the pattern is out of the normal pattern (see 202c2 in FIG. 18(c)).

In the process of S608, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the time-saving state of normal symbols (S608: No), the process proceeds to S611. In the process of S611, since the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol jackpot or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 obtained in the process of S607 and the low Based on the second winning random number table for probability time, the lottery result as to whether or not the normal symbol wins is obtained (S611). Specifically, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the second winning random number table for low probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 28", it is determined that it is a hit of the normal symbol, and if it is in the range of "0 to 4, 29 to 239", It is determined that the pattern is out of the normal pattern (see 202c1 in FIG. 18(c)).

Next, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the normal symbol obtained by the process of S610 or S611 is a normal symbol win (S612), and when it is determined that the normal symbol win is determined (S612: Yes) , set the display mode at the time of winning (S613). In the process of S613, after the variable display on the second symbol display device is completed, the symbol "o" is lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol).

Then, it is determined whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the time-saving state with normal symbols (S614), and if the pachinko machine 10 is in the time-saving state with normal symbols (S614: Yes), the present time is during the special symbol jackpot. (S615). As a result of the determination, if the special symbol jackpot is in progress (S615: Yes), the process proceeds to S617. In this embodiment, during the special symbol jackpot, in order to suppress the ball from entering the second ball entrance 640 as much as possible, when the normal symbol wins, similar to the normal symbol low probability state, The number of times of opening and the opening time of the electric accessory 640a are set.

In the processing of S615, if the special symbol jackpot is not in progress (S615: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the special symbol jackpot and the pachinko machine 10 is in the time-saving state with the normal symbols, so the second ball entrance. The opening period of the electric accessary 640a associated with 640 is set to 1 second, and the number of opening times is set to 2 (S616), and the process proceeds to S619. In the process of S614, when the pachinko machine 10 is not in the time-saving state of normal symbols (S614: No), the process proceeds to S617. In the process of S617, the pachinko machine 10 is in the special pattern jackpot or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal pattern, so the opening period of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second ball entrance 640 is The time is set to 0.2 seconds, and the number of opening times is set to 1 (S617), and the process proceeds to S619.

In the process of S612, when it is determined that the symbol is out of the normal pattern (S612: No), the display mode at the time of out is set (S618). In the process of S618, after the variable display on the second symbol display device is finished, the symbol "x" is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol). After the setting of the display mode at the time of detachment is completed, the process proceeds to S619.

In the processing of S619, it is determined whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the time-saving state of normal symbols (S619), and if the pachinko machine 10 is in the time-saving state of normal symbols (S619: Yes), the variable display on the second symbol display device. is set to 3 seconds (S620), and the process ends. On the other hand, if the pachinko machine 10 is not in the time-saving state of normal symbols (S619: No), the variation time of the variation display on the second symbol display device is set to 30 seconds (S621), and this processing is terminated. In this way, except during the special symbol jackpot, when the probability of normal symbols is high, the time of fluctuation display is very short from "30 seconds to 3 seconds" compared to when the probability of normal symbols is low, and further, Since the release period of the second ball entrance 640 becomes very long as “0.2 seconds×1 time→1 second×2 times”, the ball easily enters the second ball entrance 640 .

In the process of S602, if the display mode of the second pattern display device is fluctuating (S602: Yes), it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display executed in the second pattern display device has elapsed ( S622). It should be noted that the variable time here is the time set in advance by the process of S620 or the process of S621 before the variable display is started on the second symbol display device.

In the process of S622, if the variable time has not elapsed (S622: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the processing of S622, if the variation time of the variation display being executed has passed (S622: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device is set (S623). In the process of S623, if the normal symbol lottery is won and the display mode is set by the process of S613, the "○" symbol as the second symbol is displayed in a stop display (lighting display) on the second symbol display device. ). On the other hand, if the lottery for the normal symbol is lost and the display mode is set by the process of S618, the "x" symbol as the second symbol is stopped (lighted up) on the second symbol display device. is set to When the stop display is set by the process of S623, when the second symbol display update process (see S1007) of the main process (see FIG. 34) is executed next, the variable display on the second symbol display device ends. Then, the stop symbol (second symbol) is stop-displayed (lit display) on the second symbol display device in the display mode set in the process of S613 or the process of S618.

Next, when the variation display being executed in the second symbol display device is started, it is determined whether the result of the normal symbol lottery (this lottery result) performed by the normal symbol variation process is a hit of the normal symbol. Determine (S624). If the result of the lottery this time is a normal symbol hit (S624: Yes), the start of opening/closing control of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second ball entrance 640 is set (S625), and this process ends. When the start of opening/closing control of the electric accessory 640a is set by the processing of S625, when the electric accessory opening/closing processing (see S1005) of the main processing (see FIG. 34) is executed next, the opening and closing of the electric accessory is performed. The control is started, and the opening/closing control of the electric accessary product is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the processing of S616 or S617 are completed. On the other hand, in the process of S624, if the lottery result of this time is out of the normal symbol (S624: No), the process of S625 is skipped and this process is finished.

Next, the through gate passage processing (S107) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 31 is a flow chart showing this through gate passage processing (S107). This through gate passage processing (S107) is executed in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 25) to determine whether or not the ball has passed through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67. In this case, the value indicated by the second winning random number counter C4 is acquired and retained.

In the through gate passing process, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67 (S701). Here, passage of the ball through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has passed through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67 (S701: Yes), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (the number of times of suspension of variation display in normal symbols M) is obtained. (S702). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is less than the upper limit (4 in this embodiment) (S703).

Whether the ball has not passed through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67 (S701: No), or even if the ball has passed through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f If the value (M) is not less than 4 (S703: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if the ball passes through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67 (S701: Yes) and the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is less than 4 (S703: Yes), the normal symbol 1 is added to the value (M) of the reserved ball number counter 203f (S704). Then, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 updated in the processing of S103 of the timer interrupt processing described above is stored in the empty reservation area (reservation first area to reservation fourth area) of the normal symbol reservation ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203. The data is stored in the first area (S705), and the process ends. In the process of S705, the value of the normal symbol reserved ball counter 203d is referred to, and if the value is 0, the first reserved area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the second reserved area is the first area, if the value is 2, the third reserved area is the first area, and if the value is 3, the fourth reserved area is the first area.

Next, NMI interrupt processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off due to power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, information on occurrence of power failure is stored in the RAM 203 . That is, when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off due to a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 . Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed, starts the NMI interrupt processing, stores the power interruption occurrence information in the RAM 203 as the setting of the power interruption occurrence information (S801), and ends the NMI interruption processing. do.

The above NMI interrupt processing is also executed in the payout launch control device 111 in the same manner, and the occurrence information of the power failure is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt processing. That is, when the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power failure or the like, a power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. to start NMI interrupt processing.

Next, referring to FIG. 33, startup processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 when main controller 110 is powered on will be described. FIG. 33 is a flow chart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started by a reset when the power is turned on. In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process is executed upon power-on (S901). In this initialization process, for example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, in order to wait for the sub-side control devices (peripheral control devices such as the sound lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to become operable, a wait process (one second in this embodiment) is executed. (S902). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S903).

After that, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided in the power supply 115 is turned on (S904), and if it is turned on (S904: Yes), the process proceeds to S912. On the other hand, if the RAM erasing switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), it is determined whether or not power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S905), and if not stored (S905: No). , there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power shutdown did not end normally, so in this case as well, the process proceeds to S912.

If power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S905: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S906). If the judgment value does not match the RAM judgment value saved at the time of power-off, the backed-up data is destroyed. Note that the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the work area address of the RAM 203, as will be described later in the processing of S1014 in FIG. Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly saved.

In the process of S912, a payout initialization command is transmitted in order to initialize the payout control device 111, which is a sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S910). When the payout control device 111 receives this payout initialization command, it clears the area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets the initial value, and becomes ready to start the game ball payout control. After transmitting the payout initialization command, the main controller 110 executes the initialization processing of the RAM 203 (S911, S911).

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the power is turned on while the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, such as when the hall starts operating. Therefore, if the RAM erasing switch 122 is pressed during the start-up process, the RAM initialization process (S911, S912) is executed. Also, if power failure occurrence information is not set, or if a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.), the RAM 203 initialization process (S911, S912) is executed in the same way. . In the RAM initialization process (S911, S912), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S911), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S912). After executing the initialization process of the RAM 203, the storage valve 607a is set to be closed (S913), and the process proceeds to S914.

On the other hand, if the RAM erasing switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), power failure occurrence information is stored (S905: Yes), and the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) is normal ( S907: Yes), while retaining the data backed up in the RAM 203, clear the power failure occurrence information (S908). Next, the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) transmits a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning to the gaming state at the time of drive power interruption (S909), and the process proceeds to S914. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout return command, the game ball payout control can be started while retaining the data stored in the RAM 213 .

In the process of S914, a command (state command) for notifying the game state at the time of power restoration is output to the sound lamp control device 113 (S914). This state command is a command for notifying whether or not the special symbol probability variation state, whether or not the normal symbol time saving state, the number of times of normal symbol time saving, and the like. A state command is generated according to the value of the time saving counter 203r and the state of the probability variation flag 203g, and is output to the audio lamp control device 113. By outputting this state command, the main controller 110 and the voice lamp controller 113 can recognize the same game state. Therefore, even though the special symbols are in a low probability state, the right-handed navigation (see FIG. 5(a)) is displayed, or conversely, despite the special symbols being in a definite variable state, the player It is possible to prevent (suppress) the display of the hitting right warning image (see FIG. 5(b)) when the player hits right. That is, it is possible to match the game state with the effect to be executed.

When the processing of S914 ends, an effect permission command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113, and execution of various effects is permitted to the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 (S915). Next, the interrupt is permitted (S916), and the main processing described later is performed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 34, main processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 after the start-up processing described above will be described. FIG. 34 is a flow chart showing this main process. Main processing of the game is executed in this main processing. As an outline, each process of S1001 to S1008 is executed as a periodical process with a period of 4 ms, and the counter update process of S1011 and S1012 is executed in the remaining time.

In the main process, first, during execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 25), output data such as commands stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 is transmitted to each sub-side control device (peripheral control device). (S1001). Specifically, it determines whether or not there is winning detection information detected in the switch reading process of S101 in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 25). Send a prize ball command to In addition, it transmits to the sound lamp control device 113 the reserved ball number command set in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 26) or the starting winning process (see FIG. 28). Further, by this external output processing, the variation pattern command, the stop type command, etc. necessary for the variation display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 . Also, the opening command, round number command, and ending command set in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 35) are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 . In addition, a ball launch signal is sent to the launch control device 112 when the ball is to be launched.

Next, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated (S1002). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in this embodiment). Then, the updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM203.

When the update of the variation type counter CS1 is finished, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1003), and then, in the case of the special symbol jackpot state, the execution of the jackpot production, Jackpot control for opening or closing the first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a of the 1 variable winning device 65 and the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a of the second variable winning device 650 Processing is executed (S1004). In the jackpot control process, the opening of the first specific winning opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 650a is performed in accordance with the opening scenario set by the process of S217 of the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 26) for each round of the jackpot state. and set closure. In addition, in this embodiment, although the jackpot control process (S1004) is executed in the main process, it may be executed in the timer interrupt process.

Next, an electric accessary product opening/closing process for controlling the opening/closing of the electric accessary product 640a associated with the second entrance 640 is executed (S1005). In the electric accessary product opening/closing process, when the opening/closing control start of the electric accessary product is set by the processing of S625 of the normal symbol variation processing (see FIG. 30), the opening/closing control of the electric accessary product is started. The opening/closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the processing of S616 or S617 in the normal symbol variation processing are completed.

Next, a first symbol display update process for updating the display of the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S1006). In the first symbol display update process, when a variation pattern is set by the process of S307 or the process of S309 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 27), the variation display corresponding to the variation pattern is displayed as the first symbol display. Start at device 37 . In this embodiment, among the LEDs of the first pattern display device 37, until the variation time elapses after the variation is started, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is extinguished. At the same time, the green LED is lit, and if the green LED is lit, the green LED is extinguished and the blue LED is lit, and if the blue LED is lit, the blue LED is extinguished. At the same time, the red LED is lit.

Note that the main process is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the lighting color of the LED is changed each time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted by 1 each time the main process is executed so that the player can confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED, and when the counter reaches 100, the LED change the lighting color of That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 seconds. Note that the value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

Further, in the first symbol display update process, when the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the processes of S307 and S309 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 27) has ended, the first symbol display device 37 The variation display being executed is terminated, and the stop symbol (first symbol) is stopped on the first symbol display device 37 in the display mode set by the processing of S306 and S308 of the special symbol variation start processing (see FIG. 27). Display (lit display).

Next, a second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device is executed (S1007). In the second symbol display update process, when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the process of S620 or the process of S621 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 30), the variation display is started on the second symbol display device 83. do. As a result, the second symbol display device 83 performs a variable display in which the second symbol "O" symbol and the "X" symbol are alternately lit. Further, in the second symbol display update process, when the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set by the processing of S623 of the normal symbol variation processing (see FIG. 30), it is executed in the second symbol display device 83. After finishing the current variation display, in the display mode set by the processing of S613 or S618 of the normal symbol variation processing (see FIG. 30), the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 ( display).

Next, based on the stored winning detection information, a winning information command setting process for notifying the winning information to the sound lamp control device 113 is executed (S1008). Based on the winning information command set by the winning information command setting process (S1008), the sound lamp control device 113 determines whether or not there is a problem in the reservoir valve 607a. In addition, it is also determined whether or not the player is playing an irregular game (playing left-handed during the jackpot state, left-handed during the variable probability state of special symbols, etc.).

When the processing of S1008 is completed, it is determined whether power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1009). The power failure signal SG1 is not output from 252, and the power is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main processing has come, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 ms in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the main processing this time (S1010). If the predetermined time has already passed (S1010: Yes), the process proceeds to S1001, and the above-described processes after S1001 are repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not passed since the start of the main processing this time (S1010: No), the second main processing is executed until the predetermined time, that is, within the remaining time until the timing of executing the next main processing. The first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S1011, S1012).

First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1011). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1, and when the counter values reach the maximum values (399 and 239 in this embodiment), they are cleared to 0. . Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the change type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the processing of S1002 (S1012).

Here, since the execution time of each process of S1001 to S1008 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is not constant and fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, , the initial value of the first winning random number counter C1, and the initial value of the second winning random number counter C4) can be randomly updated, and similarly, the fluctuation type counter CS1 can also be randomly updated.

Further, in the process of S1009, if information on occurrence of power failure is stored in the RAM 203 (S1009: Yes), the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252. As a result, the NMI interrupt process of FIG. 32 has been executed, so the power-off process after S1013 is executed. First, to prohibit the occurrence of each interrupt processing (S1013), to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as payout control device 111 and sound lamp control device 113) power off command indicating that the power has been cut off and transmit (S1014). Then, a RAM determination value is calculated and stored (S1015), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S1016), and the infinite loop continues until the power supply is completely cut off and processing cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the backed up stack area and work area of the RAM 203 .

It should be noted that the process of S1009 is performed at the end of a series of processes corresponding to the game state change performed in S1001 to S1008, or at the time of the end of one cycle of the processes of S1011 and S1012 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main processing of the main controller 110, information on the occurrence of power failure is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. It can start from the processing of S1001. That is, the process can be started from the process of S1001, as in the case of initialization in the start-up process. Therefore, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved to the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved in the process at power-off, the stack pointer is By setting to a predetermined value (initial value), the processing can be started from S1001. Therefore, the control load on the main controller 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without the main controller 110 malfunctioning or running out of control.

Next, the jackpot control process (S1004) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 35 is a flow chart showing this jackpot control process (S1004). This jackpot control process (S1004) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 34). This is a process for opening or closing the opening (first large opening) 65a and the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a.

In the jackpot control process, first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot of the special symbol is started (S1101). Specifically, if the process of S218 or S220 of the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 26) is executed and the start of the special symbol jackpot is set, it is determined that the special symbol jackpot will start. In the process of S1101, when the special symbol jackpot is started (S1101: Yes), an opening command is set (S1102).

The opening command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 during the external output processing (S1001) of the main processing (see FIG. 34). It is sent towards device 113 . Upon receiving the opening command, the audio lamp control device 113 transmits a display opening command to the display control device 114 . When the display opening command is received by the display control device 114, the third pattern display device 81 starts the opening effect.

When the process of S1102 is finished, next, the storage valve 607a of the storage device 600 is set to be opened (S1103), and this process is finished. As described above, by opening the storage valve 607a, the ball entering the storage device 600 can flow down the guide channel 607. A ball can now enter 602 (see FIG. 9(b)).

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is provided with the storage device 600, the first variable winning device 65, and the second variable winning device 650 in the path (channel) provided on the right side of the game board 13. Therefore, during the special game state, in order to win a prize ball, the ball is launched aiming at the first specific winning hole (first large opening) 65a or the second specific winning hole (second large opening) 650a. A portion of the ball enters the storage device 600 . That is, in the special game state (jackpot state), in addition to winning balls based on balls entering the first specific winning port 65a or the second specific winning port 650a, general winning provided in the storage device 600 A player can win a prize ball based on the ball entering the mouth (large value winning mouth) 602 . Therefore, the number of winning balls that can be acquired from the start of the big win to the end of the big win can be increased, so that the player can play the game with more pleasure of winning the big win. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the player's interest in the game.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, after the end of the jackpot, the variable probability state of special symbols or the time-saving state of normal symbols is provided. As described above, in these states, the ball is likely to enter the second ball entrance 640, so the player tries to enter the ball into the second ball entrance 640 by hitting to the right. (Trying to receive a lottery for special symbol 2). This often allows balls to flow into reservoir 600 before the start of the next big win. In states other than the special game state (jackpot state), the reservoir valve 607a is set to the closed state, so the balls are stored in the upper portion of the reservoir valve 607a until the next big win. Therefore, when the next big win occurs and the storage valve 607 a is opened, the stored balls flow down to the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 . That is, the player can win a large number (15) of prize balls immediately after the start of the big win. Therefore, in a situation where the player wins the jackpot but has run out of balls, the balls for the jackpot game can be secured without making a new request for lending balls.

In the process of S1101, when the special symbol jackpot is not started (S1101: No), it is determined whether the special symbol jackpot is in progress (S1104). During the special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game), and the special symbol. During the predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game. In the processing of S1104, if it is not during the special symbol jackpot (S1104: No), this processing is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, when it is determined by the process of S1104 that the special symbol jackpot is in progress (S1104: Yes), next, it is determined whether or not it is time to start a new round (S1105). Then, if it is determined that it is time to start a new round (S1105: Yes), a jackpot operation for setting the operations of the first specific winning port 65a, the second specific winning port 650a, the channel switching valve 650d, etc. Setting processing is executed (S1105), and this processing ends.

Here, the big winning operation setting process (S1105) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In the jackpot operation setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the 12th round of the jackpot is newly started (S1201). Either) (S1201: No), then the opening of the first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a is set (S1202), and the process proceeds to S1206.

On the other hand, in the process of S1201, when it is determined that it is the 12th round (S1201: Yes), the opening operation of the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a corresponding to the jackpot type is read (S1203). As a result, in the case of the big win A, the opening operation shown in FIG. 16(a) is performed, and in the case of the big win B, the opening operation shown in FIG. 16(b) is performed. Next, the opening operation of the flow path solenoid 611 is set (S1202). That is, it is set so that the guide channel 652 is closed 6.5 seconds after the start of the 12th round. Next, the opening operation of the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a read by the process of S1203 is set (S1205), and the process proceeds to S1206.

In the process of S1206, which is executed after the process of S1202 or S1205 ends, a round number command indicating the round to be newly started is set (S1206), and this process ends. The round number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output processing (S1001) of the main processing (see FIG. 34) executed by the MPU 201, the sound lamp It is transmitted toward the control device 113 . When the audio ramp controller 113 receives the round number command, it extracts the round number from the round number command. Then, a display round number command corresponding to the extracted round number is transmitted to the display control device 114 . When the display round number command is received by the display control device 114, the third pattern display device 81 starts a new round effect.

In this way, each operation of the first variable prize winning device 65 is set at each start of each round, so even if an unexpected power failure occurs during the big win game, the big win game ends in the middle. Such problems can be suppressed.

Returning to FIG. 35, the description continues. In the process of S1105, if it is determined that it is not the start timing of a new round (S1105: No), is it the operation timing of the second specific prize winning opening (second large opening opening) 650a and the flow path solenoid 611? It discriminates (S1107). When it is determined that it is the operation timing in the process of S1107 (S1107: Yes), the corresponding solenoid is set to ON (S1108).

On the other hand, in the processing of S1107, when it is determined that it is not the timing of the opening operation (S1107: No), it is determined whether it is the timing of starting the ending effect (S1108). Specifically, when the 15th round, which is the final round of the jackpot, is completed, the first specific prize winning port (first large opening) 65a is closed, and the first specific prize winning port (first large opening) 65a is closed. When the standby time (in this embodiment, 3 seconds) for discharging the ball that has flowed into the interior of the has elapsed, it is determined that it is time to start the ending effect. When it is determined by the process of S1108 that it is time to start the ending effect (S1108: Yes), the ending process is executed (S1109), and this process ends.

Details of this ending process (S1110) will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 37 is a flow chart showing the content of this ending process (S1110). In the ending process (S1110), first, an ending command indicating the start of the ending is set (S1301). The ending command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 during the external output processing (S1001) of the main processing (see FIG. 34). It is sent towards device 113 . Upon receiving the ending command, the sound lamp control device 113 selects the display mode of the ending effect based on the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223a of the RAM 223. FIG. Then, an ending command for display corresponding to the display mode of the selected ending effect is transmitted to the display control device 114 . When the display control device 114 receives the display ending command, the third symbol display device 81 starts the ending effect.

When the processing of S1301 is completed, the storage valve 607a, which was set to be open at the start of the big win, is then set to be closed (S1302). As described above, this closed state of the storage valve 607a continues until the next big win. As a result, in a state other than the special game state (jackpot state), even if the ball is made to flow into the storage device 600, it is blocked by the storage valve 607a, so that the ball enters the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602. You will not be able to let the ball flow down. In other words, since the ball enters the general winning hole (small value winning hole) 601 with a small number of winning balls, the advantage of entering the ball into the storage device 600 can be reduced. Therefore, even in a state other than the special game state (normal game state), by always aiming at the storage device 600, an irregular game method that increases the number of balls released only by paying out the general winning prize port (large value winning prize port) 602 is fundamentally adopted. In a state other than the special game state (big hit state), the lottery of the special symbols is performed so that the game can be played in anticipation of a big win.

As described above, the storage device 600 is configured so that one out of every three balls hit right-handed hits the ball. The number of prize balls paid out when the ball enters the general prize winning opening (small value winning opening) 601 is three balls. In other words, even if right-handed hitting is executed in a normal state, it is difficult to draw a lottery for a special symbol, and the number of balls cannot be increased by payout based on the balls entering the general prize winning opening (small value winning opening) 601.例文帳に追加As a result, the advantage of hitting right in the normal state is eliminated, and the player can be made to play the game with the aim of winning a big prize by lottery of special symbols.

In addition, in a state other than the special game state (jackpot state), a part of the right-handed ball enters the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601, so that the variable state of special symbols and normal symbols In the time saving state (that is, in a state where the electric accessory 640a attached to the second ball entrance 640 provided on the right side of the game board 13 is easily opened), the ball holding is further increased by hitting to the right. can be made Therefore, even though the special symbols are in a variable state and the normal symbols are in a time-saving state, and the state has shifted to an advantageous state for the player, the number of balls held is steadily decreasing, and it is in an advantageous state. It is possible to prevent (suppress) the player from not being able to realize it. Therefore, it is possible to continue the game without reducing the number of balls held in the variable probability state of the special symbols and the time saving state of the normal symbols.

It should be noted that the number of prize balls for entering the general winning prize opening (small value winning prize opening) 601 may be reduced (for example, the number of prize balls may be reduced to one). As a result, it is possible to more reliably suppress the excessive increase in payouts and the increase in possession balls in the variable probability state of the special symbols and the time saving state of the normal symbols. Therefore, it is possible to prevent unexpected disadvantages from being given to the hole. In addition, in the low probability state of the special symbol and the normal state of the normal symbol (that is, the state in which it is difficult for the ball to enter the second ball entrance 640), the advantage of hitting to the right can be further reduced.

When the processing of S1302 is completed, it is then determined whether or not the variable probability setting flag 203h is on (S1303). Since it means that the ball has entered, the variable probability flag 203g is set to ON (S1304). As a result, after the end of the jackpot, the game shifts to the special symbol probability variation state. After the processing of S1304, the probability variation setting flag 203h is set to OFF (S1305), a state command including information indicating that the probability variation state of the special symbol is set is set (S1306), and this processing is terminated. .

On the other hand, in the process of S1303, if it is determined that the variable probability setting flag 203h is off (S1303: No), it means that the ball did not enter the variable probability entrance 654 in the 12 rounds of the jackpot. , in order to set the time period of 100 normal symbols after the end of the jackpot, 100 is set to the value of the time reduction medium counter 203r (S1307). Then, a state command including information indicating that the time saving state has been set is set (S1308), and this process is terminated. The status command set in the processing of S1306 or S1308 is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is executed during the external output processing (S1001) of the main processing (see FIG. 34) executed by the MPU 201. , and transmitted to the audio lamp controller 113 . By receiving the state command by the sound lamp control device 113, the game state recognized by the main control device 110 and the game state recognized by the sound lamp control device 113 can be matched. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately execute an effect according to the game state.

Thus, in this embodiment, at the end of the jackpot game, it is determined whether or not the variable probability setting flag 203h is ON, and if it is ON, the variable probability flag 203g is set to ON. That is, regardless of the timing at which the ball enters the variable probability entrance 654, the timing at which the variable probability flag 203g is turned on can be matched. Therefore, it is possible to make the player expect to shift to the variable probability game state until the jackpot game ends. Furthermore, if the ball can be entered into the probability variable entrance 654 during the special game state (during the jackpot state), the probability variable state of the special symbol is given after the jackpot is completed. It is possible to draw attention to whether the ball enters the probability variable entrance 654 during the state).

Returning to FIG. 35, the description continues. In the processing of S1109, if it is determined that it is not the start timing of the ending effect (S1109: No), then the ball enters (wins) the first specific winning opening 65a and the second specific winning opening 650a, or Winning processing for monitoring the entry (winning) of the ball into the ball entrance 654 is executed (S1111). Here, with reference to FIG. 38, the winning process (S1112) will be described in detail. FIG. 38 is a flow chart showing the contents of this winning process (S1111).

In the winning process (S1111), first, it is determined whether or not it is the period (round valid period) in which the round game is set (S1401). That is, it is determined whether or not it is a period from when the opening of the first specific winning opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 650a is set until the interval period (3 seconds) ends. If it is determined that it is outside the round valid period (S1401: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the round is valid (S1401: Yes), it is determined whether the ball has entered either the first specific winning opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 650a ( S1402). In the processing of S1402, when it is determined that the ball has entered the specific winning opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 650a (S1402: Yes), the winning number counter 203j is updated by adding 1 (S1403). , the process proceeds to S1404. On the other hand, if it is determined that the ball has not entered either the first specific winning hole 65a or the second specific winning hole 650a (S1402: No), the process of S1403 is skipped and the process proceeds to S1404. and migrate.

In the processing of S1404, it is determined whether or not the value of the winning number counter 203j is 10 or more (S1404). When it is determined that the value of the winning number counter 203j is 10 or more (S1404: Yes), the opening of the first specific winning opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 650a is closed. is set (S1406). After that, the remaining ball timer flag 203m is set to ON (S1407), and the process proceeds to S1408. By setting the remaining ball timer flag 203m to ON, it is determined that it is during the ball-draining time for discharging the balls remaining inside the first variable winning device 65 or the second variable winning device 650. can.

On the other hand, in the process of S1404, if it is determined that the value of the winning number counter 203j is less than 10 (S1404: No), the round time (30 seconds) has elapsed (S1405). In the process of S1405, when it is determined that the round time has elapsed (S1405: Yes), the process proceeds to S1406. On the other hand, in the process of S1405, when it is determined that the round time has not elapsed (S1405: No), the process proceeds to S1408.

In the processing of S1408, it is determined whether or not the value of the operation counter 203k is greater than 0 (S1408). If it is determined that the value of the operation counter 203k is greater than 0 (S1408: Yes) The value of the operation counter 203k is updated by decrementing it by 1 (S1409), and then it is determined whether or not the ball has entered the variable probability entrance 654 (whether or not it has passed through a variable probability switch not shown) (S1410). ). If it is determined that the ball has passed through the variable probability switch (S1410: Yes), the value of the variable probability passage counter 203i is updated by adding 1 (S1411), and the variable probability setting flag 203h is set to ON (S1412), The process proceeds to S1413. On the other hand, in the process of S1410, if it is determined that the ball has not passed through the variable probability switch (S1410: No), the processes of S1411 and S1412 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S1413.

In the process of S1413 executed after the process of S1410 or S1412, it is determined whether or not the operation counter 203k is 0 (S1413). On the other hand, in the process of S1413, if it is determined that the operation counter 203k is 0 (S1413: Yes), the guidance channel 652 is closed by turning off the channel solenoid 611 (S1414), The flag 203o is set to ON (S1415), and this processing ends. By setting the variable probability effective flag 203o to ON by the processing of S1415, even after the flow path switching valve 650d is switched and the induction flow path 652 is closed, the ball remaining in the induction flow path 652 is turned on by the variable probability switch. , the probability variation setting flag 203h is set to ON (that is, the probability variation state of the special symbol is given after the big hit).

In the process of S1408, when it is determined that the operation counter 203k is 0 (S1408: No), it is determined whether the variable probability effective flag 203o is ON (S1416). Then, when it is determined that the variable probability effective flag 203o is not ON (that is, OFF) (S1416: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the variable probability effective flag 203o is ON (S1416: Yes), the value of the variable probability effective timer 203p is updated by adding 1 (S1417). Then, the value of the probability variable valid timer 203p determines whether the upper limit (in this embodiment, 1.2 s) or not (S1418), if it is determined to be the upper limit (S1418: Yes), probability variable valid The flag 203o is set to off (S1419). Thereby, even if passage of the variable probability switch is detected, the value of the variable probability setting flag 203h is controlled not to be updated. As described above, if the variable probability switch is detected after the value of the variable probability valid timer 203p reaches the upper limit, there is a high possibility that the detection is due to some fraudulent act. Therefore, by turning off the variable probability valid flag 203o, updating of the variable probability setting flag 203h is prohibited, thereby suppressing fraud.

When the process of S1419 is completed, the value of the variable probability effective timer 203p is then reset to 0, which is the initial value (S1420), and this process is completed. On the other hand, in the process of S1418, when it is determined that the value of the variable probability effective timer 203p is not the upper limit (less than the upper limit) (S1418: No), the process proceeds to S1410 described above.

Thereby, if the variable probability effective timer 203p is not the upper limit value, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the variable probability switch, so that the variable probability state of the special symbol can be set in consideration of the time of throwing the ball. In addition, since there is an upper limit to the time during which it is determined that the passage of the variable probability switch is valid, it is possible to prevent the ball from being illegally passed through the variable probability switch and the variable probability state of the special symbol is given.

Returning to FIG. 35, the description continues. After the winning process (S1111) is executed, an abnormality process for detecting an abnormality occurring during the special game state (jackpot state) is executed (S1112), and the process is terminated. Here, the details of this abnormality processing (S1112) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 39 is a flow chart showing this abnormality processing (S1112).

In the abnormality processing (S1112), first, it is determined whether or not the round is valid (S1501), and if it is determined that the round is not valid (S1501: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the round is valid (S1501: Yes), whether or not the ball has passed through the ball outlet switches provided in the first variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 650 Discriminate (S1502). If it is determined that the ball has passed through the ball outlet switch (S1502: Yes), the value of the ball discharge number counter 203s is updated by adding 1 (S1503), and the process proceeds to S1504. On the other hand, if it is determined that the ball has not passed through the ball outlet switch (S1502: No), the process of S1503 is skipped and the process proceeds to S1504.

In the process of S1504, it is determined whether or not the remaining ball timer flag 203m is ON (S1504), and if it is determined that the value of the remaining ball timer flag 203m is OFF (S1504: No), this process is executed. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the remaining ball timer flag 203m is ON (S1504: Yes), it means that the ball is being swept away, so 1 is added to the remaining ball timer 203n that counts the ball swabbing period. and update (S1505). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the remaining ball timer 203n after updating is the upper limit value (that is, whether 3 seconds have passed since the closing of the first specific winning port 65a or the second specific winning port 650a was set). (S1506), and if it is determined that the upper limit value has not been reached (three seconds have not passed) (S1506: No), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S1505, when it is determined that the value of the remaining ball timer 203n is the upper limit value (S1506: Yes), the number of discharged balls (total value of the probability variable passing counter 203i and the discharged number counter 203q) and , and the winning number (the value of the winning number counter 203j) match (S1507).

In the process of S1507, when it is determined that the number of discharged balls and the number of winning prizes match (S1507: Yes), the process proceeds to S1509. On the other hand, if it is determined that the number of ejected balls does not match the number of winning prizes (S1507: No), an error command is set (S1508), and the process proceeds to S1509. The error command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 during the external output processing (S1001) of the main processing (see FIG. 34). It is sent towards device 113 . When the error command is received by the audio lamp control device 113, an error display (for example, a character indicating a winning number mismatch error is displayed) is set, and an error signal is set to be output to the hall computer. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the illegality of leaving the game ball illegally in the first variable prize winning device 65 and passing the ball through the variable probability switch.

In the process of S1509, the remaining ball timer flag 203m is set to OFF (S1509), and the remaining ball timer 203n is reset to 0, which is the initial value (S1510). After that, the prize number counter 203j, the discharge number counter 203q, and the variable probability passage counter 203i are reset to their initial values (S1511), and the process ends.

Next, the winning information command setting process (S1008) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. The prize winning information command setting process (S1008) is, as described above, a process for notifying the sound lamp control device 113 of the passage of the ball into various prize winning openings (entering ball openings).

In the winning information command setting process, first, the winning detection information stored in the switch reading process (S101) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 25) is read out (S1601). Then, it is determined whether or not there is new winning detection information (whether or not a new ball has entered into any of the entrances) (S1602), and if there is no new winning detection information (S1603), End this process.

On the other hand, in the process of S1602, if it is determined that new winning detection information exists (S1602: Yes), the entrance (winning opening) that detected the winning ball (winning) according to the new winning detection information (S1603). The winning information command is composed of, for example, 2 bytes, and each bit of the 2 bytes is associated with each winning port, out port, and the like. Then, the bit corresponding to the winning hole (entering ball hole) in which the ball has entered (winning a prize) is set to 1, and the bit corresponding to the winning hole (entering ball hole) to which the ball has not entered is set to 0. After being set, it is output as a winning information command. When the processing of S1603 is completed, the stored winning detection information is cleared (S1604), and this processing is completed.

The prize winning information command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output processing (S1001) of the main processing (see FIG. 34) executed by the MPU 201, a sound lamp It is transmitted toward the control device 113 . Upon receiving the prize winning information command, the sound lamp control device 113 determines whether there is a problem in the knowledge storage device 600 and whether the player is playing an irregular game, according to the winning information command. Then, when a problem or the like occurs, a display error command corresponding to the type of problem is transmitted to the display control device 114 . When the display error command is received by the display control device 114, the third pattern display device 81 notifies the error.

<Regarding control processing of the audio ramp control device in the first embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 41 to 47. FIG. The processing of the MPU 221 can be broadly classified into startup processing that is started upon power-on and main processing that is executed after the startup processing.

First, referring to FIG. 41, start-up processing executed by MPU 221 in sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 41 is a flow chart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started when the power is turned on.

When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process is executed upon power-on (S1701). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. After that, depending on whether or not the power-off processing flag is turned on, the power-off processing in S1816 (see FIG. 42) is caused by a momentary voltage drop (instantaneous power failure, so-called "instantaneous power failure"). ) is started during execution (S1702). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 42, when the audio lamp control device 113 receives a power-off command from the main controller 110 (see S1813 in FIG. 42), it executes power-off processing in S1816. Before the power-off processing is executed, the power-off processing flag is turned on, and after the power-off processing is completed, the power-off processing flag is turned off. Therefore, whether or not the power-off processing of S1816 is being executed can be determined by the state of the power-off processing in-progress flag.

If the power-off processing flag is off (S1702: No), the startup process this time was started after the power was completely shut off, or after a momentary power failure occurred and the power was shut off in S1816. Either it was started after the execution of the process was completed, or it was started when only the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise (without receiving a power off command from the main controller 110). be. Therefore, in these cases, it is checked whether the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1703).

Destruction of data in the RAM 223 is confirmed as follows. That is, data as a keyword of "55AAh" is written in a specific area of the RAM 223 by the process of S1706. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is "55AAh", there is no data destruction in the RAM 223. Conversely, if it is not "55AAh", it can be confirmed that the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed. If data destruction of RAM223 is confirmed (S1703: Yes), it will transfer to S1704 and will start initialization of RAM223. On the other hand, if destruction of data in the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S1703: No), the process proceeds to S1708.

It should be noted that if the startup process this time is started after the power is completely cut off, the keyword "55AAh" is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory of the RAM 223 is lost due to the power cut). ), it is determined that the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1703: Yes), and the process proceeds to S1704. On the other hand, whether the current start-up processing was started after a momentary power failure occurred and after the execution of the power-off processing in S1516 was completed, or only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise or the like. If the processing is started with the above, the keyword "55AAh" is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, so the data in the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S1703: No), and the process proceeds to S1708.

If the power-off processing flag is on (S1702: Yes), the startup process this time is after a momentary power failure occurs, and during execution of the power-off process in S1816, the sound lamp control device 113 It is started by resetting the MPU 221 of . In such a case, the memory state of the RAM 223 is not necessarily correct because the power-off process is in progress. Therefore, since control cannot be continued in such a case, the process proceeds to S1704 and initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

In the processing of S1704, the storage area of the entire range of RAM 223 is checked (S1704). As a checking method, first, "0FFh" is written for each byte, read for each byte to check whether it is "0FFh", and if it is "0FFh", it is determined as normal. Such writing and confirmation for each byte is performed in the order of "0FFh", "55h", "0AAh", and "00h". All storage areas of the RAM 223 are cleared to 0 by this read/write check of the RAM 223 .

If the read/write check is normal for all storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1705: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 to set RAM destruction check data (S1706). By confirming the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not the RAM 223 has data destruction. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read/write check is detected in any storage area of the RAM 223 (S1705: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S1707), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is cut off. Abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34 . In addition, it is possible to output a sound by the sound output device 226 to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or to transmit an error command to the display control device 114 and display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. can be

In the processing of S1708, it is determined whether or not the power-off flag is turned on (S1708). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process of S1816 is executed (see S1815 in FIG. 42). That is, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off processing of S1816 is executed, the process of S1708 is reached with the power-off flag turned on because the startup processing this time is instantaneous. This is the case where the process is started after the power failure has occurred and the execution of the power-off process in S1816 has been completed. Therefore, in such a case (S1708: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared to initialize each process of the sound lamp control device 113 (S1709), and after setting the initial value of the RAM 223 (S1710), an interrupt Permission is set (S1711), and the process proceeds to the main process. The work area of the RAM 223 refers to an area other than the area for storing commands and the like received from the main controller 110 .

On the other hand, the process of S1708 is reached with the power-off flag turned off because the current start-up process was started after, for example, the power supply was completely shut off. This is the case where the processing has been reached, or only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 has been reset due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). Therefore, in such a case (S1708: No), S1709, which is processing for clearing the work area of the RAM 223, is skipped, and the process proceeds to S1710 to set the initial value of the RAM 223 (S1710). Next, the variable probability state flag 223f and the variable probability state counter 223g are updated according to the gaming state notified by the state command received from the main control device 110 (S1711), the interrupt permission is set (S1712), and the process proceeds to the main process. Transition. By updating the variable probability state flag 223f and the variable probability state counter 223g based on the state command, the game state recognized by the main controller 110 and the game state recognized by the sound lamp control device 113 can be matched. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately execute an effect according to the game state.

The reason why the clearing process of S1709 is skipped is that when the process of S1708 is reached from S1704 via the process of S1706, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process of S1704, When only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and start-up processing is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared, so that the audio lamp control device 113 This is because the control of can be continued.

Next, with reference to FIG. 42, main processing executed by the MPU 221 in the audio ramp control device 113 after startup processing of the audio ramp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 42 is a flow chart showing this main process. When the main process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not 1 ms or more has passed since the main process was started or after the current process of S1801 was executed (S1801). If not (S1801: No), the process proceeds to S1811 without performing the processes of S1802 to S1810. In the process of S1801, it is determined whether or not 1 msec has passed because S1802 to S1810 are mainly processes related to display (effect), and there is no need to edit in a short cycle (within 1 msec). , S1811, and the variable display setting process of S1812 are preferably executed in a short cycle. By executing the processing of S1811 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent the command transmitted from the main controller 110 from being missed, and by executing the processing of S1812 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination processing Based on this, it is possible to make settings related to variable production without delay.

If 1 millisecond or more has elapsed in the processing of S1801 (S1801: Yes), first, various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processing of S1803 to S1812 are transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1802 ). Next, the output of each lamp is set so as to set the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S1808 described later (S1803), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S1804). In the power-on notification process, when the power is turned on, it is notified that the power has been turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). will be Also, a command may be sent to the display control device 114 to notify that power is supplied on the screen of the third pattern display device 81 . If the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to S1805 without notifying by the power-on notification process.

In the process of S1805, the customer waiting effect process is executed, and then the pending number display update process is executed (S1806). In the customer waiting effect process, when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by a player for a predetermined period of time, a setting such as switching the display of the third symbol display device 81 to a title screen is performed, and the setting is used as a command for display control. It is sent to device 114 . In the reserved number display update process, a process of lighting a reserved lamp (not shown) according to the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b is performed.

After that, frame button input monitoring/effect processing is executed (S1807). This frame button input monitoring/performance processing monitors input as to whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player has been pressed in order to enhance the performance effect, and corresponds to the case where the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. This is the process of setting to perform production. In this process, when the operation of the frame button 22 by the player is detected, a display command corresponding to the operation of the frame button 22 is set in the display control device 114 .

When the frame button input monitoring/effect processing is completed, the lamp editing processing is executed (S1808), and then the sound editing/output processing is executed (S1809). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination parts 29 to 33 are set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third pattern display device 81 . In the sound editing/output process, the output pattern of the voice output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third pattern display device 81, and the sound is output from the voice output device 226 according to the setting.

After the processing of S1809, liquid crystal effect execution management processing is executed (S1810). In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, based on the variation pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110, the time required for the variation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 and the time synchronized therewith are set. The lamp editing process of S1808 is executed based on the time set in this liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. It should be noted that the sound editing/output processing of S1809 is also executed at a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third pattern display device 81. FIG.

After the liquid crystal effect execution management process, a command determination process for performing a process according to the command received from the main controller 110 is performed (S1811). The details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, the process proceeds to S1812. In the process of S1812, a variable display setting process is executed (S1812). In the variable display setting process, a variable pattern command for display is generated and set based on the variable pattern command received from the main controller 110 in order to execute the variable effect in the third symbol display device 81 . As a result, the command is sent to display controller 114 . The details of this variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Then, when the variable display setting process is completed, it is determined whether or not the work RAM 233 stores power failure occurrence information (S1813). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from main controller 110 . If power-off occurrence information is stored in the processing of S1813 (S1813: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off processing flag are turned on (S1815), and the power-off processing is executed (S1816). After the power-off processing is executed, the power-off processing in progress flag is turned off (S1817), and then the processing is looped infinitely. In the power-off processing, interrupt processing is prohibited, each output port is turned off, and outputs from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are turned off. Also, the memory of information on occurrence of power failure is erased.

On the other hand, if no power-off occurrence information is stored in the process of S1813 (S1813: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S1814), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S1814: No), the process returns to S1801, and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1814: Yes), the process is looped infinitely to stop execution of subsequent processes. Here, since the main processing is not executed when it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change after that. Therefore, since the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, the player can call the hall clerk or the like and ask them to repair the pachinko machine 10 or the like. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the RAM destruction may be notified by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 .

Next, the command determination process (S1811) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 43 is a flow chart showing this command determination process (S1811). This command determination process (S1811) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 42) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp controller 113, and as described above, determines the command received from the main controller 110. This process is for

In the command determination process, first, among the unprocessed commands, the first command received from the main controller 110 is read from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and a variation pattern command is received from the main controller 110. It is determined whether or not (S1901). When the variation pattern command is received (S1901: Yes), the variation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is turned on (S1902), and the variation pattern type is extracted from the received variation pattern command (S1903), Return to main processing. The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and referred to when the variation display setting process (see FIG. 47) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the start of the variation effect and the variation pattern type.

On the other hand, if no variation pattern command has been received (S1901: No), then it is determined whether or not a stop type command has been received from main controller 110 (S1904). When the stop type command is received (S1904: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e of the RAM 223 is set to ON (S1905), and the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command (S1906). Return to processing. The stop type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and referred to when the variable display setting process (see FIG. 47) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type of the variable effect.

On the other hand, if the stop type command has not been received (S1904: No), then it is determined whether or not the pending ball number command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1907). Then, when the pending ball number command is received (S1907: Yes), it is determined whether the received pending ball number command is a special figure 1 pending ball number command or a special figure 2 pending ball number command. , the value contained in the command, that is, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d of the main controller 110 (the number of times N1 of holding the variable display in the special symbol), or the special symbol 2 reserved ball of the main controller 110 The value of the number counter 203e (the number N2 of suspension of variable display in the special symbol) is extracted and stored in the special symbol 2 suspension ball number counter 223c of the sound lamp control device 113 (S1908). In addition, in the process of S1908, a display reserved ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the updated values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c is set. After the process of S1908 ends, the process returns to the main process.

Here, the reserved ball number command is sent from the main controller 110 when the ball wins the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 (start winning), or when a lottery for special symbols is performed. Since it is transmitted, every time the starting winning prize is detected, or every time a special symbol lottery is performed, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b of the sound lamp control device 113 and the special symbol 2 reserved ball are counted by the processing of S1908. The value of the number counter 223c can be matched with the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the main controller 110. Therefore, due to the influence of noise or the like, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 is changed to the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d or the special symbol Even if it deviates from the value of the 2 reserved ball number counter 203e, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 when the start winning is detected or the special symbol lottery is selected. can be modified to match the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the main controller 110. In addition, when the process of S1908 is executed, a display reserved ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the updated values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c is issued. set. As a result, in the display control device 114 , the reserved ball number pattern corresponding to the reserved ball number is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .

On the other hand, in the process of S1907, if it is determined that the pending ball count command has not been received (S1907: No), then it is determined whether or not the status command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1909). Then, when the state command is received (S1909: Yes), according to the gaming state notified by the state command, update the variable probability state flag 203f and the time saving state counter 203g (S1910), and end this process .

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1909 that the status command has not been received (S1909: No), then it is determined whether or not the winning information command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1911). Then, when the winning information command is received (S1911: Yes), it is determined whether or not the ball was entered normally based on the winning information command, and an error is reported if there is a possibility of malfunction or fraud. error notification processing is executed (S1912), and this processing ends.

on the other hand. In the processing of S1911, if it is determined that the winning information command has not been received (S1911: No), then it is determined whether or not the opening command has been received (S1913), and if the opening command has been received ( S1913: Yes), while setting the big hit flag 223h to ON, the counter value (1000) corresponding to 1 second is set to the value of the allowable time counter 223i (S1914). Then, an opening command for display is set (S1915), and this processing ends. The display opening command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed during the command output processing (S1802) of the main processing (see FIG. 42) executed by the MPU 221. It is sent to the controller 114 . When the display opening command is received, the display control device 114 causes the third symbol display device 81 to display an opening effect for announcing the start of the big win.

If it is determined in the process of S1913 that the opening command has not been received (S1913: No), then it is determined whether or not the ending command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1916). Then, when it is determined that the ending command has been received by the processing of S1916 (S1916: Yes), the flag 223h during the jackpot is set to OFF, and the counter value (1000) corresponding to 1 second to the value of the allowable time counter 223i is set (S1917), an ending command for display is set (S1918), and this processing ends. The display ending command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed during the command output processing (S1802) of the main processing (see FIG. 42) executed by the MPU 221. It is sent towards the controller 114 . When receiving the display ending command, the display control device 114 causes the third symbol display device 81 to display an ending effect for notifying the end of the big win.

On the other hand, in the process of S1916, if the ending command has not been received (S1911: No), it is determined whether or not another command has been received, and the process corresponding to the received command is executed (S1919). ) and return to the main process. For example, if the other command is a command used in the sound lamp control device 113, the processing corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is used in the display control device 114, the command is displayed and controlled. A command is set to be sent to the device 114 .

Next, details of the error notification process (S1912) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 44 to 46. FIG. This error notification process is, as described above, a process for notifying an error when there is a possibility of malfunction or fraud. FIG. 46 is a flow chart showing this error notification process (S1912).

In the error notification process (S1912), first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot flag 223h is ON (S1931). contains winning information for the first ball entrance 64 (S1932). Then, if it is determined that the winning information for the first ball entrance 64 is included (S1932: Yes), the player hits left even though the jackpot is being won, and the first ball entrance 64 It means that the ball entered the ball against In other words, the player performs a game method (hitting method) that makes it difficult for the ball to enter the first specific prize winning port 65a and the second specific prize winning port 650a despite the special game state (jackpot state). means that the person is at a loss. Therefore, in order for the player to win the prize ball in the special game state (jackpot state), an error command for display corresponding to the left-handed warning image (see FIG. 7(a)) is set (S1933) and processed. to S1934.

The display error command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed during the command output processing (S1802) of the main processing (see FIG. 42) executed by the MPU 221. It is sent towards the controller 114 . In the display control device 114, a left-handed warning image (FIG. 7(a)) is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by receiving this back image change command for display. With this left-handed warning image (FIG. 7(a)), it is possible to prompt the player who is playing left-handed in the special game state (jackpot state) to play right-handed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player from losing money, and to ensure that the player wins the prize ball.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1932, if it is determined that the winning information command does not include the winning information corresponding to the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 (S1932: No), the processing of S1933 is skipped and the processing is performed. to S1934.

In the processing of S1934, it is determined whether or not the value of the allowable time counter 223i is 0 (S1934). A hit time notification process is executed for notifying when there is (S1935), and this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the allowable time counter 223i is not 0 (that is, is 1 or more) (S1934: No), the ball sweeping period (1 second) after the storage valve 607a is set to the open state is Since it means that the time has not elapsed, the process of S1935 is skipped and the present process ends. That is, if a ball that has flowed into (progressed into) the guide channel 606 just before the storage valve 607a is opened enters the general prize winning opening (small value winning opening) 601 during the ball sweeping period, a problem will occur. to prevent it from being judged.

On the other hand, in the process of S1931, if it is determined that the jackpot medium flag 223h is not ON (is OFF) (S1931: No), it is determined whether the value of the allowable time counter 233i is 0 (S1936), When it is determined that it is 0 (S1936: Yes), it is notified when a malfunction occurs in the storage valve 607a at normal time (either the probability variable state of the special symbol, the time saving state of the normal symbol, or the normal state) is executed (S1937), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the permissible time counter 223i is not 0 (that is, is 1 or more) (S1936: No), the ball is ejected after the storage valve 607a is set to the closed state based on the end of the jackpot. Since it means that the period (1 second) has not passed, the process of S1937 is skipped and the present process ends. That is, when the ball that has flowed into (progressed into) the guide channel 607 immediately before the storage valve 607a is closed enters the general prize winning opening (large value winning opening) 602 during the ball sweeping period, a problem occurs. to prevent it from being judged.

Next, with reference to FIG. 45, the details of the winning notification process (S1935) for notifying when a problem occurs in the storage valve 607a during the big winning will be described. FIG. 45 is a flow chart showing this winning notification process (S1935).

In the winning time notification process (S1935), first, the winning information command determined to have been received in the process of S1911 of the command determination process (see FIG. 43) is entered into the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601. It is determined whether or not corresponding winning information is included (S1941). Then, if the winning information corresponding to the ball entering the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601 is included (S1941: Yes), the storage valve 607a should be set to the open state during the jackpot. Regardless, it means that the ball has entered the general prize winning port (small value prize winning port) 601 provided downstream of the guiding channel 606 . In other words, it is possible that the storage valve 607a is not opened due to failure of the storage valve 607a or the like, and as a result of the state in which the ball is stored in the upper portion of the storage valve 607a, the ball is guided to the guide flow path 606. have a nature. Therefore, in this case, an error command for display corresponding to the malfunction of the storage valve 607a is set (S1942), and this process is terminated.

The display error command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed during the command output processing (S1802) of the main processing (see FIG. 42) executed by the MPU 221. It is sent towards the controller 114 . In the display control device 114, by receiving this display error command, a warning image (see FIG. 7B) for notifying that the storage valve 607a is malfunctioning in the third pattern display device 81 is displayed. Is displayed.

It should be noted that there is a possibility that the ball that has flowed into the guide channel 606 may also enter the out port 603a provided on the left side of the general prize winning port 601 in the storage device 600, but the ball entering the out port 603a Regarding the corresponding prize winning information, it is not determined whether or not the reservoir valve 607a is malfunctioning. This is because, of the balls that have flowed into the guiding channel 606, only a small proportion of the balls flow down to the out port 603a, and most of the balls enter the general prize winning port (small value prize winning port) 601, and also hit the jackpot. This is because a large amount of balls flow into the storage device 600 inside, so if the general prize winning opening (small value winning opening) 601 is monitored, it is possible to sufficiently determine whether or not a problem has occurred. Further, by determining only the winning information corresponding to the ball entering the general winning hole (small value winning hole) 601, it is not necessary to perform the process of determining whether or not the ball has entered the out hole 603a. , the processing load of the audio ramp controller 113 can be reduced.

In the processing of S1941, if it is determined that the winning information corresponding to the ball entering the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601 is not included (S1941: No), then the received winning information command includes the general It is determined whether or not the winning information corresponding to the ball entering the winning hole (large value winning hole) 602 is included (S1943), and the winning corresponding to the ball entering the general winning hole (large value winning hole) 602 is determined. If the information is included (S1943: Yes), the value of the number-of-winning-awards counter 223j is updated by adding 1 (S1944). Then, in order to update the image during the big win in accordance with the updated value of the number-of-winning-awards counter 233j, a back image change command for display is set (S1945).

The display back image change command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and is executed in the command output processing (S1802) of the main processing (see FIG. 42) executed by the MPU 221. , is transmitted to the display controller 114 . In the display control device 114, the display content of the number-of-wins display area MA in the third symbol display device 81 is updated by receiving this back image change command for display. More specifically, after an image in which the number of times a ball has entered the general prize hole (large value prize hole) 602 (the number of EXTRA BONUS) shown in FIG. The image shown in FIG. 6(a) corresponding to the subsequent number of times of ball entry is displayed. By displaying the number of times a ball enters the general winning hole (high-value winning hole) 602 in the big win in the winning times display area MA, the number of times a ball enters the first specific winning hole 65a or the second specific winning hole 650a in the big win. Separately, the player can be made aware of the number of winning balls. Therefore, the game can be played with the expectation that the number of times a ball enters the general winning hole (large value winning hole) 602 will increase. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the player's interest in the game.

In this embodiment, it is configured to determine that there is a problem in the storage valve 604a when ball entry information corresponding to a ball entering the general prize winning opening (small value winning opening) 601 is included. However, even if the winning information command includes winning information corresponding to the ball entering the out port 603a, the display error command may be set. As a result, it is possible to more quickly and reliably determine that a failure has occurred in the storage valve 607a.

Next, with reference to FIG. 46, normally (probability variable state of special symbols, time-saving state of normal symbols, and normal state either) in order to notify when trouble occurs in the reservoir valve 607a The normal notification processing will be described. In this normal time notification process (S1937), first, it is determined whether the probability variation state flag 223f is on (S1951), and if it is determined that it is not on (S1951), the current is not the probability variation state of the special symbol ( It means that it is a special symbol low probability state), and then it is determined whether or not the value of the time saving state counter 223g is greater than 0 (S1952). In the process of S1952, if it is determined that the value of the time saving state counter 223g is 0 (S1952: No), the current state is neither the probability changing state of the special design nor the time saving state of the normal design (normal state). means.

In this case, in order to determine whether or not the player is hitting to the right and whether or not there is a malfunction in the operation of the reservoir valve 607a, first, the received winning information command includes a general winning opening (large value opening). It is determined whether or not the winning information corresponding to the ball entering the winning hole 602 is included (S1953). Then, when it is determined that the winning information corresponding to the ball entering the general winning hole (high value winning hole) 602 is included (S1953: Yes), the ball is flowing downstream from the position where it should be closed by the reservoir valve 607a. That is, there is a high possibility that the storage valve 607a is not normally closed, or that the player has entered the ball into the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602 by an illegal method. Therefore, an error command for display corresponding to the failure of the storage valve 607a is set (S1954), and this process is terminated.

The display error command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed during the command output processing (S1802) of the main processing (see FIG. 42) executed by the MPU 221. It is sent towards the controller 114 . In the display control device 114, by receiving this display error command, a warning image (see FIG. 7B) for notifying that the storage valve 607a is malfunctioning in the third pattern display device 81 is displayed. Is displayed.

It should be noted that while the storage valve 607a is left open due to a malfunction, the ball that has flowed into the guide channel 607 is discharged from the out-ports 603b disposed on the left and right of the general prize-winning port (high-value prize-winning port) 602. , 603c, but the prize winning information corresponding to the balls entering the out ports 603b, 603c is not used as an object for determining whether or not there is a problem with the reservoir valve 607a. This is because, of the balls that flowed into the guiding channel 607, only a small proportion of the balls flow down to the out-ports 603b and 603c, and most of the balls enter the general prize-winning port (high-value prize-winning port) 602. , and the general prize winning opening (large value winning opening) 602 can sufficiently determine whether or not a problem has occurred. In addition, by determining only the winning information corresponding to the ball entering the general winning hole (large value winning hole) 602, there is no need to perform the process of determining whether or not the ball has entered the out holes 603b and 603c. Therefore, the processing load of the audio ramp controller 113 can be reduced.

Also, in the process of S1953, if it is determined that the winning information corresponding to the ball entering the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 is not included in the winning information command (S1953: No), then the general winning It is determined whether or not winning information corresponding to the ball entering the opening (small value winning opening) 601 is included in the winning information command (S1955). .

On the other hand, if it is determined that the winning information command contains the winning information corresponding to the entry of the ball into the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601 (S1955: Yes), the normal time (variable state of special symbols, It means that the player is hitting to the right regardless of whether the time saving state of the normal symbol or the normal state). In other words, it means that the player is playing the game with a game method that makes it difficult for the ball to enter the second ball entrance 640 and that there are few chances of receiving a special symbol lottery. Therefore, in this case, by displaying a right-handed warning image (see FIG. 5(b)) for prompting the player to play the game aiming at the first ball entrance 64 by left-handed hitting, the game is played. It is possible to prevent the person from losing a loss and to receive the lottery of the special pattern 1. - 特許庁

In the process of S1951, if it is determined that the variable probability state flag 223f is ON (S1951: Yes), or if it is determined that the value of the time saving state counter 223g is greater than 0 in the process of S1952 (S1952: Yes), It is determined whether or not the winning information command includes winning information corresponding to a ball entering the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602 (S1957). When it is determined that the winning information corresponding to the ball entering the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 is not included (S1957: No), this processing is terminated.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1957, if it is determined that the winning information corresponding to the ball entering the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602 is included (S1957: Yes), it is not the special game state (jackpot state). Nevertheless, it means that the ball is flowing down the downstream side of the reservoir valve 607a. That is, there is a possibility that the storage valve 607a is not normally closed, or that the player has illegally entered the ball into the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 while the retaining valve 607a is closed. expensive. Therefore, in this case, an error command for display corresponding to the failure of the storage valve 607a is set (S1958), and this process is terminated.

The display error command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed during the command output processing (S1802) of the main processing (see FIG. 42) executed by the MPU 221. It is sent to the controller 114 . In the display control device 114, by receiving this display error command, a warning image (see FIG. 7B) for notifying that the storage valve 607a is malfunctioning in the third pattern display device 81 is displayed. Is displayed.

In this embodiment, it is configured to determine that there is a problem with the reservoir valve 604a when ball entry information corresponding to a ball entering the general prize winning opening (large value winning prize opening) 602 is included. However, even if the winning information command includes the winning information corresponding to the ball entering the outlets 603b and 603c, the display error command may be set. As a result, it is possible to more quickly and reliably determine that a problem has occurred in the storage valve 607a.

Next, the variable display setting process (S1812) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 47 is a flow chart showing this variable display setting process (S1812). This variable display setting process (S1812) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 42) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and in order to execute the variable effect in the third symbol display device 81, Based on the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110, a variation pattern command for display is generated and set.

In the variable display setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the variable start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is ON (S2001). If it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223d is not ON (that is, it is OFF) (S2001: No), it means that the fluctuation pattern command has not been received from the main controller 110, so the process proceeds to S2006. Transition. On the other hand, if it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223d is on (S2001: Yes), the fluctuation start flag 223d is turned off (S2002). The variation pattern type in the variation performance extracted from the command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S2003).

Then, based on the obtained variation pattern type, a display variation pattern command for notification to the display control device 114 is generated, and the command is set for transmission to the display control device 114 (S2004). In the display control device 114, by receiving this display variation pattern command, the variation pattern indicated by this display variation pattern command is used to perform the variation display of the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81. Display control of the variable effect is started.

Next, the data stored in the winning information storage area 223a is shifted (S2005). In the process of S2005, the data stored in the first to fourth areas of the prize winning information storage area 223a are sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in the order of 1st area→execution area, 2nd area→1st area, 3rd area→2nd area, 4th area→3rd area. After shifting the data, the process proceeds to S2006.

In the processing of S2006, it is determined whether or not the stop type selection flag 223e provided in the RAM 233 is ON (S2006). If it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223e is not ON (that is, it is OFF) (S2006: No), it means that no stop type command has been received from the main controller 110. Therefore, S2007 to S2013 Each process up to is skipped, and the process proceeds to S2014. On the other hand, if it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223e is on (S2006: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e is turned off (S2007). The stop type in the variable performance extracted from the stop type command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S2008), and the stop type instructed by the stop type command from the main control device 110 is used as it is for the variable performance in the third symbol display device 81. It is set as a stop type (S2008). Next, based on the set stop type, a display stop type command for notification to the display control device 114 is generated, and the command is set for transmission to the display control device 114 (S2009). In the display control device 114, by receiving this stop type command for display, the stop pattern corresponding to the stop type indicated by this stop type command for display is stopped and displayed on the third pattern display device 81. The stop display of the variable production is controlled.

When the process of S2009 is completed, it is then determined whether or not the value of the time saving state counter 223g is greater than 0 (S2010: No). No), the process proceeds to S2014. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the time saving state counter 203g is greater than 0 (S2010: Yes), first, the value of the time saving state counter 203g is subtracted by 1 (S2011). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the time saving state counter 203g after subtraction is 0 (S2012), and if it is determined to be 0 (S2012), the normal state of the time saving state of the normal design (low probability state), a back image change command for switching to the back image corresponding to the normal state is set (S2013), and the process proceeds to S2014.

On the other hand, in the process of S2012, if it is determined that the value of the time saving state counter 203g is not 0 (S2012: No), it means that the time saving state of the normal design continues, so the back corresponding to the time saving state of the normal design No need to change the image. Therefore, in this case, the process of S2013 is skipped and the process proceeds to S2014.

In addition, the rear image displayed during the time-saving state is specifically a rear image on which right-handed navigation (see FIG. 5A) is displayed. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the jackpot ends, the back type is switched to the right-handed navigation display regardless of the jackpot type. Then, when the time-saving state of the normal pattern ends, the back image is switched to the normal state back image in which the right-hand navigation is not displayed. It should be noted that, if the special pattern probability variation state after the end of the jackpot, the special pattern probability variation state will continue until the next jackpot, so the right-handed navigation will be displayed from the back type There is no change.

In the processing of S2014, it is determined whether or not the value of the allowable time counter 223i is greater than 0 (S2014). Subtract and update (S2015), and terminate this process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the allowable time counter 223i is 0 (S2014: No), the process of S2015 is skipped and the process ends. Through the processing of S2014 and S2015, the value of the allowable time counter 223i can be updated periodically.

In the present embodiment, the back surface type set in the variable probability state of the special symbol and the time saving state of the normal symbol are set in common, but different back surface types may be displayed. As a result, a wide variety of performances can be realized. Further, the remaining time period may be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 according to the value of the time reduction state counter 203g. This allows the player to easily recognize the short remaining time.

In this embodiment, the permissible time counter 223h is updated in the variable display setting process (S1812), but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it may be configured to update during processing (sound editing/output processing, liquid crystal presentation execution management processing, etc.) executed every 1 ms in the main processing (see FIG. 42). Thereby, the permissible time counter 223h can be updated periodically.

<Regarding control processing of the display control device in the first embodiment>
Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIGS. 48 to 61. FIG. The processing of the MPU 231 can be broadly classified into main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, command interrupt processing that is executed when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, and processing for one frame from the image controller 237. There is V interrupt processing that is executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal that is transmitted every 20 milliseconds when image drawing processing is completed. The MPU 231 normally executes main processing, and executes command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing in accordance with reception of a command and detection of a V interrupt signal. If command reception and V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, command reception processing is preferentially executed. As a result, it is possible to quickly reflect the content of the command received from the sound lamp control device 113 and execute the V interrupt process.

First, the main processing executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 48 is a flow chart showing this main process. The main processing is to execute initialization processing when the power is turned on.

Activation of this main process is specifically performed according to the following flow. When power is turned on from the power supply circuit 115 to the display control device 114 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the command pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to "0000H" according to its hardware configuration. , the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is specified for the bus line 240. FIG. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address specified on the bus line 240 is "0000H", it sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. , and outputs the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231 . Then, the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, and starts the main process by starting the execution of the process according to the fetched instruction.

Here, if all the boot programs to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the character ROM 234 indicates that the address designated to the bus line 240 is "0000H". When detected, one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" must be read from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to read out and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. It will consume a lot of waiting time. Therefore, the time taken to start the MPU 231 becomes longer, and as a result, there arises a problem that the control of the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, the NOR ROM 234d stores a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. Since it is a memory from which data can be read, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 is immediately stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234 c and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231 . Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", the MPU 231 can start the main process in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the control of the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

When the main process is executed as described above, first, the boot process executed by the boot program is executed (S2101), and the display control device 114 is set so that various controls for the third symbol display device 81 can be executed. to start.

Here, the boot processing (S2101) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing boot processing (S2101) executed in the main processing in the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. FIG.

As described above, in this embodiment, the control program and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 231 are stored in the third symbol display device 81 instead of being stored in a dedicated program ROM as in conventional game machines. The character ROM 234 provided for storing the data of the image to be displayed is stored. The character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND-type flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity with a small area. There is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in failure rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a slow read speed, especially when performing random access. Even if a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may deteriorate. Therefore, in this boot process, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are transferred to the program storage area 233a provided in the work RAM 233 constituted by DRAM and the data table. A process of transferring and storing in the storage area 233b is executed.

Specifically, first, based on the hardware operations of the MPU 231 and the character ROM 234 described above, the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR-type ROM 234d and set in the buffer RAM 234c after the system reset is canceled is executed. Of the control programs stored in the 2-program storage area 234a1, a predetermined amount is transferred to the program storage area 233a (S2201). The predetermined amount of control programs transferred here includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the head address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S2202). As a result, the MPU 231 starts executing the rest of the boot program included in the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a by the process of S2201.

By setting the command pointer 231a to a predetermined address in the program storage area 233a by the processing of S2202, the MPU 231 can execute various processes while reading the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instruction, but rather reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. and execute various processing. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch the instruction at high speed and execute the process for the instruction.

After the command pointer 231a is set by the process of S2202, the remaining boot program whose execution is started by the set command pointer 231a is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a. Of the control programs stored, the remaining control programs and fixed value data that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a are transferred by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b (S2203). Specifically, the control program and some fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the above-mentioned various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) of the fixed value data are stored in the data table. Transfer to the storage area 233b.

After executing other processes necessary for the boot process (S2204), the instruction pointer 231a is moved to the second predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, after the boot process (see S2101 in FIG. 48) is completed. By setting the top address of the program corresponding to the initializing process (see S2102 in FIG. 48) (S2205), the execution of the boot program is finished, and the boot process ends.

By executing the boot process (S2201) in this way, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the work RAM 233, which is composed entirely of DRAM. It is transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b. At the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processing is executed using

Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the control program and fixed value data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 and the fixed value data after the system reset is released. By transferring to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read the control program and fixed value data from the work RAM configured by the DRAM with a high read speed and perform various controls. High processing performance can be maintained, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the auxiliary effect part.

On the other hand, without storing the entire boot program in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the rest of the boot program is stored in the NAND type flash memory 234a. , the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time simply by adding the NOR type ROM 234d with a very small capacity. can be done.

In the boot process shown in FIG. 49, the predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S2201 includes all remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. However, it is not necessarily limited to this. may be part of As for the boot program transferred here, a predetermined amount of the control program including all remaining boot programs is transferred to the program storage area 233a. 231a may be executed. Then, the processes of S2203 to S2205 may be executed by all remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

In addition, the boot program transferred by the process of S2201 transfers a part of the remaining boot program by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a, and then the beginning of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a. A process of setting an address to the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. In addition, part of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a by this processing is further transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount of part of the remaining boot program, and subsequently stored in the program storage area 233a. A process of setting the start address of the stored boot program to the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, a predetermined amount of a part of the remaining boot program is transferred to the program storage area 233a, and then the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is set in the instruction pointer 231a at step S2201. and the processing of S2202 may be repeated a plurality of times, and then the processing of S2203 to S2205 may be executed.

As a result, even if the program size of the boot program is large and the rest of the boot program not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a at once, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. Using the boot program, a predetermined amount can be transferred to the program storage area 233a.

Further, in the present embodiment, the first program storage area 234d1 has been described as having a part of the boot program that is first executed by the MPU 231 when the system reset is released. It may be stored in the 1-program storage area 234d1. In this case, the MPU 231 may perform the processes of S2203 to S2205 without performing the processes of S2201 and S2202 after starting the boot process. This eliminates the need to transfer the boot program to the program storage area 233a, reducing the number of times the program is transferred to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a, thereby reducing the boot processing time. Therefore, it is possible to start the control of the auxiliary effect section in the MPU 231, which becomes possible after the boot process, more quickly.

Now, return to the description of FIG. After the boot process is completed, the initial setting process is executed according to the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S2102). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231, and various settings are made for the registers in the MPU 231 and the I/O device. Further, processing for clearing the memory of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Further, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set to the respective flags. As the initial value of each flag, "off" or "0" is set unless otherwise specified.

Further, in the initial setting process, after the image controller 237 is initialized, the image controller 237 is instructed to draw an image so that an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen of the third pattern display device 81. and instruct execution of display processing. As a result, immediately after the power is turned on, an image of a specific color is first displayed on the entire screen of the third pattern display device 81 . Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be a different color according to the model of the pachinko machine. As a result, in the operation check at the factory or the like at the time of manufacture, immediately after turning on the power, it is inspected whether or not the image of the color corresponding to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the pachinko machine 10 It is possible to easily and immediately judge whether or not the activation can be started normally.

Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 to transfer the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235 (S2103). This transfer instruction contains the leading and trailing addresses of the character ROM 234 storing the image data corresponding to the main image when the power is turned on, the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination. The image controller 237 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 according to this transfer instruction. It is transferred to the image area 235a.

Then, when the transfer of all the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating transfer end to the MPU 231 . By receiving this transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can grasp that the transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction has ended. When the transfer of all the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 stores transfer end information indicating transfer end in a register provided inside the image controller 237 or in a partial area of the built-in memory. It may be written. The MPU 231 reads information from this register or a partial area of the built-in memory at any time, and detects the writing of transfer end information by the image controller 237, thereby ascertaining that the transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction has ended. You may do so.

The image data transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off. When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the process of S2103, then the power-on variation image is transferred. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller so as to transfer the image data corresponding to . This transfer instruction contains the head address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image, the data size of the image data, and information on the transfer destination (here, the resident video RAM 235). , and the head address of the power-on fluctuation image area 235b, which is the transfer destination. It is transferred to the change image area 235b when the power is turned on. The image data transferred to the power-on variation image area 235b is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image to the power-on variation image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the process of S2104, then the simple image display flag 233c is set. is turned on (S2105). As a result, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in the transfer setting process (see FIG. 59A), which will be described later. A resident image transfer setting process is executed to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the image (see S3602 in FIG. 59A).

Further, the simple image display flag 233c indicates that all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on the transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by the resident image transfer setting process. Remains on until terminated. As a result, during this period, the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 50(b)) performs the simple command determination processing (see FIG. 50(b) S2408) and simple display setting processing (see S2409 in FIG. 50(b)) are executed.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 uses the NAND flash memory 234a for the character ROM 234. Due to its slow read speed, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is It takes a long time to transfer from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 . Therefore, as in this main processing, after the power is turned on, the power-on main image and the power-on varying image are first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the main image at power-on is transferred to the third image. By displaying it on the symbol display device 81, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player and the people involved in the hall can see the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on. You can check the main image. Therefore, the display control device 114 takes time to transfer the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while the main image is being displayed on the third pattern display device 114 when the power is turned on. be able to. On the other hand, while the main image is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player or the like can recognize that some initialization processing is being performed, so that the rest of the resident video RAM 235 can be resident. It is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without worrying whether the operation is stopped while the image data to be processed is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 .

Also, in an operation check at a factory or the like at the time of manufacture, since the main image is immediately displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, the operation of the third pattern display device 81 is started without any problem when the power is turned on. Therefore, it is possible to prevent deterioration of the operation check efficiency by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed for the character ROM 234. FIG.

In the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10, after the power is turned on, the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, so that the power-on main image is the third symbol. When the player starts the game while the display is displayed on the display device 81, a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 (start winning), and an instruction to start the variable effect is issued. When received from the main control device 110 via the sound lamp control device 113, that is, when the display variation pattern command is received, the power-on variation image is immediately displayed during the variation performance period, and simple variation is performed. can perform. Therefore, even while the main image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation performance.

Further, as described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the third symbol display device 81 continues to display the main image when the power is turned on. is composed of the NAND-type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, it takes a long time to transfer the data. However, in this pachinko machine 10, since it is possible to perform a simple variation effect using the power-on fluctuation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on, immediately after the power is turned on, for example, after power failure recovery. Immediately after the power is turned on, even while the main image is displayed, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

After the processing of S2105, interrupt permission is set (S2106), and thereafter the main processing executes infinite loop processing until the power is turned off. Accordingly, after the interrupt permission is set by the process of S2106, the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are executed according to the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

Next, with reference to FIG. 50(a), command interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 50(a) is a flow chart showing command interrupt processing. As described above, when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes command interrupt processing.

In this command interrupt process, the received command data is extracted, and the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S2301), and the process ends. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by this command interrupt processing are read out by command determination processing or simple command determination processing of V interrupt processing, which will be described later, and processing corresponding to the command is performed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 50(b), V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 50(b) is a flow chart showing this V interrupt processing. In this V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the command stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are executed, and after specifying the image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81, the image is drawn. By creating a list (see FIG. 24) and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute drawing processing and display processing of the image.

As described above, this V interrupt process is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. This V interrupt signal is a signal that is generated in the image controller 237 and sent to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing processing for one frame is completed. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with this V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is issued to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image before the image drawing processing or display processing is completed. It is possible to prevent an image from being developed in accordance with a new drawing instruction in a frame buffer storing image information being displayed.

Here, first, the outline of the flow of V interrupt processing will be described, and then the details of each processing will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt process, as shown in FIG. 50(b), first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S2401). If it is off (S2401: No), it means that the transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been completed. In order to display on the display device 81, command determination processing (S2402) is executed, and then display setting processing (S2403) is executed.

In the command determination process (S2402), the content of the command from the sound lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process is analyzed, and the process corresponding to the command is executed. When the display variation pattern command is stored, the demonstration display data table or the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and the transfer data corresponding to the set display data table is transferred. The table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

In this command determination process, all commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and processed. This is because command determination processing is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds when V interrupt processing is executed, and there is a high possibility that multiple commands are stored in the command buffer area during those 20 milliseconds. be. In particular, when main controller 110 decides to start a variable effect, there is a high possibility that a display variation pattern command, a display stop type command, and the like are stored in the command buffer area at the same time. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands all at once, it is possible to quickly comprehend the mode and stop type of the variable performance selected by the main control device 110 and the sound lamp control device 113, and produce a performance image corresponding to that mode. Drawing of an image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 . The details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 51 to 55. FIG.

In the display setting process (S2403), based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S2402), etc., an image for one frame to be displayed next on the third pattern display device 81 is displayed. specifically identify the content of In addition, depending on the status of processing, etc., the effect mode to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is determined, and the display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. The details of this display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

After the display setting process is executed, task processing is executed (S2404). In this task processing, the image is configured based on the content of the image for the next one frame to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 specified by the display setting processing (S2403) or the simple display setting processing (S2409). In addition to specifying the type of sprite (display object) to be displayed, various parameters required for drawing such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle are determined for each sprite.

Next, transfer setting processing is executed (S2405). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 is caused to transfer image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set instructions. Further, while the simple image display flag 233c is off, predetermined image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer data information of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. In addition to setting a transfer instruction to transfer to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236 a of the video RAM 236 , even when a continuous notice command or a back image change command is received from the sound lamp control device 113 , the image controller 237 is continuously instructed to A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data of the continuous notice images used in the notice effect and the image data of the back image after change from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. - 特許庁Details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 59 and 60. FIG.

Next, drawing processing is executed (S2406). In this drawing process, based on the types of sprites that make up one frame determined in the task process (S2404) and the parameters necessary for drawing each sprite, and the transfer instruction set in the transfer setting process (S2405), 24, and transmits the drawing list to the image controller 237 together with the drawing object buffer information. As a result, the image controller 237 executes image drawing processing according to the drawing list. Details of the rendering process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, update processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S2407). Then, the V interrupt processing ends. As a counter updated by the process of S2407, for example, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of the stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and is updated each time the V interrupt process is executed. Then, in the command determination process, when the reception of the stop type command for display is detected, the stop type indicated by the stop type command for display (jackpot A, jackpot B, jackpot C, front-back off reach, front-back off reach, complete A stop type table and a stop type counter corresponding to (losing, chance eye) are compared with each other, and the stop design after the variable effect displayed on the third design display device 81 is finally set.

On the other hand, in the process of S2401, if it is determined that the simple image display flag 233c is ON (S2401: Yes), it means that the transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display the power-on image on the third pattern display device 81, simple command determination processing (S2408) is executed, then simple display setting processing (S2409) is executed, and the process proceeds to S2404.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 51 to 55, the details of the command determination process (S2402), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 51 is a flow chart showing this command determination processing.

In this command determination process, as shown in FIG. 51, first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S2501). After completing the command determination process, the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S2501: Yes), the new command flag for notifying the display setting process (S2503) that the new command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (S2502). All unprocessed commands stored in the buffer area are analyzed for their command types (S2503).

Then, among the unprocessed commands, first, it is determined whether or not there is a variation pattern command for display (S2504), and if there is a variation pattern command for display (S2504: Yes), variation pattern command processing is executed. (S2505) and returns to the processing of S2501.

Here, the details of the variation pattern command process (S2505) will be described with reference to FIG. 52(a). FIG. 52(a) is a flow chart showing variation pattern command processing. This variation pattern command process is for executing a process corresponding to the display variation pattern command received from the sound lamp control device 114 .

In the variation pattern command process, first, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation effect pattern indicated by the variation pattern command for display is determined, and the determined variation display data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b to display the display data table. It is set in the buffer 233d (S2601).

Here, since the main controller 110 always determines the start of variation at a distance of several seconds or more, it does not receive two or more display variation pattern commands within 20 milliseconds. When executing, it is impossible that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command is mistakenly used for display. There is a possibility that it will be interpreted as a variation pattern command. In the process of S2601, in preparation for such a case, when it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern with the shortest variation time is displayed. is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

If a variation display data table corresponding to a variation pattern with a long variation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the main control device actually produces a variation effect with a shorter variation time than the set display data table. 110, the next display variation pattern command is received from the main controller 110 while the third pattern display device 81 is displaying the variation performance according to the set variation display data table. As a result, another variable display is suddenly started, which may make the player feel uncomfortable.

On the other hand, by setting the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern with the shortest variation time in the display data table buffer 233d as in the present embodiment, the variation display data table actually has a longer variation than the set display data table. Even if the variable effect with time is instructed by main controller 110, after the variable effect according to display data table buffer 233d is completed, main controller 110 will send the next display for the next display, as will be described later. Since the display of the third symbol display device 81 is controlled by the display setting process so that the demonstration effect is displayed until the pattern command is received, the player can feel the third symbol display on the third symbol display device 81 without any discomfort. 3 You can continue to see the variation of the pattern.

Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S2601 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S2602). Then, among the data table discrimination flags provided for each variation display data table corresponding to each variation pattern, the data table discrimination flag corresponding to the variation display data table set by the processing of S2601 is turned on, and other variation The data table discrimination flag corresponding to the display data table is set to off (S2603). In the display setting process, by referring to the data table determination flag set by the process of S2603, it is possible to easily determine which variation pattern the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d corresponds to. can judge.

Next, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S2601, time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the clock counter 233h (S2604), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S2605). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the fixed display flag are set to OFF (S2606), the variation pattern command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

By executing this variation pattern command process, in the display setting process, while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the process of S2605, the variable display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S2601 , extracts the drawing contents defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f, and specifies the contents of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the third pattern display device 81. At the same time, the transfer data table buffer 233e The transfer data information specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set to 1, and the sprite image data required in the set variable display data table is stored in advance from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. image storage area 236a.

Also, in the display setting process, the time counter 233h to which the time data is set by the process of S2604 is used to measure the time for the variable presentation specified in the variable display data table, and when the variable presentation in the variable display data table ends. When it is determined, the setting of the stop display is controlled so that the stop pattern corresponding to the stop type command for display from the main control device 110 is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .

Now, return to the description of FIG. In the process of S2504, if it is determined that there is no display variation pattern command (S2504: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display stop type command in the unprocessed commands (S2506), If there is a display variation type command (S2206: Yes), stop type command processing is executed (S2507), and the process returns to S2501.

Details of the stop type command process (S2507) will now be described with reference to FIG. 52(b). FIG. 52(b) is a flow chart showing stop type command processing. This stop type command processing is for executing processing corresponding to the display variation type command received from the sound lamp control device 114 .

In the stop type command processing, first, a stop type table corresponding to the stop type information indicated by the stop type command for display (jackpot A, jackpot B, front-rear loss reach, reach other than front-rear loss, complete loss, or chance number) is determined (S2701), and the stop type table is compared with the value of the stop type counter updated each time the V interrupt process (see FIG. 50(b)) is executed, and the third symbol display device Finally, the stop symbol after the variable effect displayed in 81 is set (S2702).

Then, among the stop symbol discrimination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the process of S2702 is turned on, and the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to the other stop symbols is turned off. (S2703), and the process ends.

Here, as described above, in the variation display data table, the type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after a predetermined time has passed since the variation based on the data table is started. , offset information (design offset information) from the stop design set by the processing of S2702. In the above-described task processing (S2404), after a predetermined time has passed since the start of the variation, the stop symbol set by the processing of S2702 is specified from the stop symbol discrimination flag set by the processing of S2703, and the specified The third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the stopped symbol. Then, the address where the image data corresponding to the specified third pattern is stored is specified. Image data corresponding to the third design is stored in the third design area 235d of the resident video RAM 235, as described above.

It should be noted that since the main controller 110 always determines the start of fluctuation at a time interval of several seconds or more, two or more stop type commands for display are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore command determination processing is executed. In this case, it is impossible that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area. It may be interpreted as a type command. In the process of S2701, in preparation for such a case, if it is determined that two or more stop type commands for display are stored in the command buffer area, it is assumed that the stop type is completely out of line, and the stop type Decide on a table. As a result, the stop symbol corresponding to the complete loss is set by the processing of S2702.

If a stop symbol corresponding to the "special symbol jackpot" is set, the third symbol display device 81 displays the "special symbol" even if the "special symbol is out". A stop pattern corresponding to the "big win" is displayed, and the player is misled into thinking that the pachinko machine 10 has "a special pattern big win", and there is a risk of degrading the reliability of the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, by setting the stop symbol corresponding to the complete loss, in fact, if it is a "special symbol jackpot", the third symbol display device 81 stops the complete loss. Even if the symbols are displayed, the pachinko machine 10 becomes a "jackpot of special symbols", so that the player can be pleased.

Returning to FIG. 51, the description is continued. In the processing of S2506, if it is determined that there is no stop type command for display (S2506: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an opening command for display among the unprocessed commands (S2508), and If there is an opening command (S2508: Yes), the opening command process is executed (S2509), and the process returns to S2501.

Details of the opening command processing (S2509) will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 53(a) is a flow chart showing the opening command process. This opening command process is for executing a process corresponding to the display opening command received from the sound lamp control device 114 .

In the opening command process, first, the opening display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S2801). Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in the process of S2801 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S2802).

Then, based on the opening display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S2801, time data representing the rendering time is set in the timer counter 233h (S2803), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 ( S2804). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the fixed display flag are set to OFF (S2805), the opening command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

By executing this opening command process, in the display setting process, while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the process of S2804, from the opening display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S2801, The drawing contents specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f are extracted, and the contents of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the third pattern display device 81 are specified. From the set transfer data table, the transfer data information specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted. The image controller 237 is controlled so that the image is transferred to the image storage area 236a.

Also, when this opening command process is executed, the opening transfer data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. As a result, the image data required for the round effect and the ending effect can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 while the opening effect is being performed on the third symbol display device 81 . As described above, the pachinko machine 10 uses the NAND-type flash memory 234a for the character ROM 234. Due to its slow read speed, the jackpot effect (opening effect, round effect, ending effect) is produced. It takes a long time to transfer the image data used for the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 .

The number-of-rounds command for display indicating the number of newly started rounds is transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 at the timing when the opening effect in the third pattern display device 81 ends, so it indicates the first round. If the image data necessary for the round effect is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after the display round number command is received, there will be a lot of waiting time from the end of the opening effect to the start of the round effect. There is a risk that this will take time and cause the player to feel uneasy about whether the action has stopped or to feel a sense of incompatibility.

In addition, the display ending command for instructing the start of the ending effect is transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 at the timing when all the round effects (for 15 rounds) in the third pattern display device 81 are completed. If the image data necessary for the ending effect is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after receiving the ending command for display, a long waiting time is required from the end of the round effect to the start of the ending effect. This may cause the player to feel uneasy about whether the motion has stopped or to have a sense of incompatibility.

Therefore, in this embodiment, when the opening command for display is received, the transfer of the data necessary for the round effect and the ending effect is started from there, and the third symbol display device 81 ends the variation display of the jackpot. , the transfer of the data necessary for the round effect and the ending effect is completed. As a result, when the opening effect is completed in the third pattern display device 81, the round effect can be immediately started in the third pattern display device 81, and the round effect is completed in the third pattern display device 81 (for 15 rounds). ) When the game ends, the ending effect can be immediately started on the third pattern display device 81, so that the player does not feel uneasy about whether the action has stopped or feels uncomfortable. Therefore, the player can be made to feel at ease.

Returning to FIG. 51, the description is continued. In the process of S2508, if it is determined that there is no display opening command (S2508: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display round number command in the unprocessed commands (S2510), and the display is performed. If there is a round number command for use (S2510: Yes), the round number command process is executed (S2511), and the process returns to S2501.

Details of the round number command process (S2511) will now be described with reference to FIG. 53(b). FIG. 53(b) is a flow chart showing the round number command processing. The number-of-rounds command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the number-of-rounds command for display received from the sound lamp control device 114 .

In the round number command processing, first, a round number display data table corresponding to the number of rounds indicated by the display round number command is determined, and the determined round number display data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b to display data. It is set in the table buffer 233d (S2901). Next, by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e, the contents are cleared (S2902).

Then, based on the number-of-rounds display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S2901, time data representing the performance time is set in the clock counter 233h (S2903), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S2904). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the fixed display flag are set to OFF (S2905), the round number command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

Now, return to the description of FIG. In the process of S2510, if it is determined that there is no command for the number of rounds for display (S2510: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an ending command for display among the unprocessed commands (S2512). If there is an ending command (S2512: Yes), the ending command process is executed (S2513), and the process returns to S2501.

Details of the ending command process (S2513) will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing ending command processing. This ending command process is to execute the process corresponding to the display ending command received from the sound lamp control device 114 .

In the ending command process, first, the ending display data table corresponding to the display mode of the ending effect indicated by the display ending command is determined, the determined ending display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data table is displayed. It is set in the buffer 233d (S3001). Next, by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e, the contents are cleared (S3002).

Next, based on the ending display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S3001, time data representing the presentation time is set in the clock counter 233h (S3003), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 ( S3004). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the fixed display flag are set to OFF (S3006), the ending command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

Now, return to the description of FIG. In the process of S2512, if it is determined that there is no ending command for display (S2512: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a back image change command among the unprocessed commands (S2514). If there is a change command (S2514: Yes), the back image change command process is executed (S2515), and the process returns to S2501.

Details of the back image change command process (S2515) will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 55(a) is a flow chart showing the back image change command process. This back image change command process is for executing a process corresponding to the back image change command received from the sound lamp control device 114 .

In the back image change command processing, first, a back image change flag for notifying the normal image transfer setting processing (S3603) of the change in the back image accompanying the reception of the back image change command in the ON state is set to ON (S3101). . Then, among the back image discrimination flags provided for each back image type, the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image change command is turned on, and the back image corresponding to the other back image type is turned on. The determination flag is set to OFF (S3102), the back image change command processing is terminated, and the command determination processing is returned to.

In the normal image transfer setting process, when it is detected that the back image change flag set by the process of S3101 is turned on, the back image type after change is specified from the back image discrimination flag set by the process of S3102. . Then, when the specified back image type is back B or C, part of the image data corresponding to those back images is resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, as described above. Therefore, a transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237 so that the image data corresponding to the rear image in a predetermined range is transferred from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236 a of the normal video RAM 236 .

Further, in the task processing, if it is specified that one of the back faces A to C is to be displayed according to the back face type of the back face image specified in the display data table, the back face image discrimination flag set by the processing in S3102 is used. , specifying the back image type to be displayed at that time, further specifying the range of the back image to be displayed according to the passage of time, and the RAM type in which the image data corresponding to the range of the back image is stored. (Resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) and the address of that RAM are specified.

Since the player does not continuously operate the frame button 22 for 20 milliseconds or less, two or more background image change commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, so the command determination process is executed. In this case, there should be no cases where two or more background image change commands are stored in the command buffer area. It could be interpreted as a command. In the process of S2802, if it is determined that two or more back image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the back image determination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the previously received back image command is turned on. Alternatively, the rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the rear image command received later may be turned on. Alternatively, any one back image change command may be extracted and the back image determination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the command may be turned on. Since the change of the back image does not directly affect the game value of the pachinko machine 10, it is preferable to appropriately set it according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10. FIG.

Now, return to the description of FIG. In the process of S2514, if it is determined that there is no back image change command (S2514: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an error command among the unprocessed commands (S2516). Otherwise (S2516: Yes), the error command process is executed (S2517), and the process returns to S2501.

Details of the error command processing (S2517) will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 55(b) is a flowchart showing error command processing. This error command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the error command received from the audio lamp controller 114 .

In the error command process, first, an error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the ON state is set to ON (S3201). Then, among the error determination flags provided for each error type, the error determination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error determination flags are set to off (S3202). End the process and return to the command determination process.

In the display setting process, when the occurrence of an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by the process of S3201, the type of error that has occurred is determined from the error determination flag set by the process of S3202, and the error type is handled. A process is executed to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display a warning image to be displayed.

Note that if it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, in the process of S2902, the error discrimination flags corresponding to all error types indicated by the respective error commands are set to ON. As a result, the warning images corresponding to all the error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the player and the people involved in the hall can correctly grasp the occurrence of the error.

Now, return to the description of FIG. If it is determined in the process of S2516 that there is no error command (S2516: No), then the process corresponding to other unprocessed commands is executed (S2518), and the process returns to S2501.

In the process of S2501, which is executed again after each command has been processed, it is determined again whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S2501: Yes ), and the processing of S2502 to S2518 is executed again. Then, the processing of S2501 to S2518 is repeatedly executed until there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area. End the process.

The simple command determination process (S2409) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is ON in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 50(b)) is also performed in the same manner as the command determination process. However, in the simple command determination process, only the commands necessary to display the power-on image, that is, the fluctuation pattern command for display and the stop type command for display, are extracted from the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area. It extracts and executes fluctuation pattern command processing (see FIG. 52(a)) and stop type command processing (see FIG. 52(b)), which are processing corresponding to each command, and for other commands, A process to discard the command without executing the process corresponding to the command is performed.

Here, in the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 52(a)) executed in this case, in the processing of S2601, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the variation image at power-on is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The image data of the power-on main image and the power-on varying image that are set and required in that case are stored in the power-on main moving image area 235a and the power-on varying moving image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the process of S2602, the process of writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233b and clearing the contents thereof is performed.

Next, details of the display setting process (S2403), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIGS. 56 to 58. FIG. FIG. 56 is a flow chart showing this display setting process.

In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 56, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S3301). It is determined that the new command has not been processed in the command determination process executed first, the processes of S3302 to S3304 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S3305. On the other hand, if the new command flag is ON (S3301: Yes), it is determined that the new command has been processed in the previously executed command determination processing, and after setting the new command flag to OFF (S3302), S3303-S3304 , the process corresponding to the new command is executed.

In the processing of S3303, it is determined whether or not the error occurrence flag is ON (S3303). Then, if the error occurrence flag is on (S3303: Yes), warning image setting processing is executed (S3304).

Details of the warning image setting process will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing warning image setting processing. This process is a process for developing image data for displaying a warning image corresponding to an error that has occurred on the third pattern display device 81. First, the error determination flag is referred to, and all error determination flags set to ON are displayed. Warning image data for displaying an error warning image corresponding to the flag on the third pattern display device 81 is developed (S3401).

Based on this expanded warning image data, task processing identifies the type of sprites (display objects) that make up the warning image, and for each sprite, the display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle necessary for drawing. determine various parameters.

Then, in the warning image setting process, after the process of S3401, the error occurrence flag is set to OFF (S3402), and the process returns to the display setting process.

Now, return to the description of FIG. After the warning image setting process (S3304), or if it is determined in the process of S3303 that the error occurrence flag is not ON, that is, it is OFF (S3303: No), then the process proceeds to S3305.

In S3305, pointer update processing is executed (S3305). Details of the pointer update process will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing pointer update processing. This pointer updating process acquires the transfer data information of the corresponding drawing contents or transfer target image data from the display data table and the transfer data table stored in the respective buffers of the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is the process of updating the pointer 233f that specifies the target address.

In this pointer update process, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (S3501). That is, the pointer 233f is basically updated so that it is incremented by 1 each time the V interrupt process is executed. Further, as described above, in the various data tables, the Start information is described at the address "0000H", and the substance of each data is defined after the address "0001H". When the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 in accordance with the storage in the data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer update processing. Substantial data can be read from the data table.

After the value of the pointer 233f is updated by the processing of S3501, it is then checked whether the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is End information. is determined (S3502). As a result, if it is End information (S3502: Yes), it means that the pointer 233f has been updated past the address where the substance data is described in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d.

Therefore, it is determined whether or not the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is a demonstration display data table (S3503). If it is a demonstration display data table (S3503: Yes), the display data table buffer 233d is set in the time counter 233h (S3504), the pointer 233f is initialized by setting it to 1 (S3505), the present process is terminated, and the display is displayed. Return to setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be developed sequentially from the top of the demonstration display data table, so that the third symbol display device 81 can repeatedly display the demonstration effects.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3503 that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not the demonstration display data table (S3503: No), the value of the pointer 233f is decremented by 1 (S3506 ), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, when a display data table other than the demonstration display data table, for example, a variable display data table, is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the previous address in which the End information is described is displayed. Since the drawing contents are always expanded, the third pattern display device 81 can display the last image defined by the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of S3502, if the data of the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not the End information (S3502: No), this process is terminated and the process returns to the display setting process.

Here, returning to FIG. 56, the description is continued. After the pointer update process, the drawing contents of the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process are developed from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S3306). In the task processing, the type of sprite (display object) forming the image is specified based on the rendering content developed in the processing of S3306 together with the previously developed warning image, etc., and the display coordinate position is determined for each sprite. , enlargement ratio, rotation angle, and other parameters required for drawing.

Next, the value of the clock counter 233h is decremented by 1 (S3307), and it is determined whether or not the value of the clock counter 233h after the subtraction is 0 or less (S3308). Then, if the value of the clock counter 233h is 1 or more (S3308: No), the display setting process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if the value of the clock counter 233h is 0 or less (S3308: Yes), it means that the effect time corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, if the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is time to end the variable display and perform the stop display, so it is checked whether the fixed display flag is on. (S3309).

As a result, if the confirmed display flag is ON (S3309: Yes), the confirmed display effect has not yet been performed, and it is time to perform the confirmed display effect. The transfer data table buffer 233e is set (S3310), and then the content is cleared by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3311). Then, the time data corresponding to the performance time of the fixed display data table is set in the clock counter 233h (S3312), and the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3313). Then, after setting the confirmation display flag indicating that the confirmation display effect is being performed in the ON state to ON (S3314), the contents of the stop symbol discrimination flag are copied as they are to the previous stop symbol discrimination flag provided in the work RAM 233. (S3315), returning to V interrupt processing.

Thereby, when the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, etc., the fixed display effect of the stop symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the end of the effect. You can set the drawing contents like this. In addition, by only changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233b to the fixed display data table, the effect displayed on the third pattern display device 81 can be easily changed to the fixed display effect. In addition, unlike the conventional case of changing the display contents by activating another program, the program does not become complicated and bloated, and therefore the MPU 231 is not overloaded. Regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114, various modes of effect images can be displayed on the third pattern display 81. - 特許庁

It should be noted that the last stop symbol determination flag set by the process of S3315 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the next variation effect. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the variable effect changes according to the stop symbol of the variable effect performed immediately before, and in the variable display data table, the variation based on the data table Until a predetermined time elapses after the start, the symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the variable effect performed one before is described. In the task processing (S2404), from the start of the variation until a predetermined time elapses, from the previous stop design determination flag set by the processing of S3315, to specify the stop design of the fluctuation production performed one before , the third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the specified stop symbol. As a result, the variable performance is started from the stop symbol in the previous variable performance.

On the other hand, in the process of S3309, if the fixed display flag is not ON but OFF (S3309: No), it is determined whether the demonstration display flag is ON (S3316). If the demonstration display flag is off (S3316: Yes), it means that the value of the clock counter 233h has become 0 or less with the end of the fixed display effect, so the demonstration display data table is transferred to the display data table buffer. 233d (S3317), and then by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3318). Then, the time data corresponding to the performance time of the demonstration display data table is set in the clock counter 233h (S3319). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3320), the demonstration display flag indicating that the demonstration is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (S3321), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process.

As a result, after the fixed display effect is completed, when the display variation pattern command indicating the start of the next variation effect or the opening command is not received, the demonstration effect is automatically displayed on the third pattern display device 81. You can set the drawing content so that is displayed.

In the process of S3316, if the demonstration display flag is ON (S3316: Yes), it means that the demonstration effect is performed after the fixed display effect is finished, and that demonstration effect is finished, so the display setting process is finished as it is. and return to V interrupt processing. In this case, various settings are made so that the demonstration effect is started again by the pointer updating process executed in the next V interrupt process. The demonstration effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81 until a new display variation pattern command is received.

The simple display setting process (S2409) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is ON in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 50(b)) also performs the same process as the display setting process. However, in the simple display setting process, the power-on variable image corresponding to the stop pattern set based on the display stop type command is stopped for a predetermined time after the effect time of the power-on variable image has ended. A process of setting a display data table that defines to be displayed in the display data table buffer 233d is performed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 59 and 60, the details of the transfer setting process (S2405), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 59(a) is a flow chart showing this transfer setting process.

In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is ON (S3601). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S3601: Yes), all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, so the resident image transfer setting is made. After executing the process (S3602), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, a transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 to transfer the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 . Details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, if the simple image display flag 233c is not turned on as a result of the processing of S3601, that is, if it is turned off (S3601: No), all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. has been transferred to In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S3603), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, the transfer instruction is set so that subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 . Details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, resident image transfer setting processing (S3602), which is part of the transfer setting processing (S2405) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIG. 59(b). FIG. 59B is a flow chart showing this resident image transfer setting process (S3602).

In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not a transfer instruction for untransferred image data has been issued to the image controller 237 (S3701). ), and further, it is determined whether or not the image data transfer processing performed by the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction is completed (S3702). In the process of S3702, after instructing the image controller 237 to transfer the image data, if a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined by the process of S3702 that the transfer process has not ended (S3702: No), the image transfer process continues in the image controller 237, so this resident image transfer setting process is executed. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has ended (S3702: Yes), the process proceeds to S3703. Also, as a result of the process of S3701, even if the transfer instruction for the image data that has not been transferred has not been transmitted to the image controller 237 (S3701: No), the process proceeds to S3703.

In the process of S3703, it is determined whether or not all resident target image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 have been transferred (S3703). A transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 so as to transfer the resident image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S3704), and the resident image transfer setting process ends.

As a result, the transfer data information about the untransferred resident target image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 transfers the transfer data described in the drawing list. Based on the data information, the resident target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 236 . The transfer data information includes the head address and the end address of the character ROM 234 in which the resident target image data is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination (where the data is transferred). The first address of the area provided in the resident video RAM 235 where the resident target image data is to be stored is included. The image controller 237 executes image transfer processing based on this transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer processing from the character ROM 234, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and then stores it in the buffer RAM 237a while the resident video RAM 236 is not in use. , it is transferred to the specified address of the resident video RAM 236 . Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231 .

As a result of the process of S3703, if all the resident image data have been transferred (S3703: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to OFF (S3705), and the resident image transfer setting process is terminated. As a result, in the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 50B), the command is executed instead of the simple command determination processing (see S2408 in FIG. Since determination processing (see FIGS. 51 to 55) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 56 to 58) are executed, normal image drawing is set, and third symbol display device 81 has A normal image is displayed. Further, subsequent image data transfer from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by normal image transfer setting processing (see FIG. 60) (see S3601: No in FIG. 59A).

By executing this resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 transfers all resident images to be resident in the resident video RAM 235, excluding the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image that have already been transferred in the main process. The target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 . Then, the MPU 231 controls the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 to be held without overwriting while the power is turned on. As a result, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process will be resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is turned on.

Therefore, after all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display controller 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the image controller 237 can perform image drawing processing. As a result, if the image data used for drawing processing is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a whose read speed is slow when drawing the image. Therefore, the time required for reading the data can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .

In particular, the resident video RAM 235 stores image data of frequently displayed images such as rear images, third designs, character designs, and error messages, as well as main controller 110, sound lamp controller 113, and display controller 114. Since the image data of the image to be displayed is immediately resident after the display is determined by such as, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND type flash memory 234a, various operations performed by the player at any timing can be prevented. , high responsiveness can be maintained until the third pattern display device 81 displays some kind of image.

Next, normal image transfer setting processing (S3603), which is a part of the transfer setting processing (S2405) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 60 is a flow chart showing this normal image transfer setting process (S3603).

In this normal image transfer setting process, first, from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process (S3305) of the previously executed display setting process (S2403) is used. Information described in the indicated address is obtained (S3801). Then, it is determined whether or not the acquired information is transfer data information (S3802). , and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted and stored in the transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( S3803), furthermore, a transfer start flag, which is provided in the work RAM 233 and indicates that there is image data whose transfer is to be started in the ON state, is set to ON (S3804), and the process proceeds to S3805.

Also, in the processing of S3802, if the acquired information is not the transfer data information but Null data (S3802: No), the processing of S3803 and S3804 is skipped and the processing proceeds to S3805. In the process of S3805, it is determined whether or not a new image data transfer instruction has been set for the image controller 237 after the previous image data transfer is completed (S3805), and the transfer instruction is set. If so (S3805: Yes), it is further determined whether or not the image data transfer performed by the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction has ended (S3806).

In the process of S3806, after setting an image data transfer instruction to the image controller 237, if a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined by the process of S3806 that the transfer process has not ended (S3806: No), the image controller 237 continues the image transfer process, so the normal image transfer setting process is executed. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has ended (S3806: Yes), the process proceeds to S3807. Also, as a result of the process of S3805, even if the image data transfer instruction is not set for the image controller 237 after the previous transfer process is completed (S3805: No), the process proceeds to S3807.

In the process of S3807, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S3807). If the transfer start flag is on (S3807: Yes), image data to be transferred exists, so is turned off (S3808), the image data of the sprite indicated by the various information stored in the transfer data buffer by the processing of S3803 is set as the image data to be transferred, and then the processing proceeds to S3813. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not ON, but OFF (S3807: No), then it is determined whether or not the back image change flag is ON (S3809). If the back image change flag is not on, but off (S3809: No), there is no image data to start transferring, so the normal image transfer setting process ends.

On the other hand, if the back image change flag is on (S3809: Yes), it means that the back image has been changed. Of the discrimination flags, the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image discrimination flag in the ON state is specified, and the image data is set as the transfer target image data (S3811). Furthermore, the head address (storage source head address) and the end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the back image indicated by the back image determination flag is stored, and the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) The start address is obtained (S3812), and the process proceeds to S3813.

In the process of S3813, it is determined whether or not the image data to be transferred has already been stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S3813). The determination in the process of S3813 is performed by referring to the stored image data determination flag 233i. That is, the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is read from the stored image data determination flag 233i, and if the storage state is "on", the image data of the sprite to be transferred is normal video If it is determined that the image data is stored in the RAM 236 and the storage state is "OFF", it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236. FIG.

As a result of the process of S3813, if the image data to be transferred is stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S3813: Yes), there is no need to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. , the normal image transfer setting process ends. As a result, it is possible to prevent unnecessary transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, thereby reducing the processing load on each unit of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240. can be planned.

On the other hand, if the image data to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the process of S3813 (S3813: No), a transfer instruction for the image data to be transferred is set (S3814). As a result, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 receives the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, the image data of the image to be transferred can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 . The transfer data information includes the head address and the end address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the image to be transferred is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and the transfer destination (in this case, the transfer destination). The start address of the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 in which the image data of the image to be transferred is to be stored. The image controller 237 executes image transfer processing based on this transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer processing from the character ROM 234, and specifies the specified video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). forward to the specified address. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231 .

After the processing of S3814, the stored image data determination flag 233i is updated (S3815), and this normal transfer setting processing ends. The stored image data determination flag 233i is updated by, as described above, setting the storage state corresponding to the sprite that has become the image data to be transferred to "on", and by substituting the same image storage area 236a as the one sprite. This is done by setting the storage state corresponding to other sprites that are to be stored in the area to "off".

By executing the normal image transfer processing in this way, the processing corresponding to the display stop type command is executed in the previously executed command determination processing. When the displayed stop type information is determined to be a jackpot stop type, the image data used in the opening effect can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. Further, when the back image is changed based on the reception of the back image change command in the previously executed command determination processing, the image data used for the back image is stored in the back image of the resident video RAM 235 . Image data not stored in the image area 235c can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

Further, in the present embodiment, the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command (for example, display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. , a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. By executing the normal image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 sends data to the image controller 237 in accordance with the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Since the transfer instruction of the image data to be transferred is set, the sprite image data used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing. can be done.

Here, in the transfer data table, the image data to be transferred is stored in the image storage area 236a so that the image data corresponding to the given sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the given sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is defined for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information defined in the transfer data table, thereby obtaining the predetermined address according to the display data table. When the sprite is drawn, the image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 required for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the image required for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay, so that the image can be displayed. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. - 特許庁Also, only the image data temporarily resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 by the description of the transfer data table.

The transfer data table defines transfer data information so that image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 on a sprite-by-sprite basis, the transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load on transfer.

Next, with reference to FIG. 61, details of the drawing process (S2406), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 61 is a flow chart showing this drawing process.

In the drawing process, the types of sprites that make up one frame determined in task processing (S2404) and the parameters necessary for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, magnification, rotation angle, translucency, α blending information , color information, filter designation information) and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S2405), the drawing list shown in FIG. 24 is generated (S3901). That is, in the processing of S3901, the type and address of the storage RAM in which the image data of the sprite is stored are specified for each sprite from the types of various sprites forming one frame determined in the task processing (S2404). , parameters necessary for the sprite determined by task processing are associated with the specified storage RAM type and address. Then, each sprite is rearranged in order from the sprite that should be placed on the backmost side to the sprite that should be placed on the front side in the image for one frame. As drawing information (detailed information), a drawing list is generated by describing the storage RAM type and address in which sprite image data is stored and the parameters necessary for drawing the sprite. When a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S2405), the top address (storage source top address) of the character ROM 234 where the image data to be transferred is stored as the transfer data information is displayed at the end of the drawing list. , the final address (storage source final address), and the top address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236).

As described above, the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the subarea of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite. , according to the sprite type, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j are transmitted to the image controller (S3902). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the drawing target buffer flag 233j includes information instructing to expand the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b as the drawing target buffer information. includes information instructing to develop the image drawn in the second frame buffer 236c as drawing target buffer information.

Based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 draws the image in order from the sprite described at the head of the drawing list, and develops it by overwriting in the frame buffer indicated by the drawing object buffer information. As a result, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the rearmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the frontmost side.

When transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the transfer data information is used to determine the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. ), and the head address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236), and the image data stored from the head address of the storage source to the end address of the storage source are sequentially read from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. After that, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a are sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination start address of the normal video RAM 236, when the normal video RAM 236 is in an unused state. The image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on the drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231 after that, and the image is drawn according to the drawing list.

The image controller 237 reads the image information of the previously developed image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer designated by the drawing object buffer information, and sends the image information along with the drive signal to the third pattern display device 81. Send to As a result, the image developed in the frame buffer can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 . Further, while expanding the image drawn in one frame buffer, the image drawn from one frame buffer can be displayed on the third pattern display 81, and drawing processing and display processing can be processed simultaneously in parallel. can be done.

In the rendering process, after the process of S3902, the rendering target buffer flag 233j is updated (S3903). Then, the drawing process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The rendering target buffer flag 233j is updated by inverting its value, that is, by setting the value to "1" if it was "0" and to "0" if it was "1". done. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted.

Here, the transmission of the drawing list is executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing and display processing of one frame of image are completed. This is performed each time the rendering process of the loading process (see FIG. 50(b)) is performed. As a result, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. is executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing processing for the image for one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information for the first half is read. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. .

After the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. be done. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. . After that, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame are set to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By specifying these alternately, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing for the image for one frame.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, two types of winning holes (the first specific winning hole 65a and the second specific winning hole 650a) are opened in the special game state (jackpot state). ) are provided, and one of the winning openings is opened according to the number of rounds of the jackpot. Both of these two types of winning holes are constructed as winning holes from which a large number (15 pieces) of prize balls are paid out when balls enter. In addition, two types of winning openings (the first specific winning opening 65 a and the second specific winning opening 650 a ) are both provided in the path (channel) on the right side of the game board 13 . As a result, only by hitting the ball to the right side of the game board 13 (right hitting) during the special game state (big win state), the ball can enter even if any of the winning holes is opened. Therefore, the number of prize balls to be paid out in the special game state (jackpot state) can be made less dependent on the skill of the player, so that even the player, who is a beginner, can enjoy the game with peace of mind.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, among the paths (channels) provided on the right side of the game board 13, two types of winning openings (first specific winning opening 65a and second specific winning opening 650a) A storage device 600 provided with a plurality of winning holes is arranged on the upstream side. This storage device 600 is configured so that when the player hits to the right, a part of the hit ball can flow into the storage device 600. A plurality of channels are provided for the flow down. Specifically, the number of prize balls is compared with the guidance flow path 606 for causing the balls to flow down to the general prize winning port (small value prize winning port) 601 with a relatively small number of prize balls (the number of prize balls is 3). A guiding flow path 607 for causing balls to flow down to a general prize winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 with a large number of targets (15 prize balls) is provided. Since the number of prize balls that can be obtained can be varied according to the type of guiding flow path that flows down, when the balls flow into the storage device 600, the number of flow paths through which the balls flow down to the player is increased. Species can be interesting to observe.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the guide channel 607 for causing the balls to flow down to the general prize winning port (large value winning prize port) 602 with a relatively large number of prize balls (the number of prize balls is 15) can be closed. A valve 607 a is provided in the guide channel 607 . This storage valve 607a is set to an open state during a special game state (during a jackpot state), and is set to a closed state during other game states. In addition, each guide channel is arranged so that the game ball that has flowed into the storage device 600 basically flows into the guide channel 607 more easily than the guide channel 606 (see FIG. 9 ( b) see). Therefore, in the special game state (jackpot state), in addition to being able to win prize balls by entering the balls into the first specific winning hole 65a and the second specific winning hole 650a, A prize ball can be obtained by entering a ball into the general prize winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 provided. A storage device 600 is provided on the upstream side of the first specific winning hole 65a and the second specific winning hole 650a. , and storage device 600 can be entered. As a result, it is possible to increase the number of prize balls that can be obtained in one special game state (big win state), so that it is possible to increase the player's merit by winning a big win. As a result, the player can play the game with a greater enjoyment of winning the jackpot, and thus the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not a win is possible, and when the result of the lottery is a winning lottery result, a specific prize-winning slot is opened, and a player enters the specific prize-winning slot. There is one that provides a large amount of prize balls based on the ball hitting the ball (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2001-129177). In this conventional type gaming machine, a plurality of winning openings are provided in addition to the specific winning opening. There is one that is configured so that a ball that is aimed and launched can enter either a specific winning hole or another winning hole. Here, as one of the triggers is that a specific number of balls enter a specific winning opening, control is generally performed so that the specific winning opening is closed. The number of prize balls that the player can obtain in winning increases as the balls enter other prize openings before reaching a specific number. Therefore, by arranging a specific winning hole and another winning hole adjacent to each other, it is possible to increase the number of prize balls in a win, thereby further improving the player's expectation for a win.

However, in conventional gaming machines, even in situations other than winning, there are cases where an irregular game method is performed in which a prize ball is obtained by shooting a ball aiming at another prize winning hole adjacent to a specific winning hole. rice field.

On the other hand, in states other than the special game state (jackpot state), the guide channel 607 is closed by the storage valve 607a. In this state, one ball can be stored in the space formed by the upper portion of the storage valve 607a and the upstream portion of the guide channel 607. , is stored in the upper part of the storage valve 607a. When the ball flows into the storage device 600 in a state where the ball is stored in the upper portion of the storage valve 607a, the ball collides with the stored ball and changes the direction of flow. and flow down easily (see FIG. 9(b)). Therefore, even if a ball enters the storage device 600 in a state other than the special game state (jackpot state), the ball is likely to enter the general winning hole (small value winning hole) 601 with few winning balls. Therefore, the advantage of entering the ball into the storage device 600 can be reduced. Therefore, even in a state other than the special game state, by always aiming at the storage device 600, the irregular game method that increases the number of balls put out only by paying out the general winning prize port (large value winning prize port) 602 is fundamentally impossible, In a state other than a game state (big win state), a game can be played in anticipation of a big win by performing a lottery of special symbols.

It should be noted that the storage device 600 is configured so that one out of every three balls hit right-handed hits the ball. The number of prize balls paid out when the ball enters the general prize winning opening (small value winning opening) 601 is three balls. In other words, even if the player hits to the right in a game state other than the special game state (jackpot state), the lottery for the special symbol is difficult to perform, and the payout based on the ball entering the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601. You cannot increase the number of spheres by . As a result, the advantage of hitting right in the normal state is eliminated, and the player can be made to play the game with the aim of winning a big prize by lottery of special symbols.

In the present embodiment, the ball that has flowed down the guiding channel 606 enters the general winning hole (small value winning hole) 601, and the ball that has flowed down the guiding channel 607 enters the general ball entering hole 602. However, it is not limited to this. For example, on the downstream side of each induction path, a known crew means having a plurality of winning holes is provided, and different prize balls are paid out according to the winning hole into which the ball enters. good too. As a result, even if the guide channel 606 is flowed down, a large number of prize balls can be obtained by making the ball enter a prize-winning opening where a relatively large number of prize balls are paid out. Therefore, the player can watch with interest until the ball entering the storage device 600 enters one of the winning holes. Therefore, when the ball enters the storage device 600, the player can be more entertained.

In the present embodiment, the guide channel 607 is blocked by the reservoir valve 607a so that the spheres can be stored in the guide channel 607. It may be configured to store balls on the way of 607 . That is, an electromagnet is embedded in the inner wall portion of the guide channel 607, and is magnetized by energizing the electromagnet in a state other than the special game state (during the jackpot state). As a result, the spheres that first flowed into the guide channel 607 can be drawn to the location where the electromagnet is provided, and the downflow of the spheres can be stopped (the spheres can be stored at the position of the electromagnets). By configuring in this way, the space for burying the storage valve 607a can be reduced. Therefore, the storage device 600 can be made more compact. In this case, the width of the guide channel 607 is increased (for example, in FIG. 8, the branch member 604 and the reservoir valve 607a are removed), Electromagnets may be embedded only in the portion immediately below, and a general prize winning opening (large value winning prize opening) 602 may be provided directly below the portion in which the electromagnet is embedded. Furthermore, when there is a sphere that has been attracted by an electromagnet and has stopped flowing, the stopped sphere and other spheres come into contact with the electromagnet portion and the flowing direction is changed, so that the electromagnet is not embedded. It may be configured to flow down in a direction different from that of the general prize winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 . A general prize winning opening (small prize winning opening) 601 may be provided below a portion of the induction channel 607 in which the electromagnet is not embedded. As a result, the branching member 604 can be eliminated, so the number of parts of the storage device 600 can be reduced.

Also, in the present embodiment, one ball is stored in the upper portion of the storage valve 607a, but this is not a limitation, and two or more balls may be stored. Furthermore, when storing a plurality of balls, they may be stored in the vertical direction, or may be configured so that they can be stored side by side.

In the present embodiment, the balls are configured to be stored in the upper portion of the storage valve 607a, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a reservoir valve 607a may be provided at the upper end portion of the guide channel 607 so that balls cannot flow into the guide channel 607 when the reservoir valve 607a is closed. By adopting a configuration in which balls are not stored, even if the ball is hit to the right in a state other than the special game state (jackpot state), the ball can be ejected without remaining inside the storage device 600. - 特許庁

In particular, in the above-described first embodiment, the second ball entrance 640 is more likely to be opened in a high-probability state of special symbols that are given after the end of the jackpot or in a time-saving state of normal symbols. In addition, in the special symbol 2 lottery (lottery based on the start winning to the second entrance 640), compared to the special symbol 1 lottery (lottery based on the start winning to the first entrance 64), the game It tends to be a big hit B that is advantageous to the person. Therefore, when the player finishes winning the jackpot, the player hits the ball to the right to enter the ball into the second ball entrance 640 . Therefore, for example, when the time period of the normal symbol ends, the balls are stored in the storage device 600 with a high probability. As a result, the player may feel that the ball has been lost. On the other hand, by providing a storage valve 607a at the upper end of the guide flow path 607 so as not to store the balls in the storage device 600, it is possible to make the player feel that the balls have been used up without waste. . Therefore, it is possible to give satisfaction to the player.

In the present embodiment, the storage device 600 is provided with the general winning openings (small-value winning openings) 601 and 602 and the out-openings 603a to 603c, but the invention is not limited to this construction. For example, the second ball entry hole 640 may be arranged at the position where the general prize entry (high value prize entry) 602 is provided. That is, in the above-described first embodiment, the second ball entrance 640 provided on the right side of the variable display unit 80 in the path (channel) on the right side of the game board 13 is moved inside the storage device 600. may Further, in this case, as an opening condition of the storage valve 607a, for example, the storage valve 607a is configured to be opened when the lottery of the special symbols is executed 1000 times without becoming a big win after the big win. may

As a result, when the lottery for the special symbol is executed 1000 times after the end of the big win, the ball can be entered into the second ball entrance 640 by hitting to the right, so the special symbol 2. lottery can be executed. In the first embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when the ball enters the second ball entrance 640 is five. It is sufficient to configure so as to be That is, the number of balls that can enter the storage device 600 when hit to the right is 1 out of 3 balls. A ball can be made to enter the second ball entrance 640 at a rate of one ball in every three balls. That is, it is possible to receive the lottery for the special pattern 2 while maintaining the possession ball. By configuring in this way, even if the special symbol lottery is repeated without a big hit (so-called big hooking occurs), the game is played with the expectation that the storage valve 607a will be opened. can be done. Therefore, even if the period during which a big win does not occur becomes longer, the player's motivation for the game can be maintained. By increasing the number of prize balls to be paid out when the ball enters the second ball entrance 640 (for example, 10), the ball can be ejected simply by hitting the ball to the right after the storage valve 607a is opened. It may be configured to increase. By configuring in this way, it is possible to further increase the merit when the special symbol lottery is out of the lottery continuously 1000 times or more. Therefore, after the end of the big hit, it is hoped that it will be a big hit again with a small number of lotteries of special patterns, and if it continues to lose the lottery of special patterns, it will continue to lose the lottery of special patterns more than 1000 times in a row. I can make you wish. Furthermore, after the storage valve 607a is opened, the number of balls increases just by hitting to the right. It can make you want the condition to continue increasing for a long time. Therefore, depending on the number of special pattern lotteries, the player can be made to wish for a big hit of the special pattern or wish to keep losing the special pattern lottery, so that the player can be provided with novel game characteristics. can be done.

In this embodiment, the storage device 600 is configured to have only one storage valve 604a, but a plurality of storage valves 604a may be provided. Specifically, the downstream side of the induction channel 606 may be configured to branch into two directions, and a reservoir valve that is opened only during the special game state (during the jackpot state) may be provided in one of the channels. That is, a configuration similar to that of the guide channels 606 and 607 and the branch member 604 may be further provided downstream of the guide channel 606 . Then, downstream of the flow path on the side where the storage valve is provided, a general winning hole with a large number of prize balls (for example, 15) is provided, and the flow path without the storage valve has a small number of prize balls (for example, , 3) General winning openings may be provided. By configuring in this way, a larger number of balls can be stored in the storage device 600, so a special game state (jackpot state) is started, and each storage valve is opened, thereby storing It is possible to make the balls that have been thrown all at once flow down to a general winning hole with a large number of prize balls (for example, 15). Therefore, the number of prize balls that can be obtained in one big win can be increased. Further, instead of providing a plurality of storage valves inside the storage device 600 , a plurality of storage devices 600 may be provided in the path (channel) on the right side of the game board 13 . Even in the case of such a configuration, it is possible to increase the number of prize balls that can be obtained in one big win, as in the case of providing a plurality of storage valves.

In this embodiment, in the path (flow path) provided on the right side of the game board 13, a storage device 600 is provided downstream of the second ball entrance 640, and a first variable winning device is provided downstream of the storage device 600. 65 is provided, and the second variable prize winning device 650 is provided downstream of the first variable prize winning device 65, but the arrangement is not limited to this arrangement and may be an arbitrary arrangement. For example, the first variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 650 may be arranged upstream of the second ball entrance 640 . In the arrangement of the first embodiment, in the special game state (jackpot state), the ball launched to enter the first specific winning hole 65a or the second specific winning hole 650 first enters the second ball entering hole. 640, it may become difficult to enter the first specific winning hole 65a or the second specific winning hole 650a, but the first specific winning hole 65a or the second specific winning hole 650a may be difficult to enter. By arranging it on the upstream side, prize balls can be obtained more smoothly during the special game state (during the big win state).

Further, by arranging the first specific prize winning port 65a and the second specific prize winning port 650a on the upstream side, by arranging on the upstream side of the storage device 600, during the special game state (during the jackpot state), the storage device It is possible to prevent (suppress) a situation in which a ball enters at about 600 and becomes difficult to reach the first specific winning hole 65a or the second specific winning hole 650a. Therefore, each round during the special game state (during the jackpot state) can be progressed more smoothly.

In this embodiment, the first ball entrance 64 and the second specific ball entrance 640 are provided as entrances that trigger the lottery of special symbols, but either one may be eliminated. For example, the configuration may be such that the second ball entrance 640 is eliminated and the electric accessory 640 is provided for the first ball entrance 64 . As a result, the advantage of hitting the ball into the path (flow path) provided on the right side of the game board 13 in a state other than the special game state (jackpot state) is reduced, so the irregularity of hitting the ball aiming at the storage device 600. It is possible to more reliably prevent (suppress) the typical game method.

In this embodiment, in the special game state (jackpot state), when a ball flows into the storage device 600 (enters the ball), the ball enters the general winning hole (large value winning hole) 602 where many winning balls are paid out. In addition to this, in one special game state (jackpot state), the number of balls entering the general ball entrance 602 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. It may be configured to As a result, in the special game state (jackpot state), in addition to winning prize balls by winning the first specific prize winning port 65a and the second specific prize winning port 650a, it is possible to obtain extra prize balls. It is possible to make the player recognize whether or not the game has been completed. Therefore, since it is possible to make the player want to enter more balls into the general winning hole (high value winning hole) 602, it is possible to set a target for the number of entering balls. Note that the number of winnings to the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602 does not necessarily have to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and a dedicated display device may be provided separately. As a result, in the third symbol display device 81, the effect during the jackpot state can be executed in a wider display area.

In this embodiment, the number of winning balls paid out based on the entry (winning) of the ball into the first specific winning opening 65a and the number of winning balls into the second specific winning opening 650a are determined. The number of prize balls paid out based on the number of prize balls paid out based on the number of balls paid out based on the entry (winning) of balls into the general prize opening (high value prize opening) 602 is all the same number (15). , but not limited to these. For example, the number of prize balls paid out based on the balls entering (winning) the general prize winning port (high value prize winning port) 602 is divided into the first specific prize winning port 65a and the second specific prize winning port 650a. may be configured to be less than the number of prize balls paid out based on the number of winning balls (for example, 10). As a result, even if the ball only flows into the storage device 600 as a result of the ball traveling in a special game state (jackpot state), the disadvantage to the hole can be reduced.

Contrary to the above, the number of prize balls paid out based on the entry (winning) of balls into the general prize winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 is determined by the first specific winning opening 65a and the second specific winning opening 65a. It may be configured to be larger than the number of prize balls paid out based on the balls entering (winning) the prize opening 650a. Specifically, for example, the number of prize balls to be paid out by entering (winning) the first specific prize winning port 65a and the second specific prize winning port 650a is set to 10, and a general winning prize port (large value winning prize port) is provided. The number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters (wins a prize) into 602 may be fifteen. As a result, it is possible to increase the profit that the player can enjoy by allowing the balls to flow into the storage device 600 in the special game state (jackpot state), so that the player's interest in the jackpot game can be further improved. can.

In this embodiment, the storage valve 607a is opened based on the start of the jackpot, and the storage valve 607a is closed based on the end of the jackpot. is not limited to this. It may be set to be opened for a shorter period than in the present embodiment, or may be configured to repeat the open state and the closed state a plurality of times in a big win. For example, the storage valve 607a may be opened based on the interval period set between the rounds of the jackpot, and closed based on the end of the interval period. By limiting the period during which the storage valve 607a is set to the open state (released state) to the interval period, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the number of prize balls paid out in one big win from becoming too large. In other words, it is possible to prevent the number of prize balls paid out to the player from being varied in one big win, so that the sales of the pachinko machine 10 can be easily predicted. In addition, by opening the storage valve 607a during the interval period, a A portion of the spheres reaching downstream in the path (channel) can flow into the storage device 600 . In other words, a prize ball can be obtained by entering the ball into the general prize winning opening 602 even during the interval period. Therefore, balls are less likely to be wasted even during the interval period.

Further, in the present embodiment, the storage valve 607a is configured to be closed at the start of the ending effect of the big win, but it may be configured to be closed at the end of the ending effect. As a result, part of the balls remaining on the board can flow into the storage device 600 at the start of the ending effect. In other words, a prize ball can be obtained by entering the ball into the general prize winning opening 602 during the ending effect. Therefore, balls are less likely to be wasted during the ending effect. Furthermore, the retention valve 607a is kept open until a certain period of time (eg, 5 seconds) has passed since the ending production ended, and the retention valve 607a is closed after a certain period of time (eg, 5 seconds) has passed. It may be configured to switch between states. As a result, part of the balls remaining on the board can flow into the storage device 600 at the end of the ending effect. In other words, a prize ball can be obtained by entering the ball into the general prize winning opening 602 after the ending effect is completed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the balls from being wasted after the end of the ending effect.

In addition, when a game state different from the special game state (jackpot state) is set, the reservoir valve 607a is opened, and when the set game state is changed to another game state, the reservoir valve 607a may be closed. For example, it may be configured to open the storage valve 607a during the period in which the probability variation state of the special symbol is set. As a result, in the probability variable state of the special pattern, while receiving the lottery of the special pattern 2 that tends to be a big hit B by hitting to the right, the ball is sent to the general winning hole (large value winning hole) 602 with a large number of prize balls to be paid out. can be entered. Therefore, the variable probability state of the special symbols can be made more advantageous to the player. Moreover, when the time saving state of the normal pattern is set, the storage valve 607a may be configured to be opened. Basically, the time-saving state of normal symbols is a state in which there are few merits for the player compared to the variable probability state of special symbols, but it should be configured so that the storage valve 607a is opened during the time-saving state of normal symbols. , it is possible to prevent the player from being discouraged when the time saving state of the normal pattern is reached.

Further, instead of switching the state of the reservoir valve 607a according to the game state or the like, or in addition to switching the state of the reservoir valve 607a according to the game state or the like, the player can switch the reservoir valve 607a at any timing. It may be configured so that the state can be switched. As a result, each player can play the game with the state of the reservoir valve 607a according to his or her taste.

In this embodiment, the outlet is provided inside the storage device 600, but instead of the outlet, a prize winning outlet through which prize balls are dispensed may be provided. Also, the number of prize balls to be paid out may be varied by entering the balls into the respective prize winning openings. More specifically, for example, instead of the out port 603a, a prize winning port with 6 prize balls is provided, in place of the out port 603b, a prize winning port with 10 prize balls is provided, and in place of the out port 603c, a prize winning port is provided. may provide 12 winning openings. As a result, it is possible to more interestingly observe when the ball flows down the guiding channel 606 and to which winning opening the ball enters the guiding channel 607 . Also, a member such as a nail that can change the flow direction of the ball may be provided downstream of the guide channel 606 or the guide channel 607 so that the winning opening into which the ball enters is more random. . As a result, when the ball has flowed into the storage device 600, it is possible to more interestingly observe the whereabouts of the ball until the ball enters one of the winning holes. In addition, by providing a nail or the like, it is possible for the staff of the hall to set a ball entrance into which the ball can easily enter. Therefore, the ball output rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be adjusted on the hall side.

In this embodiment, the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 controls the opening and closing of the storage valve 607a, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 may control the reservoir valve 607a. More specifically, reservoir solenoid 610 may be electrically connected to input/output port 225 of audio ramp controller 113 . The storage valve 607a may be controlled to be switched to the open state when an opening command is received from the main controller 110, and may be controlled to be switched to the closed state when an ending command is received. Thereby, the processing load of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to execute without delay selection processing of variable effects, lottery processing of special symbols, etc., which are main processing related to the game.

In this embodiment, the reservoir valve 607a is set to the open state (released state) in the special game state (jackpot state), and the reservoir valve 607a is set to the closed state (storage state) in states other than the special game state (jackpot state). However, it is not limited to this. For example, the state of the storage valve 604a may be switched according to the elapsed time, the current time, the number of installation days, or the like. Also, it may be configured to switch based on the result of a lottery performed regularly or irregularly. For example, the storage 607a is basically configured to be in the closed state (storage state), and configured to execute a lottery as to whether or not to switch to the open state (released state) at a frequency of once per minute. good too. Moreover, when winning the lottery, the storage valve 607a may be configured to be opened for 10 seconds, for example. As a result, if the lottery is won and the ball can be made to flow into the storage device 600 with the storage valve 607a set to the open state (released state), the ball will enter the general prize winning port (large value winning prize port) 602. can be entered, the player can play the game expecting to win more lotteries. Further, the lottery probability of whether or not to set the storage valve 607a to the open state (released state) may be configured so that the hall clerk or the like can adjust the lottery probability. Thus, when a player selects one machine for playing a game from among a plurality of pachinko machines 10, the machine having a good lottery probability can be predicted and machine selection can be made. Therefore, since the pachinko machine 10 can be selected in consideration of habits, etc., when setting the lottery probability of the hole, the interest of the player can be improved at the stage of machine selection before starting the game. .

In the present embodiment, according to the type of jackpot, a jackpot (jack B) in which the second specific winning opening 650a is opened at a timing at which the ball is likely to enter the variable probability entrance 654 in the 12th round of the jackpot (jackpot B) and a variable probability entrance. A jackpot (jackpot A) in which the second specific winning port 650a is opened at a timing when it is difficult to enter the hole 654 is provided. It may be configured to suggest whether it is a jackpot type. For example, in each round from the 1st round to the 11th round of the jackpot, an effect may be performed in which an ally of justice and a monster fight. Then, if the ally of justice wins by the 11th round, a big win B is reported, and if the ally of justice is defeated, a big win A is reported. That is, when the ally of justice wins, the player can be made to recognize that it is a chance to shift to the variable probability state of the special symbols. This allows the player to more interestingly observe the result of the performance performed in the jackpot.

In addition, there are variations in the performance content, and the performance content that has a high degree of expectation that the allies of justice will win (easily selected in the case of jackpot B) and the high possibility that the allies of justice will be defeated (in the case of jackpot A) ) may be provided. For example, if the ally of justice attacks the enemy with a special move, or if the ally of justice evades the enemy's attack, the expectation of victory will be high, and the attack of the ally of justice will miss, The player may be configured to increase the possibility of being defeated when the enemy attacks with a special move. As a result, it is possible to predict not only the outcome of whether or not the ally of justice will win, but also the flow of presentation leading up to victory or defeat. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the jackpot game.

Note that the content of the production performed up to the 11th round is not limited to the above-mentioned presentation of the battle between the ally of justice and the monster, and can suggest an advantageous jackpot B and a more disadvantageous jackpot A than the jackpot B. Any form is acceptable. For example, the boy character 710 performs a treasure search effect, and if the treasure can be found by the 11th round, it may be configured so that a jackpot B is reported, or the boy character 710 may It is also possible to display an effect of eating a lot, and to notify that the big win B is given when all the provided food is eaten.

Since the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment is provided with a storage device 600 having a unique configuration that is not installed in general gaming machines, an effect is provided to explain the game characteristics related to this storage device 600. You can More specifically, for example, an image of the storage device 600 is displayed as a rear image, and the conditions for opening the storage valve 607a, the merits when it is opened, and the demerits when the ball is hit to the right in the closed state. may be configured to display an image (description image) that explains the As a result, the player can easily understand the playability. Further, the type of the back surface on which the explanatory image is displayed may be configured so that the type of the back surface can be switched by pressing (operating) the frame button 22 . As a result, a player who is accustomed to playing with the pachinko machine 10 and fully understands the game characteristics can change the back face type to one in which the explanation image is not displayed.

In the present embodiment, in the normal state (low-probability state of special symbols and normal state of normal symbols), right-handed hitting is performed, and when it is detected that the ball has entered the storage device 600, a right-handed warning image (See FIG. 5(b)) is configured to be displayed, but it may be configured not to display the right-handed warning image under predetermined conditions. For example, if the player is hitting to the right while no balls are stored in the upper portion of the storage valve 607a, the right-hand hitting warning image (FIG. 5(b)) is displayed until the ball is stored in the upper portion of the storage valve 607a. ) may be configured not to be displayed. When the balls are stored in the upper part of the storage valve 607a in the normal state, the special symbols are hit later, and when the storage valve 607a is set to the open state (released state), the upper part of the storage valve 607a. It is possible to immediately enter the ball stored in the general winning hole (high value winning hole) 602. - 特許庁Therefore, the ball paid out by entering the general winning hole (large value winning hole) 602 can be used as the ball used in the jackpot game. Therefore, even if the player runs out of balls in spite of the big win, the big win game can be played without borrowing new balls.

<Second embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 62 to 76. FIG. In the above-described first embodiment, the storage device 600 is provided upstream of the first variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 650, and is disposed inside the storage device 600 in the special game state (jackpot state). A prize ball can be obtained by entering a ball into a designated general prize winning hole (large value winning hole) 602.例文帳に追加In other words, in the special game state (jackpot state), in addition to the prize balls being paid out by entering the balls into the first specific winning hole 65a and the second specific winning hole 650a, the balls are moved to the storage device 600. It is configured such that prize balls are paid out by entering the balls. As a result, a large number of prize balls are paid out in the jackpot, thereby enhancing the player's interest in the jackpot game.

In addition, in the first embodiment, in a state (normal game state) other than the special game state (jackpot state), by closing the upstream of the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602 by the storage valve 607a, the ball is configured to make it difficult for the ball to enter the general prize winning opening (high value winning opening) 602, and to allow the ball to be stored in the upper portion of the storage valve 607a. When there is a ball stored inside the storage device 600 in the normal game state, the stored ball can interfere (contact) with another ball that has newly flowed into the storage device 600. It was configured as Then, when interference (contact) with the stored balls occurs, the flowing direction of the balls newly flowing into the storage device 600 is the direction of the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601 where the number of winning balls is small. (the direction of the induction channel 606). As a result, by hitting the ball to the right with the aim of winning the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602 of the storage device 600 in the normal game state, it is an irregular game that tries to increase the number of balls held without going through a big win. It was configured so that the game method would be fundamentally untenable.

On the other hand, in the second embodiment, a storage device 700 is provided instead of the storage device 600 in the first embodiment. Whether or not the ball is stored in the storage device 700 can be switched by the player's operation. In addition, when the ball is stored in the storage device 700, it is configured to provide two flow paths through which the ball can flow down. , so that the sphere can flow into either channel.

Furthermore, in the second embodiment, there are a winning opening into which the ball is easily entered when the ball is not stored (a state in which the storage valve 704a is opened), and two flow paths in which the ball is stored in the storage valve 704a. The two types of prize-winning holes respectively provided downstream of are constructed so that the numbers of prize balls to be paid out are different. That is, there are two types of winning openings that can be won when balls are stored in the storage valve 704a, one of which is a winning opening with a large number of winning balls paid out, and the other is a winning opening with a small number of paid out winning balls. It is configured as follows. Also, the prize winning opening in which the ball can win when the storage valve 704a is open is configured to be intermediate between the above two types of payout numbers. That is, switching between a state in which balls can enter both a winning hole with a large number of prize balls and a winning hole with a small number of prize balls, and a state in which an average payout can be stably received by causing balls to flow into the storage device 700. can be done. Therefore, it is possible to switch the playability when the ball is made to flow into the storage device 700 according to the player's preference, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

The pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment differs in configuration from the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment in that the first variable winning device 65 is arranged below the first ball entrance 64, 2. The point that the variable winning device 650 is abolished, the point that the storage device 700 is provided instead of the storage device 600, and the release button 800 for changing the state of the storage valve 704a to the open state by the operation of the player is provided. the configuration of the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 is partially changed; the configuration of the RAM 223 of the audio lamp controller 113 is partially changed; A part of the process is changed from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment, and a part of the process executed by the MPU 221 of the sound ramp control device 113 is changed from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. be. Other configurations, other processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, and various processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are described in It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in one embodiment. Hereinafter, elements that are the same as those of the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, referring to FIG. 62, the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 62, in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, a first variable winning device 65 is provided below the first ball entrance 64. As shown in FIG. Further, the second variable winning device 650 provided in the path (channel) on the right side of the game board 13 in the first embodiment is eliminated. The first specific prize winning opening (first large open opening) 65a is configured to be opened in all the rounds of the jackpot. That is, in the special game state (jackpot state), by hitting left, the ball can enter the first specific winning hole (first large open hole) 65a.

In addition, in the second embodiment, a storage device 700 is provided in the path (channel) on the right side of the game board 13 . In this storage device 700, the number of nails around the entrance is smaller than that of the storage device 600 of the first embodiment. It is configured to be less than 600 (eg, 1 ball in 10). Details of the storage device 700 in the second embodiment will be described later with reference to FIGS. 64 to 66. FIG.

Next, with reference to FIG. 63, images displayed on the third symbol display device 81 of the pachinko machine 10 in this embodiment will be described. FIG. 63 shows an image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the probability variable state of the special symbols or the time-saving state of the normal symbols (the period during which the player does not lose even if the player hits to the right). It is a diagram. FIG. 63(a) shows the display content when the release button 800 is not pressed (state in which the storage valve 704a is not opened), and FIG. 63(b) shows the display when the release button 800 is pressed. It shows the display content in the state (state in which the storage valve 704a is open).

As shown in FIG. 63(a), when the release button 800 is not pressed (operated) by the player, the boy character 710 in the first embodiment (see FIG. 5 ( (Refer to Ds2 of a)), the text "Press the button to open the gate!" is displayed. By displaying this character, the player can press the release button 800 (button) to open the storage valve 704a (gate) provided in the storage device 700. can be easily recognized. In addition, since the display contents in the display areas other than the small area Ds2 are the same as the variable probability state of the special symbol and the time saving state of the normal symbol in the first embodiment, the detailed name description thereof is omitted.

Further, as shown in FIG. 63(b), when the release button 800 is pressed (operated) by the player, the characters "gate open" are displayed in the small area Ds2. This makes it possible to easily recognize that the storage valve 704a (gate) provided in the storage device 700 is in the open state.

Next, the details of the storage device 700 in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 64 to 66. FIG. First, FIG. 64 is a front view of a storage device 700 in the second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 64, the storage device 700 is provided with a guide channel 707 for flowing down the spheres that have flowed in from the top thereof, and three channels are provided downstream of the guide channel 707. (the downstream of the guide channel 707 branches into three directions). Specifically, a guide channel 706 for causing the inflowing sphere to flow down in the lower left direction when viewed from the front, a guide channel 704 for causing the ball to flow downward when viewed from the front, and a guide channel 704 for causing the ball to flow downward in the lower right direction when viewed from the front. A guide channel 708 is provided for. As shown in FIG. 64, the peg 709a and the peg 709b are provided downstream of the guide channel 705, so that the ball was shifted to the right or left while flowing down the guide channel 705. However, by passing between the nails 709a and 709b, the flowing direction of the ball can be corrected toward the center. Therefore, the spheres that have flowed down the guide channel 705 are more likely to flow into the guide channel 704 provided on the downstream center side of the guide channel 705 .

Downstream of the guide channel 706, there is provided a general prize winning opening (large value winning prize opening) 702 with a relatively large number of awarded balls (for example, 6). In addition, downstream of the induction path 704, there is a general prize winning opening (middle value winning opening) 701 with a smaller number of prize balls (for example, three) than the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 702. is provided. Furthermore, as the ball entry openings other than the general prize winning opening (medium value winning opening) 701 and the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 702, there are outlet openings 703a to 703e from which prize balls are not paid out even if a ball enters the ball. is provided. Then, the game ball that has flowed down the guide channel 708 enters the out port (small value winning port) 703d or the out port (small value winning port) 703e, so when the ball flows down the guide channel 708 In addition, there is no merit for the player at all. A ball that has flowed down the induction channel 706 but has not entered the general prize winning opening (large value winning opening) 702 is ejected to the outside by entering the out opening 703a or the out opening 703b. be done. Also, a ball that has flowed down the guiding channel 704 but has not entered the general winning opening (middle value winning opening) 701 is discharged to the outside by entering the out opening 703b or the out opening 703c. be done. These out ports 703a to 703c prevent (suppress) the balls from accumulating below the storage device 700 even if the balls move irregularly due to vibration or the like, and discharge the balls reliably. can be done.

The guide channel 704 is provided with a reservoir valve 704a. Similar to the reservoir valve 607a in the first embodiment, the reservoir valve 704a, by closing the guiding flow path 704, stores one ball, which has flowed into the reservoir device 700 after the closure, in the upper part of the reservoir valve 704a. be able to. Unlike the reservoir valve 607a in the first embodiment, the reservoir valve 704a is configured so that the closed state can be released (set to the open state) by the player's operation of the release button 800 (see FIG. 67). It is When the ball is stored in the upper part of the storage valve 704, the flowing direction is changed by the impact caused by the interference (contact) between the ball flowing into the storage device 700 and the stored ball. This change (switching) of the flow direction will be described in detail with reference to FIG.

FIG. 65 is a diagram showing the trajectory (downward direction) of a ball that has flowed (entered) into the storage device 700 in a state where the storage valve 704a is closed. First, with reference to FIG. 65(a), a case where a ball that interferes (contacts) with a stored ball repels to the left side in front view due to the impact of the interference will be described.

As shown in FIG. 65(a), when the ball that has flowed (entered) into the storage device 700 interferes (contacts) with the ball stored in the upper portion of the storage valve 704a and is repelled leftward in front view, The spheres flow into the guide channel 706 and down the guide channel 706 . Here, since a general prize winning opening (large value winning opening) 702 is provided downstream of the induction path 706, a relatively large amount of balls enter the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 702. (For example, 6) prize balls are paid out. Therefore, if the ball rebounds to the right, it is to the player's advantage.

Next, with reference to FIG. 65(b), a case where a sphere that interferes (contacts) with a stored sphere repels to the right in front view due to the impact of the interference will be described. As shown in FIG. 65(b), when the ball that has flowed (entered) into the storage device 700 interferes (contacts) with the ball stored in the upper portion of the storage valve 704a and repels rightward in front view, The spheres enter the guide channel 708 and flow down the guide channel 708 . Here, since the out-ports (small value prize-winning ports) 703d and 703e are provided downstream of the guide channel 708, the ball enters either one of the out-ports. In other words, if the ball rebounds to the right side in front view, the prize ball is not paid out, so there is no merit for the player.

In this way, when the storage valve 704a is closed, the number of prize balls (game value) obtained by the player varies depending on the direction in which the ball that has flowed (entered) into the storage device 700 repels. Therefore, when a ball flows (enters) into the storage device 700, it is expected that the ball will repel leftward in the front view due to interference (contact) with the ball stored in the upper part of the storage valve 704a. You can play games. That is, since it is possible to more interestingly confirm the flowing direction (repulsive direction) of the ball that has flowed (entered) into the storage device 700, the player's interest in the game can be improved. In addition, since the direction in which the ball is likely to repel changes depending on the momentum of the ball, the angle of entry into the storage device 700, and the adjustment of the nails 709a and 709b, the ball is likely to repel the guide channel 706 for the player. You can devise how to hit so that it becomes. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved. Also, when selecting the pachinko machine 10 for playing a game, the pachinko machine 10 which allows the balls to easily enter the general prize winning opening (large value winning opening) 702 is selected in consideration of the adjustment condition of the nails 709a and 709b. can be done. Therefore, at the stage of selecting the pachinko machine 10 before starting the game, it is possible to give the player the pleasure of searching for the pachinko machine 10 that seems to be advantageous to him/herself.

Next, with reference to FIG. 66, the operation when a ball flows (enters) into the storage device 700 while the storage valve 704a is set to the open state will be described. As the spheres enter reservoir 700 , they first flow down guiding channel 705 . On the downstream side of the guide channel 705, a nail 709a and a nail 709b are provided on the left and right (see FIG. 66). However, by passing between the nails 709a and 709b, the flowing direction of the ball can be corrected toward the center. Therefore, the sphere that has flowed down the guide channel 705 flows into the guide channel 704 provided downstream of the guide channel 705 on the center side.

When the storage valve 704a is open, the ball can flow down the guide channel 704, so the ball that has flowed into the guide channel 704 will flow down the guide channel 704 and enter the general winning opening (middle Enter the ball into the value winning opening) 701. As a result, a smaller number (for example, three) of prize balls than the number of prize balls entered into the general prize winning opening (large value winning opening) 702 is paid out.

Thus, in the state where the storage valve 704 a is open, the ball that has flowed into the storage device 700 enters the general winning opening (middle value winning opening) 701 . That is, the flowing direction is not changed by the repulsion and the water does not flow into the guide channel 706 or the guide channel 708 . That is, the ball cannot be entered into the general prize winning opening (large value winning opening) 702 from which a large number of winning balls can be obtained, but the ball enters the out openings (small value winning openings) 703d and 703e. There is no possibility that the prize ball will not be obtained. Therefore, when a ball is entered into the storage device 700, a prize ball can be obtained stably, so that the player can have a sense of security.

Further, in this embodiment, the player operates the release button 800 (see FIG. 67), so that the storage valve 704a can be set to the open state while the operation is being performed. That is, by keeping the storage valve 704a in a closed state, there is a possibility that the ball will enter any of the general prize winning opening (large value winning prize opening) 702 and the out openings (small value winning prize openings) 703d and 703e. It can be a state (highly gambling state where there is a possibility that many prize balls can be obtained, but there is also a possibility that prize balls cannot be obtained). In addition, by setting the storage valve 704a to the open state, the ball that has flowed into the storage device 700 can be entered into the general winning opening (middle value winning opening) 701 (a small amount but stably It is possible to obtain a prize ball). Therefore, depending on whether or not the release button 800 (see FIG. 67) is operated, the game characteristics of the pachinko machine 10 can be switched by the player, so that each player can select the game characteristics that suit his/her taste. You can play the game by

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the second embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 67 and 68. FIG. The electrical configuration of the second embodiment differs from the electrical configuration of the first embodiment in that the content of the first hit random number table 202b in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 is changed, and the configuration of the RAM 203 is the same. , the release button 800 is electrically connected to the input/output port 205 of the main controller 110, and the configuration of the RAM 223 of the audio lamp controller 113 is partially changed. They are different in that respect. Other electrical configurations are the same as those in the first embodiment, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 67, release button 800 is electrically connected to input/output port 205 . The release button 800 is arranged at a position (for example, around the frame button 22) where the player can arbitrarily press (operate) it. When the player presses (operates) the release button 800 , a signal (press detection signal) for notifying the MPU 201 that the press has been detected is output to the input/output port 205 . The MPU 201 of the main controller 110 controls the retention device solenoid 610 to open the retention valve 704a based on this depression detection signal. That is, the storage device solenoid 610 is turned on.

Next, the first win type selection table 202b provided in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 68(a). This first hit type selection table 202b is a data table in which determination values for determining the jackpot type are stored, like the first hit type selection table 202b in the first embodiment.

In addition, in the first hit type selection table 202b in the present embodiment, the determination value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined in association with only each jackpot type. That is, unlike the first embodiment, regardless of whether the special symbol 1 lottery results in a big hit or the special symbol 2 lottery results in a big hit, the same value of the first winning type counter C2 is the same. A jackpot type is associated.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 68(a), the value of the first winning type counter C2 is defined in the range of "0 to 49" in association with the jackpot C (FIG. 68(a) ) at 202b1). Incidentally, this jackpot C is a jackpot in which the special game state (jackpot state) continues for 15 rounds. In addition, after the jackpot C is completed, a time-saving state of normal symbols is provided as an added value (shift to a low-probability state of special symbols and a time-saving state of normal symbols). Further, the time-saving state of the normal symbols provided after the end of the jackpot C continues until the lottery of the special symbols is completed 100 times.

On the other hand, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined in the range of "50 to 99" in association with the jackpot D (see 202b2 in FIG. 68(a)). It should be noted that this jackpot D is a jackpot in which the special game state (jackpot state) continues for 15 rounds. Further, after the jackpot D is completed, a special symbol definite variable state of the special symbol is provided as an added value (shift to a special symbol definite variable state). In addition, the probability variation state of the special symbols given after the end of the big win D continues until the next big win.

Thus, in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, the game state after the end of the big win is predetermined according to the type of the big win won. That is, a more general configuration than the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment is adopted. In connection with this, in 2nd Embodiment, the defined content of the 1st winning classification selection table 202b is changed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 68(b), the defined contents of the RAM 203 in the second embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 68(b), the RAM 203 in the second embodiment includes a variable probability setting flag 203h, a variable probability passage counter 203i, a winning number counter 203j, an operation counter 203k, and a remaining ball, which were provided in the RAM 203 in the first embodiment. The timer flag 203m, the remaining ball timer 203n, the variable probability effective flag 203o, the variable probability effective timer 203p, and the discharge number counter 203q are deleted. This is because these configurations are provided in relation to determining whether or not the second specific winning device 650 should shift to the variable probability state of the special symbol after the end of the jackpot. That is, in the present embodiment, depending on the type of jackpot, the game state to be set in advance at the end of the jackpot is determined, and during the special game state (during the jackpot state), it is determined whether or not to shift to the probability variable state of the special symbol. Since no determination is made, there is no need to use each of the above configurations in this embodiment.

Further, as shown in FIG. 68(b), the RAM 203 in the second embodiment is provided with a release flag 203s. This release flag 203s indicates whether the player has pressed (operated) the release button 800 and the storage valve 704a has been set to the open state (whether or not the state in which balls can be stored in the upper portion of the storage valve 704a has been released). or). The release flag 203s is set to ON when the state of the storage valve 704a is switched from the closed state to the open state (see S4008 in FIG. 71). On the other hand, when the state of the storage valve 704a is switched from the open state to the closed state, it is set to OFF (see S4004 in FIG. 71).

Next, referring back to FIG. 67, the configuration of the RAM 223 in the audio ramp control device 113 in the second embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 67, in the RAM 223 of the present embodiment, the winning number counter 223j provided in the RAM 223 of the first embodiment is abolished, and a storage state flag 223k and a flow time counter 223k are added. there is

The storage state flag 223k is a flag that indicates whether or not the storage valve 704a is set to the open (released) state. If the storage state flag 223k is on, it indicates that the storage valve 704a is closed and the balls can be stored in the upper portion thereof. On the other hand, if the storage state flag 223k is off, it indicates that the storage valve 704a is set to the open (released) state, and the ball can flow down the guide channel 704. FIG. This storage state flag 223k is updated to a value corresponding to the storage state indicated by the command each time a storage state command is received from main controller 110 (see S1922 in FIG. 72). The sound lamp control device 113 determines the setting of the reservoir valve 704a based on the reservoir state flag 223k, and determines whether or not the reservoir valve 704a is abnormal.

The flow-down time counter 223k determines whether the ball that has flowed into the guide channel 704, the guide channel 706, or the guide channel 708 just before switching the state of the storage valve 704a It is a counter for counting the time until the ball enters the mouth 702, the out mouth 703d, or the out mouth 703e (ball throwing time). By counting the ball throwing period, the general winning opening (middle value winning opening) 701, the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 702, the out opening (small value winning opening) 703d, or the out opening (low value winning opening) 703d When a ball enters the winning hole) 703e, it can be determined more accurately whether the ball entering is a normal operation. This flowing time counter 233k is set to a counter value corresponding to 1 second each time a storage state command is received from main controller 110 (see S1923 in FIG. 72). Also, it is decremented by 1 each time the main process (see FIG. 42) of the sound lamp control device 113 is executed.

In this embodiment, in a state where the storage valve 704a is closed, the ball enters the general prize winning port (middle value prize winning port) 701 provided downstream of the storage valve 704a, or the storage valve 704a is opened. In this state, when the ball enters the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 702, the out opening (small value winning opening) 703d, and the out opening (small value winning opening) 703e, a warning image (Fig. 7 ( b) is configured so that cf. However, if the ball flows into the guide flow path 704 immediately before the storage valve 704a switches from the open state to the closed state, the ball will enter the general prize opening (medium value) after the storage valve 704a switches to the closed state. Winning hole) 701 may be entered. Similarly, if a ball flows into the guide channel 706 or the guide channel 708 immediately before the storage valve 704a switches from the closed state to the open state, the ball generally flows after the storage valve 704a switches to the open state. The ball may enter the winning opening (large value winning opening) 702, the out opening (small value winning opening) 703d, or the out opening (small value winning opening) 703e. In order to treat these as normal entries (not to display a warning image), in this embodiment, when the state of the storage valve 704a is switched, the flow-down time counter 233k is Sets the corresponding counter value. Then, until one second set as the counter value elapses, the ball is placed in the general winning opening (middle value winning opening) 701, the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 702, the out opening (small value winning opening) 703d, or It is configured to determine that the operation is normal (no warning image is displayed) when the ball enters the out hole (small value prize winning hole) 703e.

<Regarding the control process of the main controller in the second embodiment>
Next, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 69 to 71. FIG. In this embodiment, the contents of the main process (see FIG. 69) are changed from those of the first embodiment. Only the various processes executed in the main process (see FIG. 69) will be described below, and detailed descriptions of other processes that are not changed from the first embodiment will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 69, main processing executed by MPU 201 of main controller 110 in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 69 is a flow chart showing this main process. As in the first embodiment, the main processing of the game is executed in this main processing.

In the main processing (see FIG. 69) in the present embodiment, the main processing (see FIG. 34) in the first embodiment is replaced with the jackpot control processing (see FIG. 35), and the jackpot control processing 2 (see FIG. 70) is executed. Another difference is that after the second symbol display update process (S1007) ends, the storage control process (S1022) for setting the opening and closing of the storage valve 704a is executed. Another difference is that error command processing 2 (S1023) is executed instead of the error command processing (see FIG. 39) in the first embodiment. Other processes are the same as those in the first embodiment, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 70, the jackpot control process 2 (S1021) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in this embodiment will be described. FIG. 70 is a flow chart showing this jackpot control process 2 (S1021). This jackpot control process 2 (S1021) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 69), and when the pachinko machine 10 is in the special game state (jackpot state), execution of various effects according to the jackpot, This is a process for opening or closing the 1 specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a.

In each of S1101, S1102, S1104, S1105, and S1109 of this jackpot control process 2 (S1021), S1101, S1102, S1104, S1105, and S1109 of the jackpot control process (see FIG. 35) in the first embodiment are executed. Also, in the jackpot control process 2 in the present embodiment, the process of S1103 in the first embodiment (the process of setting the opening of the storage valve) is abolished. In the second embodiment, since the reservoir valve 704a is set to the open state based on the operation of the release button 800 by the player, the state of the reservoir valve 704a regardless of whether it is in the special game state (jackpot state) This is because the

Also, in the jackpot control process 2 in the present embodiment, when it is determined that it is time to start a new round by the process of S1105 (S1105: Yes), the first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a A release is set (S1121), a round number command indicating the number of rounds to be newly started is set (S1122), and this process ends. The round number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output processing (S1001) of the main processing (see FIG. 69) executed by the MPU 201, the sound lamp It is transmitted toward the control device 113 . When the audio ramp controller 113 receives the round number command, it extracts the round number from the round number command. Then, a display round number command corresponding to the extracted number of rounds is transmitted to the display control device 114 . When the display round number command is received by the display control device 114, the third pattern display device 81 starts a new round effect.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1105, if it is determined that it is not the time to start a new round (S1105: No), it is determined whether the condition for closing the first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a is met (S1123). ). Specifically, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses after opening the first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a, or when the first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a When a predetermined number (for example, 10) of balls wins after opening, it is determined that the closing condition is satisfied.

In the process of S1123, when it is determined that the condition for closing the first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a is established (S1123: Yes), the first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a is closed. It closes (S1124) and terminates this process. On the other hand, if the conditions for closing the first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a are not satisfied (S1123: No), it is determined whether it is time to start the ending effect (S1109). Specifically, when 15 rounds of the special game state (jackpot state) are completed, it is determined that it is time to start the ending effect.

In the processing of S1109, when it is determined that it is time to start the ending effect (S1109: Yes), first, an ending command is set (S1125). The ending command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 during the external output processing (S1001) of the main processing (see FIG. 69). It is sent towards device 113 . Upon receiving the ending command, the audio lamp control device 113 transmits a display ending command to the display control device 114 . When the display control device 114 receives the display ending command, the third symbol display device 81 starts the ending effect.

When the processing of S1125 ends, it is then determined whether or not the current big win is a big win D (probability variable big win) (S1126). No), 100 is set to the value of the time saving counter 203r (S1127), and this process is terminated. By setting 100 to the time-saving counter 203r, it is possible to shorten the time for the normal design until the lottery for the special design is completed 100 times after the end of the big win.

On the other hand, in the process of S1126, if it is determined that the current jackpot is a jackpot D (probability variation jackpot), set the probability variation flag 203g to ON in order to give the probability variation state of the special symbol after the end of the jackpot ( S1128), and the process ends. Also, in the process of S1109, if it is not the timing to start the ending (S1109: No), this process ends. That is, the winning process (S1111, see FIG. 38) and the abnormality process (S1112, see FIG. 39) in the first embodiment are not executed in the jackpot control process 2 of the present embodiment.

By making the jackpot control process 2 (see FIG. 70) different from the jackpot control process (see FIG. 35) in the first embodiment as described above, only one winning opening is provided during the jackpot. , The present invention can be applied to a pachinko machine (that is, a more general pachinko machine) in which the state after the end of the jackpot is predetermined according to the jackpot type.

Next, the storage control process (S1022) executed by MPU 201 of main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 71 is a flow chart showing this storage control process (S1022). This retention control process (S1022) is a process for setting the opening and closing of the retention valve 704a, as described above.

In the storage control process, first, it is determined whether or not the release flag 203s is on (S4001). This means that the state in which the ball can be stored has been released), and it is then determined whether or not the player has pressed (operated) the release button 800 (S4002). That is, it is determined whether or not the press detection signal has been detected.

In the process of S4002, if it is determined that the pressing (operation) of the release button 800 has been detected (that is, the pressing detection signal has been detected) (S4002: Yes), in order to keep the reservoir valve 704a open, This process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the depression (operation) of the release button 800 has not been detected (that is, the depression detection signal has not been detected) (S4002: No), the reservoir valve 704a is closed. Solenoid 610 is set to OFF (S4003). Then, in order to indicate that the storage valve 704a is set to be closed, the release flag 203s is set to OFF (S4004), and the sound lamp control device 113 is notified that the storage valve 704a is closed. Therefore, a storage state command corresponding to the closed state of the storage valve 704a is set (S4005), and this processing ends.

The stored state command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output processing (S1001) of the main processing (see FIG. 69) executed by the MPU 201, the voice lamp It is transmitted toward the control device 113 . When receiving the storage state command corresponding to the closed state, the sound lamp control device 113 outputs a display rear image change command for setting the rear face type corresponding to the closed state to the display control device 114 . The display control device 114 changes the back image based on the display back image change command. That is, as shown in FIG. 63(a), the small area Ds2 is set to display the characters "Press the button to open the gate!". As a result, the player can easily recognize that the retention valve 704a can be set to the open state by pressing the release button 800. FIG.

On the other hand, in the process of S4001, when it is determined that the release flag 203s is off (S4001: No), the storage valve 704a is closed (a state in which balls can be stored in the storage device 700 is set). Therefore, it is determined whether or not the player is pressing (operating) the release button 800 (S4006). That is, it is determined whether or not the press detection signal has been detected.

In the processing of S4006, if it is determined that the pressing (operation) of the release button 800 has not been detected (that is, the pressing detection signal has not been detected) (S4006: No), the storage valve 704a is kept closed. Therefore, this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the pressing (operation) of the release button 800 has been detected (that is, the pressing detection signal has been detected) (S4006: Yes), the storage device solenoid 610 is turned on to open the storage valve 704a. (S4007). Then, in order to indicate that the opening of the storage valve 704a has been set, the release flag 203s is set to ON (S4008), and the sound lamp control device 113 is notified that the storage valve 704a is in the open state. Therefore, a storage state command corresponding to the open state of the storage valve 704a is set (S4009), and this processing ends.

The stored state command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output processing (S1001) of the main processing (see FIG. 69) executed by the MPU 201, the voice lamp It is transmitted toward the control device 113 . When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the storage state command corresponding to the released state, it outputs to the display control device 114 a display back image change command for setting the back face type corresponding to the released state. The display control device 114 changes the back image based on the display back image change command. That is, as shown in FIG. 63(b), the small area Ds2 is set to display the characters "gate open". This allows the player to easily recognize that the storage valve 704a is in the open state.

By executing this storage control process, the opening or closing of the storage valve 704a can be set according to the operation status of the release button 800. FIG. As a result, at any timing of the player, by storing the balls in the upper part of the storage valve 704a, either the general winning mouth (large value winning mouth) 702 or the out mouth (small value winning mouth) 703d, 703e It is possible to switch between a state in which a crab ball enters and a state in which a ball that has flowed (entered) into the storage device 700 flows down toward a general winning opening (middle value winning opening) 701 .

<Regarding control processing of the sound ramp control device in the second embodiment>
Next, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 114 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 72 to 75. FIG. In this embodiment, the content of the command determination process (see FIG. 72) is partially changed from the command determination process (see FIG. 43) in the first embodiment. Only the command determination process (see FIG. 72) will be described below, and detailed description of other processes that are not changed from the first embodiment will be omitted.

FIG. 72 is a flowchart showing command determination processing (1811) in this embodiment. In this command determination process, the processes of S1901 to S1911 and S1913 to S1919 are the same as the processes of S1901 to S1911 and S1913 to S1919 of the command determination process (see FIG. 43) in the first embodiment. each is executed.

In addition, in the command determination process (see FIG. 72) in the present embodiment, when it is determined that the winning information command has been received in the process of S1911 (S1911: Yes), it is determined whether there is a malfunction such as a failure in the reservoir valve 704a. Then, a warning process is executed to issue a warning when a problem occurs (S1921), and this process ends.

Further, in the command determination processing (see FIG. 72) in this embodiment, when it is determined in the processing of S1916 that the ending command has not been received (S1916: No), it is then determined whether or not the storage state command has been received. It is determined (S1922). When it is determined that the storage state command has been received (S1922: Yes), the storage state flag 223k is updated according to the state of the storage valve 704a notified by the storage state command (S1923). Specifically, when the closed state (storage state) is notified as the state of the storage valve 704a, the storage state flag 223k is set to ON, and the open state (released state) is notified as the state of the storage valve 704a. In this case, the storage state flag 223k is set to OFF. In addition, when the storage state flag 223k is updated, the display of the third symbol display device 81 is also set by setting the back image (see FIGS. 63(a) and 63(b)) corresponding to the storage state after updating. Update content.

When the processing of S1923 is completed, a counter value corresponding to one second is set in the flow time counter 223l (S1924), and this processing is completed. By using the ball sweeping time set for the flow-down time counter 223l, it is possible to accurately determine whether or not there is a problem in the storage valve 704a. If it is determined in the process of S1922 that the storage state command has not been received (S1922: No), the process proceeds to S1919.

Thus, in the command determination process (see FIG. 72) in this embodiment, the state of the reservoir valve 704a is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in response to the release state command and the closed state command from the main controller 110. A command can be set to the display controller 114 to enable the display. This allows the player to easily recognize the state of the storage valve 704a.

Next, the warning process (S1921) executed in the command determination process (see FIG. 72) in the second embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This warning process (S1921) is, as described above, a process for determining whether or not there is a problem such as a failure in the reservoir valve 704a, and issuing a warning when a problem occurs.

In the warning process (S1921), first, it is determined whether or not the storage state flag 223k is on (S4101). It is determined whether or not (S4102). If it is determined that the value of the flow-down time counter 223l is 0 (S4102: Yes), it means that the retention valve 704a is set to the closed state (retention state) and the ball sweeping period has elapsed. Therefore, when the storage valve 704a is in the closed state (storage state), the storage time notification process is executed to notify the failure (S4103), and the process ends. Also, if it is determined in the process of S4102 that the value of the flow-down time counter 223l is not 0 (S4102: No), it means that the ball is now being swept away due to the closed state of the storage valve 704a. Therefore, the process of S4103 is skipped, and the present process ends.

Here, the details of the above-described retention time notification processing (S4103) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In the storage notification process (S4103), first, it is determined whether or not the notified winning information command includes the winning information corresponding to the winning ball into the general winning opening (middle value winning opening) 701 (S4201), If the winning information corresponding to the ball entering the general winning opening (middle value winning opening) 701 is not included (S4201: No), this processing is terminated.

On the other hand, if the winning information corresponding to the ball entering the general winning opening (middle value winning opening) 701 is included (S4201: Yes), the storage valve 704a is set to the closed state (storage state). Regardless, it means that the ball flows down downstream of the storage valve 704 a and enters the general winning opening (middle value winning opening) 701 . In other words, this means that the retention valve 704a is not normally closed even though the retention valve 704a is set to be closed. Therefore, an error command for display corresponding to the malfunction of the retention valve 704a is set (S4202). , the process ends.

The display error command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed during the command output processing (S1802) of the main processing (see FIG. 42) executed by the MPU 221. It is sent towards the controller 114 . In the display control device 114, by receiving this display error command, a warning image (see FIG. 7B) for notifying that the storage valve 704a is malfunctioning in the third pattern display device 81 is displayed. Is displayed. By displaying this warning image (see FIG. 7(b)), it is possible to easily make the player or hall clerk aware of the occurrence of the problem, so that the problem can be eliminated quickly.

Returning to FIG. 73, the description continues. In the process of S4101, if it is determined that the storage state flag 223k is not ON (that is, OFF) (S4101: No), it is determined whether or not the value of the flow time counter 223l is 0 (S4104), If it is determined that it is not 0 (that is, it is 1 or more) (S4104: No), this processing ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the flow time counter 223l is 0 (S4104: Yes), it means that the storage valve 704a is set to the open state (released state) and the ball sweeping period has elapsed. Therefore, in the open state (released state) of the storage valve 704a, the release time notification process for notifying the trouble is executed (S4105), and this process ends. This cancellation notification process (S4105) will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 75 is a flowchart showing the cancellation notification process (S4105). In this cancellation notification process (S4105), first, it is determined whether or not the received winning information command includes winning information corresponding to a ball entering the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 702 (S4301). , the winning information corresponding to the ball entering the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 702 (S4301: Yes), the process proceeds to S4303.

On the other hand, in the processing of S4301, if it is determined that the winning information corresponding to the ball entering the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 702 is not included (S4301: No), then the winning information command is output. Determining whether or not winning information corresponding to the ball entering the openings (small value winning openings) 703d and 703e is included (S4302), and corresponding to the ball entering the out openings (small value winning openings) 703d and 703e. If the winning information is not included (S4302: No), this process is terminated.

In the process of S4302, if it is determined that the winning information corresponding to the ball entering the out holes (small value winning holes) 703d and 703e is included (S4302: Yes), the process proceeds to S4303. If the winning information command includes the winning information corresponding to the ball entering the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 702 (S4301: Yes), or to the out opening (small value winning opening) 703d, 703e In the process of S4303 executed when the winning information corresponding to the winning ball is included (S4302: Yes), an error command for display corresponding to the malfunction of the storage valve 704a is set (S4303), and this process is executed. finish. When the storage valve 704a is set to the open state (released state), the ball that has flowed into the storage device 700 flows down the guide flow path 704, so the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 702 or the out The reason why the ball enters the openings (small-value winning openings) 703d and 703e is that there is a high possibility that the storage valve 704a is not normally opened.

The display error command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed during the command output processing (S1802) of the main processing (see FIG. 42) executed by the MPU 221. It is sent towards the controller 114 . In the display control device 114, by receiving this display error command, a warning image (see FIG. 7B) for notifying that the storage valve 704a is malfunctioning in the third pattern display device 81 is displayed. Is displayed. By displaying this warning image (see FIG. 7(b)), it is possible to easily make the player or hall clerk aware of the occurrence of the problem, so that the problem can be eliminated quickly.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment is provided with the storage device 700 capable of storing balls therein. This storage device 700 is provided with a plurality of flow paths (guiding flow paths 704, 706, 708) inside thereof, and is configured so that balls can flow down to different ball entrances. Further, the guiding channel 704 is provided with a reservoir valve 704a capable of closing the channel. When the guide channel 704 is closed by the reservoir valve 704a, one ball can be reserved (held) in the upper portion thereof.

In addition, when the storage valve 704a is open, the spheres flowing into the storage device 700 flow down the guide channel 704 (compared to the guide channels 706 and 708, the guide channel 704 is Since it is configured so that the ball can easily flow in), the ball can be entered into the general prize winning opening (middle value winning opening) 701 provided downstream of the guide channel 704 . Therefore, by causing the balls to flow into the storage device 700 , it is possible to stably receive the payout of prize balls based on the balls entering the general prize winning opening (middle value winning opening) 701 .

On the other hand, in a state where the storage valve 704a is closed and the balls are stored in the upper part thereof, the balls flowing into the storage device 700 interfere (contact) with the stored balls. Or repel in either direction of the guiding channel 708 . That is, by changing the flow direction due to repulsion, either a general prize winning opening (large value winning opening) 702 from which a large number of prize balls are paid out, or an out opening (small value winning opening) 703d or 703e from which no prize balls are paid out. Enter the ball into the crab. Therefore, the player can play the game while expecting the ball to enter the general prize winning opening (high value winning opening) 702 .

Here, some game machines such as pachinko machines are provided with a holding device for temporarily holding a ball hit onto a game board. Among these conventional gaming machines, there is one in which a reserved ball can be released onto the game board by the player's operation, and the ball can enter a predetermined winning hole provided in the direction of movement ( For example, JP-A-2003-190443).

However, the conventional gaming machine has a problem that it is difficult to improve the player's interest because the balls released from the holding device are simply entered into a predetermined winning hole.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, when the player operates the release button 800 (see FIG. 67), the storage valve 704a can be set to the open state while the operation is being performed. That is, by keeping the storage valve 704a in a closed state, there is a possibility that the ball will enter any of the general prize winning opening (large value winning prize opening) 702 and the out openings (small value winning prize openings) 703d and 703e. A state (highly gambling state in which many prize balls may be obtained, but there is also a possibility that the prize balls may not be obtained) can be set. In addition, by setting the storage valve 704a to the open state, the ball that has flowed into the storage device 700 can be entered into the general winning opening (middle value winning opening) 701 (a small amount but stably It is possible to obtain a prize ball). Therefore, depending on whether or not the release button 800 (see FIG. 67) is operated, the game characteristics of the pachinko machine 10 can be switched by the player, so that each player can select the game characteristics that suit his/her taste. You can play the game by Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be enhanced.

In the present embodiment, the state of the storage valve 704a is switched by the release button 800 at any timing of the player, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the state of the storage valve 704a may be switched according to the elapsed time, the current time, the number of installation days, or the like. As a result, each player can start playing a game while the storage valve 704a is in a state that matches his or her taste. Also, the state of the storage valve 704a may be switched based on the result of a lottery performed periodically or irregularly. For example, the storage valve 704a is basically configured to be in the closed state (storage state), and configured to execute a lottery to determine whether to switch to the open state (released state) once per minute. may

Further, when the lottery is won, the storage valve 704a may be opened for 10 seconds, for example. As a result, when the adjustment of the nails 709a and 709b makes it easier for the ball to enter the out ports (small value prize winning ports) 703d and 703e with the storage valve 704a closed, the ball is stored by lottery. The game can be played with the expectation that the valve 704a will be opened. On the other hand, if the adjustment of the nails 709a and 709b makes it easier for the ball to enter the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 702 with the storage valve 704a closed, the lottery continues to fail. The game can be played with the expectation that the reservoir valve 704a will continue to be closed. Further, the lottery probability of whether or not to set the storage valve 607a to the open state (released state) may be configured so that the hall clerk or the like can adjust the lottery probability. Thus, when a player selects one machine for playing a game from among a plurality of pachinko machines 10, the machine having a good lottery probability can be predicted and machine selection can be made. Therefore, since the pachinko machine 10 can be selected in consideration of habits, etc., when setting the lottery probability of a hole, the interest of the player can be improved at the stage of machine selection before starting the game. .

In the present embodiment, two types of flow paths, ie, the guide flow path 706 and the guide flow path 708, through which the ball can flow when the storage valve 704a is closed, are not limited to these. More flow paths and winning openings may be provided. Further, the number of prize balls paid out when the balls enter each winning hole may have more variations. As a result, when the storage valve 704a is closed, the randomness of the number of prize balls that can be obtained can be enhanced, so that the player can more interestingly observe the flowing direction of the balls entering the storage device 700. can be made

Also, a plurality of flow paths may be provided through which the ball can flow down when the storage valve 704a is open. Ball inlets may be provided through which different numbers of prize balls are dispensed when flowing down each channel. As a result, even when the reservoir valve 704a is open, the number of prize balls to be paid out can be given randomness. can be observed more interestingly.

In this embodiment, the storage device 700 is provided downstream of the second ball inlet 640, but the arrangement may be reversed. By providing the storage device 700 upstream, it is possible to make it easier for the balls to flow into the storage device 700 .

In this embodiment, only the first specific winning opening 65a is provided as the winning opening opened in the special game state (big hit state), but a plurality of winning openings may be provided as in the first embodiment.

In the present embodiment, the storage valve 704a is configured to be opened only while the release button 800 is being pressed (operated), but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the storage valve 704a may be set to the open state for a predetermined period of time (for example, 5 seconds) when pressing (operation) of the release button 800 is detected. In this case, the operation of the release button 800 may not be accepted during the predetermined period in which the storage valve 704a is open. This eliminates the need to keep pressing the release button 800 to keep the reservoir valve 704a open. Alternatively, the closed state (storage state) and the open state (released state) may be switched each time the release button 800 is pressed (operated). By configuring in this way, the number of operations performed by the player can be reduced because the release button 800 can be operated only when the state is to be switched. Moreover, contrary to the release button 800, an operating means for closing the storage valve 704a by operating it may be provided. Even with this configuration, each player can be allowed to select a game feature that matches his or her taste, as in the present embodiment.

In this embodiment, the state of the reservoir valve 704a is displayed in the small area Ds2 in the sub-display area Ds by characters, but the mode of notifying the player of the state of the reservoir valve 704a is limited to this. not a thing For example, depending on the state of the reservoir valve 704a, either a photographed image in which the reservoir valve 704a is open or a photographed image in which the reservoir valve 704a is closed may be displayed. Also, the display indicating the state of the storage valve 704a may be displayed in a display area other than the small area Ds2. Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the display indicating the state of the storage valve 704a is displayed as a rear image, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it may be configured to be displayed on the front side of the third symbol. Further, it may be configured to change the mode of the third symbol according to the state of the reservoir valve 704a and to recognize the state of the retention valve 704a according to the mode of the third symbol.

In this embodiment, the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 controls the opening and closing of the storage valve 704a, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 may control the reservoir valve 704a. More specifically, reservoir solenoid 610 may be electrically connected to input/output port 225 of audio ramp controller 113 . Then, the storage valve 704a may be controlled to be switched to the open state when the release state command is received from the main controller 110, and may be controlled to be switched to the closed state when the closed state command is received. Thereby, the processing load of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to execute without delay selection processing of variable effects, lottery processing of special symbols, etc., which are main processing related to the game.

Since the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment is provided with a storage device 700 that has a unique configuration that is not installed in general gaming machines, an effect is provided to explain the game characteristics related to this storage device 700. You can More specifically, for example, an image of the storage device 700 is displayed as a rear image, and an image (description image) explaining the conditions for opening the storage valve 704a and the advantages and disadvantages of the opening is displayed. It may be configured as As a result, the player can easily understand the playability. Further, the type of the back surface on which the explanatory image is displayed may be configured so that the type of the back surface can be switched by pressing (operating) the frame button 22 . As a result, a player who is accustomed to playing with the pachinko machine 10 and fully understands the game characteristics can change the back face type to one in which the explanation image is not displayed.

In the present embodiment, the first specific winning hole 65a is provided below the first ball entrance 64 in a front view so that the ball enters the first specific winning hole 65a when hit left-handed. It is not something that can be done. For example, the first specific prize winning port 65a may be provided downstream of the storage device 700 as in the first embodiment. As a result, the ball can flow into the first specific winning hole 65a and the storage device 700 only by hitting right in the special game state (jackpot state), so that the prize ball in the special game state (jackpot state) can be made to flow into the storage device 700. can do more. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's expectation for the big win.

In this embodiment, when the ball stored in the upper part of the storage valve 704a and the ball newly flowing into the storage device 700 interfere (contact), the flow path through which the newly flowing ball flows is It was designed to be random. In other words, in a state where the balls are stored in the upper portion of the storage valve 704a, the ratio of the balls newly flowing into the storage device 700 to be distributed to the guide channel 706 and the guide channel 708 is substantially the same. configured, but is not limited to this. For example, the width of the reservoir valve 704a is widened (for example, the width is 1.5 times the diameter of the sphere), and the sphere stored above the reservoir valve 704a is positioned to the right or to the left when viewed from the front. may be configured to obtain When the ball is arranged on the upper part of the storage valve 704a toward the left side in front view, the ball newly flowing into the storage device 700 is likely to collide with the right side of the stored ball. Therefore, the ball newly flowing into the storage device 700 is easily repulsed to the right side in the front view, and the ball easily flows down the guide channel 708 . As described above, out-ports (small-value prize-winning ports) 703d and 703e are provided downstream of the guide channel 708, so the player cannot win prize balls (which is disadvantageous for the player). . On the other hand, when the ball is arranged on the upper part of the storage valve 704a toward the right side in front view, the ball newly flowing into the storage device 700 is likely to collide with the left side of the stored ball. Therefore, the ball newly flowing into the storage device 700 is easily repelled to the left side in the front view, so that the ball easily flows down the guide channel 706 . As described above, the general prize winning port (large value winning prize port) 702 is provided downstream of the guide channel 708, so that the player can win a relatively large amount of prize balls (advantageous for the player). becomes). In this way, depending on the arrangement of the balls stored in the upper portion of the storage valve 704a, it is possible to create an advantageous state and a disadvantageous state for the player. You can be conscious of the arrangement of the spheres stored in the upper part of the . Therefore, if the arrangement of the ball is disadvantageous (that is, if the ball is stored on the left side in front view), the release button 800 can be pressed (operated) to open (release) the storage valve 704a. can. In addition, if the arrangement of the balls is advantageous (that is, if the balls are stored on the right side when viewed from the front), it is possible to make the player want to continue the game while maintaining the arrangement of the balls. . Therefore, it is possible to provide the enjoyment of judging whether or not to press the release button 800 according to the arrangement of the balls stored in the storage device 700, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

<Modified Example of First Embodiment>
Next, a modified example of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 76 to 85. FIG. In the above-described first embodiment, the state (open state or closed state) of the second specific winning port 650a and the state (open state or closed state) of the storage valve 607a provided in the storage device 600 are independent of each other. , and in the privilege game state (jackpot state), the reservoir valve 607a is always controlled to be in an open state, while the second specific winning port 650a is opened for a predetermined period in 12 rounds (Fig. 16 , the opening period defined for each jackpot type) was configured to be set to the open state only. In addition, two types of flow paths (a guiding flow path 652 and a guiding flow path 653) are provided inside the second variable winning device 650, and only when the ball flows down the guiding flow path 652, the guiding flow It was configured to be able to enter a variable probability entrance 654 provided downstream of the flow path 652 . In other words, even if the ball enters the second specific winning hole 650a during the big win, the ball does not flow down the guide channel 652 so as not to shift to the probability variable state of the special symbol after the big win. rice field.

On the other hand, in this modification, instead of the member for opening and closing the second specific winning opening 650a and the storage valve 607a of the first embodiment, a sliding member 900 is used to replace the second specific winning opening 650a and the storage valve. The state of the device 600 is configured to be switchable. That is, it is constructed such that the opening/closing operation of the second specific prize winning port 650a and the opening/closing control of the guide channel 607 in the storage device 600 can be performed by one member, and the states are switched in conjunction with each other. In other words, when the second specific winning opening 650a is opened, the guiding channel 607 (general winning opening 602) is also opened. ) are also configured to be closed. When configured in this way, both the second specific prize winning port 650a and the general prize winning port 602 (that is, the prize winning port opened during the big win by the slide member 900) are both the winning ports for obtaining prize balls during the big win. can be treated as

In addition, inside the second variable winning device 650, only the induction flow path 652 leading to the variable probability entrance 654 is provided, and the flow path switching valve 650d, the induction flow path 653, and the normal entrance 655 is obsolete. That is, if the ball can be entered into the second specific winning hole 650a, it is configured to shift to the probability variable state of the special symbol after the end of the big hit. In addition, it is configured to change the winning opening opened in the 12th round according to the type of jackpot. That is, in the 12th round, the second specific prize winning port 650a and the general winning prize port (large value winning prize port) 602 are set to the open state (V route open jackpot), and the first specific prize winning in all rounds of the jackpot. A jackpot (V-route closed jackpot) is provided in which the prize-winning port 65a is set to an open state (the second specific prize-winning port 650a and the general prize-winning port (high-value prize-winning port) 602 are not opened during the big win). It is

Along with these changes from the first embodiment, conditions for ending each round of the jackpot are also changed. Specifically, in the 1st to 11th rounds and the 13th to 15th rounds of the jackpot, the balls entered the first specific prize winning port 65a, the second specific prize winning port 650a, and the general winning port (high value prize winning port) 602. is 10 in total, or 30 seconds have passed since the start of the round, the round game ends (the first specific winning hole 65a is closed). Also, in the 12 rounds, the number of balls entering the first specific prize winning port 65a, the second specific prize winning port 650a, and the general prize winning port (high value prize winning port) 602 is 10 in total, or The round game ends (the second specific winning opening 650a and the general winning opening 602 are closed) when 30 seconds have passed since the start.

The pachinko machine 10 in the modified example of the first embodiment differs in configuration from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment in that a member for switching the state of the second specific winning opening 650a (closing portion 910) , the member (ball storage portion 920) for switching the state of the guide channel 607 is composed of one member (slide member 900), and the ball is paid out when it enters the second specific winning port 650a. The number of prize balls to be played is changed to 3 (15 in the first embodiment), the contents of the ROM 202 are partially changed, and the partial processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 is changed from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment, and part of the processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound ramp control device 113 is changed from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. Other configurations, other processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, and various processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are described in It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in one embodiment. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as in the first embodiment, and illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, referring to FIG. 76, regarding an example of an image (effect) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the 12th round of the V route open jackpot (jackpot F) in the pachinko machine 10 of the present modification. explain. As shown in FIG. 76, when the 12th round of the V route open jackpot (jackpot F) is reached, the characters "ROUND 12" are displayed in the display area 714 for displaying the number of rounds. In addition, a display area 717 for notifying that the second specific winning opening 650a has been opened is formed in the upper central portion of the third symbol display device 81 when viewed from the front. In this display area 717, the characters "CHANCE!!" and the characters "Probability change route open!!" are displayed. As a result, the player can easily recognize that by entering the ball into the second specific winning hole 650a, the game will shift to the probability variable state of the special symbols after the big win. Other display contents such as the boy character 710 are the same as those displayed in the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment (see FIG. 6A), so a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 77, the downstream configuration of the path (channel) provided on the right side of the game board 13 will be described. As shown in FIG. 77, on the downstream side of the path (flow path) provided on the right side of the game board 13, similarly to the first embodiment, the storage device 600, the first variable winning device 65, and the second A variable winning device 650 is provided. In addition, a member (closing part 910) for opening or closing the second specific winning port 650a of the second variable winning device 650, a member (ball storing part 920) for opening or closing the flow path of the storage device 600, and are arranged in a straight line. This is because the closure 910 and ball reservoir 920 are both part of the slide member, which will be discussed in more detail below.

In addition, a nail 921a and a nail 921b are provided at the entrance portion of the storage device 600. As shown in FIG. A hall clerk can adjust the rate at which balls flow into reservoir 600, for example, by adjusting pegs 921a, 921b before the hall opens. By changing the ratio of the balls flowing into the storage device 600, it is possible to change the number of balls entering the general prize winning port (high value winning port) 602 in the storage device 600 in the 12th round of the jackpot. can. Therefore, by adjusting the nails 921a and 921b so that the balls hit by hitting to the right easily flow into the storage device 600, it is possible to increase the number of prize balls that the player can obtain in the big win. Therefore, the player's sense of anticipation for the jackpot game can be further improved, and thus the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Conversely, by adjusting the nails 921a and 921b, when it is made difficult for the ball to flow into the storage device 600, the first specific winning port 65a provided downstream of the storage device 600 and the second It is possible to increase the number of balls that reach the specific winning opening 650a. Therefore, the jackpot can be digested more speedily. In addition, since it becomes easy to enter the ball into the second specific winning hole 650a in the 12th round, when the big hit F is achieved, it is possible to make it easy to shift to the probability variable state of the special symbol. Therefore, since the possibility of winning consecutive big wins in a short period of time increases, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

Incidentally, the structure for adjusting the easiness of the ball flowing into the storage device 600 (the easiness of the ball entering the second specific winning hole 650a) is not limited to the nail. For example, a windmill may be provided at the entrance of the storage device 600 so that the easiness of rotation can be adjusted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 78, the slide member 900 including the closing portion 910 and the ball storage portion 920 described above will be described. 78(a) and (b) are sectional views of the game board 13 taken along line LXXVIIb-LXXVIIb in FIG. 77, respectively. Here, the slide member 900 is configured to be slidably displaced toward the back side or the front side in a front view with respect to the game board 13, and by being slidably displaced toward the front side in a front view, the second specific player 900 can be slid to the front side. The winning opening 650a and the guiding channel 607 can be closed respectively. On the other hand, by sliding and displacing the slide member 900 to the rear side in front view with respect to the game board 13, the second specific prize winning opening 650a and the guide channel 607 can be opened.

FIG. 78(a) is a diagram of the game board 13 viewed from above when the second specific prize winning opening 650a and the guide channel 607 are closed by the slide members 900, respectively. On the other hand, FIG. 78(b) is a view of the game board 13 viewed from above when the second specific prize winning opening 650a and the guide channel 607 are open.

As shown in FIG. 78(a), the slide member 900 has a shape in which a substantially rectangular closing portion 910 and a ball storage portion 920 protrude from the right end portion and the left end portion of a substantially rectangular base portion 930 (substantially " U-shaped shape). The closing portion 910 and the ball storage portion 920 can be protruded toward the front side of the game board 13 or buried toward the back side of the game board 13 through openings 940a and 940b formed in the base plate 60, respectively. can do.

When the slide member 900 is slid to the front side in front view, as shown in FIG. 78(a), the closing portion 910 closes the upper portion of the second specific winning opening 650a, so that the ball is moved to the second variable position. It becomes impossible to make a ball enter inside the winning device 650 . Similarly, since the guide channel 607 is closed by the ball storage part 920, the ball can enter the general prize winning port (high value prize winning port) 602 provided downstream of the guide channel 607. become unable.

As shown in FIG. 78(b), when the slide member 900 is slid to the depth side of the game board 13, the upper portion of the second variable winning device 650 is opened, and the guide channel 607 is also opened. Therefore, by hitting the ball to the right, the ball can reach the general prize winning port (high value prize winning port) 602 provided downstream of the guide channel 607 or the second specific prize winning port 650a provided downstream of the storage device 600. can be entered.

Thus, in this modification, the switching of the state of the second specific winning hole 650a and the switching of the state of the guide channel 607 can be realized only by the slide member 900. FIG. Therefore, the processing load can be reduced compared to the case where the second specific winning port 650 and the reservoir valve 607a are separately controlled as in the first embodiment. That is, the processing load of the MPU 201 can be reduced. In particular, the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 executes important processes in the game, such as lottery of special symbols and determination of variable time. It will have a big impact on your game. On the other hand, in this modified example, the processing load of the MPU 201 can be reduced by introducing the slide member 900, so that the main processing in the game can be executed more reliably.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the modification of the first embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 79, the first winning type selection table 202b in this modified example will be described. As described above, in this modified example, when a ball enters the second specific winning hole 650 a , the ball always enters the variable probability ball entering hole 654 . As the types of jackpots, there are provided a jackpot in which the second specific prize winning opening 650 is opened in the 12th round and a jackpot in which the first specific prize winning opening 65a is opened in the 12th round.

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 79, the value of the first winning type counter C2 in the range of 0 to 49 is associated with the jackpot E (V route closing jackpot) (see 202b1 in FIG. 79). This jackpot E (V route closed jackpot) is a jackpot that gives a special game state of 15 rounds. It is a jackpot that is opened until 10 balls are entered. That is, in the special game state (jackpot state), the ball cannot be entered into the probability variable ball entrance 654 arranged inside the second variable winning device 650, so after the jackpot ends, the time saving state of the normal symbol is 100. given times.

On the other hand, the jackpot F (V route open jackpot) is associated with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of 50 to 99 (see 202b2 in FIG. 79). This jackpot F is a jackpot in which 15 rounds of special game conditions are awarded, and in the 12 rounds of the jackpot, the second specific prize winning port 650a and the general prize winning port (high value prize winning port) 602 are held for a predetermined time (30 seconds). or until 10 balls are entered), and in the 1st to 11th rounds and the 13th to 15th rounds, the first specific winning opening 650a is opened for a predetermined time (until 30 seconds have passed or 10 balls are entered). It is a jackpot that is opened until it hits the ball). In the jackpot F, the second specific prize winning port 650a is opened in the 12th round, so if the ball can be entered into the second specific prize winning port 650a in the 12th round, the special pattern is in a variable state of probability after the big win. is given. On the other hand, in the 12th round, the ball entered only the general prize-winning hole (high-value prize-winning hole) 602 in spite of the fact that the ball was not hit to the right or the ball was hit to the right. If the 12 rounds are completed without entering the ball, after the big hit F is completed, the time-saving state of the normal pattern is given 100 times.

<Regarding the control process of the main controller in the modified example of the first embodiment>
Next, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the modified example of the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 80 to 83. FIG. In this embodiment, the contents of the main process (see FIG. 34) are changed from those of the first embodiment. Specifically, instead of the jackpot control processing (see FIG. 35) executed in the main processing (see FIG. 34) of the first embodiment, the difference is that the jackpot control processing 3 (see FIG. 80) is executed. ing. Only the jackpot control process 3 (see FIG. 80) will be described below, and detailed descriptions of other processes that are not changed from the first embodiment will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 80, the jackpot control process 3 (S1031) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the modified example of the first embodiment will be described. FIG. 80 is a flow chart showing this jackpot control process 3 (S1031). This jackpot control process 3 is a process of setting the opening and closing of the first specific prize winning opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 650a for each round in the jackpot state.

In each of S1101, S1102, S1104, S1105, S1109, S1110, and S1112 of the jackpot control process 3, S1101, S1102, and S1104 executed in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 35) in the first embodiment , S1105, S1109, S1110, and S1112 are executed. Also, in the jackpot control process 3 (S1031), the processes of S1103, S1107, and S1108 that were executed in the jackpot control process (FIG. 35) in the first embodiment are abolished.

Furthermore, in the jackpot control process 3 (S1031), in the process of S1105, when it is determined that it is time to start a new round (S1105: Yes), the jackpot operation setting process in the first embodiment (see FIG. 36) Instead, a jackpot operation setting process 2 is executed (S1121), and this process is ended. Details of this jackpot action setting process 2 (S1121) will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 81 is a flow chart showing the above-described jackpot operation setting process 2 (S1121). This jackpot operation setting process 2 (S1121) is a process for setting the state (open state or closed state) of the first specific winning hole 65a and the second specific winning hole 650a.

Of this jackpot operation setting process 2 (S1121), each process of S1201 to S1203 and S1206 is the same as each process of S1201 to S1203 and S1206 in the jackpot operation setting process (see FIG. 36) of the first embodiment. process is executed.
In addition, in the jackpot operation setting process 2 (S1121) in this modification, if it is determined that it is the 12th round in the process of S1201 (S1201: Yes), then the jackpot type this time is the jackpot F (V route open It is determined whether it is a jackpot) (S1211).

If it is determined in the process of S1211 that it is not the jackpot F (S1211: No), it means that the jackpot E in which the first specific prize winning port (first large open port) 65a is opened in all the rounds of the jackpot. , the opening of the first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a is set (S1202), and the process proceeds to S1206.

On the other hand, if it is determined that it is a big hit F in the process of S1211 (S1211: Yes), it is a big win type that the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a opens only in the 12th round. The opening of the winning opening (second large opening) 650a is set (S1203). As described above, the closing portion 910 closing the second specific prize winning opening (second large opening) 650a is the same member as the ball storage portion 920 closing the guiding flow path 607 of the lottery device 600. (a part of the slide member 900), and the closing portion 910 and the ball storage portion 920 are slidably displaced in conjunction with each other. Therefore, by setting the opening of the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a by the processing of S1203, the guidance channel 607 inside the storage device 600 is also opened (that is, the general winning opening 602 is also opened). ).

After setting the opening of the second specific prize winning opening (second large opening) 650a and the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602 by the processing of S1203, the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a , and in order to notify the audio lamp control device 114 that the guide channel 607 has been set to the open state (released state), a storage state command corresponding to the open state (released state) is set (S1212). , the process proceeds to S1206. The stored state command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output processing (S1001) of the main processing (see FIG. 34) executed by the MPU 201, the voice lamp It is transmitted toward the control device 113 . Upon receiving the storage state command, the audio lamp control device 113 transmits a display rear image change command to the display control device 114 based on the storage state command. When the display back image change command is received by the display control device 114, the display area 717 is generated in the third pattern display device 81, and the characters "CHANCE !!" is displayed (see FIG. 76). By displaying these characters, it is possible for the player to easily recognize that it is a chance to shift to the probability changing state of the special symbols.

If the state is changed to the variable probability state of the special symbol, the big win is likely to occur again in a short period after the big win is finished, which is very advantageous for the player. Therefore, in the twelfth round of the big win F, the player can be made to launch the ball more seriously aiming at the second specific winning hole 650a. That is, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the big win from turning into a mere work for obtaining the prize ball, and to enjoy the game during the special game state (during the big win state).

As described above, the percentage of balls hitting the right-handed ball that reaches the second specific winning hole (second large opening) 650a is determined by the nails 921a and 921b ( 77) can be varied. For example, by adjusting the nail 921a to open to the right in front view, or adjusting the nail 921b to open to the left in front view (opening the nail), more right-handed balls flow into the storage device 600. easier to do. Therefore, the proportion of balls reaching the second specific winning opening 650a is relatively low. In other words, the more the nails 921a and 921b are opened, the more difficult it is for the ball to enter the second specific winning hole 650a in the 12th round of the big win F. Also, if 10 balls enter the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602 without being able to enter the ball into the second specific winning opening 650, the 12 rounds will end. . Therefore, it becomes difficult to shift to the probability variation state of the special symbol. It should be noted that when the ball easily flows into the storage device 600, it becomes easier for the ball to enter the general prize winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 with a larger number of winning balls paid out compared to the second specific winning opening 650a. (See FIG. 9(b)). As a result, the player can win a large amount of prize balls, and thus the player's interest in the big win can be enhanced.

Here, in most cases, in the 1st to 11th rounds, the player hits to the right aiming at the first specific winning hole 65a. The ball also flows into the storage device 600 provided. Therefore, one ball is stored in the upper part of the ball storing part 920 by the time the twelfth round starts. Therefore, when the 12th round starts and the slide member 900 is slid and displaced to open the upper portion of the general prize winning opening (large value winning opening) 602, the balls stored in the upper portion of the ball storage portion 920 are released into the general winning opening. It flows down to (large value prize winning opening) 602 . As a result, substantially, of the balls hit to the right in the 12th round, 9 balls enter the general winning hole (large value winning hole) 602, and the balls are sent to the second specific winning hole 650a. If the ball cannot be entered, the 12th round ends.

On the other hand, by adjusting the nails 921 a and 921 b closer to each other (closing the nails), it becomes difficult for a right-handed ball to flow into the storage device 600 . Therefore, the proportion of the balls reaching the second specific prize winning opening 650 is relatively high, so that in the 12th round of the big win F, it becomes easier for the ball to enter the second specific prize winning opening 650a. Therefore, after the end of the big hit, it becomes easier to shift to the probability variable state of the special symbol. As a result, after the end of the big win F, the big win is likely to occur again in a short period of time, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In this way, by changing the easiness of the ball entering the storage device 600 when hitting to the right, the ball is moved to the second ball entrance 650a provided downstream of the entrance portion of the storage device 600. You can change the ease of entering the ball. Therefore, it is possible to change the playability when the jackpot F is achieved simply by adjusting the nails 921a and 921b by the hall clerk. In other words, it is difficult to enter the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602, and the game property that easily shifts to the probability variable state of the special symbol, and easy to enter the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602, 12 It is possible to switch between a game property in which it is easy to acquire many prize balls in the first round, but a game property in which it is difficult to shift to a probability variable state of special symbols. Therefore, the performance of the pachinko machine 10 can be easily changed according to the business policy of the hall.

Returning to FIG. 80, the description continues. In the process of S1109 of the jackpot control process 3, if it is determined that it is not the start timing of the ending effect (S1109: No), then the winning process (S1111) executed in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 35) in the first embodiment ), the winning process 2 is executed (S1122), and the process proceeds to S1112. The details of this winning process 2 will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 82 is a flow chart showing the winning process 2 (S1122) executed by the MPU 201 in the jackpot control process 3 (see FIG. 80) in this modification. Of this winning process 2 (S1122), the processes of S1401 to S1405 and S1408 to S1420 are the same as the processes of S1401 to S1405 and S1408 to S1420 in the winning process of the first embodiment (see FIG. 38). process is executed.

In addition, in the winning process 3 (S1122) in this modification, the value of the winning number counter 203j becomes 10 or more in the process of S1404 (that is, the first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a, the second specific (S1404: Yes), or round time When it is determined that (30 seconds from the start of the round) has passed (S1405: Yes), one of the open winning openings (first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a, or second specific winning opening A winning opening closing process for setting closing of the winning opening (second large opening) 650a and the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602) is executed (S1431), and the process proceeds to S1408. This winning opening closing process (S1431) will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 83 is a flow chart showing the winning opening closing process (S1431). This winning opening closing process (S1431) is a process of setting closing of the winning opening when conditions for closing the winning opening are satisfied in each round of the jackpot.

In this winning opening closing process (S1431), first, it is determined whether or not the present is the 12th round (S4401). If it is not the 12th round (S4401: No), it means that the currently open winning opening is the first specific winning opening (first large open opening) 65a. 1 (large opening) 65a is set to be closed (S4402), and the process ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of S4401, if it is determined that the current round is the 12th round (S4401), since the winning openings that are open are different rounds depending on the type of jackpot, the jackpot this time is the jackpot F (V route It is determined whether it is an open jackpot) (S4403). Then, if it is determined that it is not a jackpot F (V route open jackpot) (that is, it is a jackpot E (V route closed jackpot)) (S4403: No), the currently opened prize gate is the first specific prize gate ( 650a, the process proceeds to S4402 to set the closing of the first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a (S4402), and this process is executed. finish.

In the processing of S4403, if it is determined that the current jackpot is the jackpot F (V route open jackpot) (S4403: Yes), the second specific winning opening (second large opening opening) 650a is opened only in the 12th round. This means that the second specific winning opening (second large opening opening) 650a and the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602 are currently open. Therefore, in this case, the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a and the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602 are set to be closed (S4404), and the second specific winning opening (second large opening) In order to notify the voice lamp control device 113 that the opening 650a and the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602 are closed, set a retention state command corresponding to the closed state (retention state) ( S4405), this process ends.

The stored state command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S1001) of the main process executed by the MPU 201 (see FIG. 34), It is transmitted toward the control device 113 . Upon receiving the storage state command, the audio lamp control device 113 transmits a display rear image change command to the display control device 114 based on the storage state command. When the display back image change command is received by the display control device 114, the display area 717 displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is erased. As a result, the player can easily recognize that the chance of shifting to the variable probability state of the special symbols has ended.

By executing this winning opening closing process (S1431), the opened winning opening can be accurately closed.

<Regarding the control process of the sound lamp control device in the modified example of the first embodiment>
Next, control processing executed by MPU 221 of audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 84 and 85. FIG. In the pachinko machine 10 of this modified example, the contents of the command determination process are partially changed from the command determination process (see FIG. 43) in the first embodiment. More specifically, each of S1921 to S1923 in the command determination process of the second embodiment (see FIG. 69) is performed in order to execute the process for receiving the storage state command output from main control device 110 in the jackpot. Execute the process. Since the processing content itself is the same as the command determination processing (see FIG. 69) in the second embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted. Further, in the command determination process in this modified example, instead of the error notification process (see FIG. 44) in the first embodiment, error notification process 2 (S1971) is executed. This error notification process 2 (S1971) will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 84 is a flow chart showing the error notification process 2 (S1971) described above. In the error notification process 2 (S1971), the processes of S1931 to S1934, S1936, and S1937 are the same as the error notification process (see FIG. 44) in the first embodiment. Further, in the error notification process 2 (S1971) in this modified example, when it is determined that the value of the allowable time counter 223i is 0 in the process of S1934 (S1981), the winning time notification process in the first embodiment (FIG. 45 ), instead, the hit time notification process 2 is executed (S1981), and this process is terminated. This winning time notification process 2 (S1981) is, like the winning time notification process (see FIG. 45) in the first embodiment, a process for performing notification when a problem occurs in the storage valve 607a during the big win. is.

Next, with reference to FIG. 85, the above-described winning time notification process 2 (S1981) will be described. In the winning notification process 2 (S1981), first, it is determined whether or not the storage state flag 223k is ON (S1991). In the processing of S1991, if it is determined that the storage state flag 223k is ON (S1991: Yes), then it is determined whether the value of the flow time counter 223l is 0 (S1992), and the counter value is 0. If not (S1992), this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1992, if it is determined that the value of the flow-down time counter 223l is 0 (S1992: Yes), the retention valve 607a is set to the closed state (retention state), and the ball sweeping period has elapsed. Therefore, it is determined whether or not the winning information command includes ball-entering information corresponding to a ball entering the general winning hole (high-value winning hole) 602 (S1993).

Then, if it is determined that the ball entry information corresponding to the ball entry into the general prize hole (high value prize hole) 602 is not included (S1993: No), this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that ball entry information corresponding to the entry of a ball into the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602 is included (S1993: Yes), the reservoir valve 607a is set to the closed state (reservation state). This means that the balls are flowing downstream of the reservoir valve 607a despite the fact that Therefore, since there is a high possibility that the storage valve 607a is not normally closed, an error command for display corresponding to the failure of the storage valve 607a is set (S1994), and this processing is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1991 that the storage state flag 223k is not ON (it is OFF) (S1991: No), then it is determined whether or not the value of the flow time counter 223l is 0 (S1995). ). If it is determined that the value of the flow time counter 223l is not 0 (S1995: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the storage state flag 223k is turned on in the process of S1995 (S1995: Yes), then the received prize information command includes entry into the general prize mouth (small value prize mouth) 601. It is determined whether winning information corresponding to the ball is included (S1996). If the winning information corresponding to the ball entering the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601 is not included (S1996: No), this process is terminated.

In the process of S1996, if the winning information corresponding to the ball entering the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601 is included (S1996: Yes), the reservoir valve 607a is set to the open state (released state). This means that the ball has entered the general prize winning opening (small value winning opening) 601 even though the ball throwing period has passed. That is, since there is a high possibility that the reservoir valve 607a is not normally opened, the process proceeds to S1994 in order to report the malfunction of the reservoir valve 607a.

With this hit time notification process 2 (S1981), when a problem occurs in the operation of the storage valve 607a, the problem can be quickly notified, so that the problem can be quickly resolved.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the modification of the first embodiment, the slide member 900 is used to open and close the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a, and the guiding flow path in the storage device 600. 607 can be opened and closed at the same time. In other words, the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602 is configured as one of the winning openings for obtaining prize balls during the big win.

Switching of the state of the second specific prize winning port 650a and switching of the state of the guide channel 607 can be realized simply by slidingly displacing the slide member 900. The processing load can be reduced compared to the case where the prize winning port 650 and the storage valve 607a are controlled separately. That is, the processing load on the MPU 201 can be reduced. In particular, the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 executes important processes in the game, such as lottery of special symbols and determination of variable time. It will have a big impact on your game. On the other hand, in this modified example, the introduction of the slide member 900 can reduce the processing load of the MPU 201, so that the main processing in the game can be executed more reliably.

In addition, in this modification, only the variable probability ball entrance 654 is provided inside the second variable winning device 650, and the ball that has flowed into the inside of the second variable winning device 650 always enters the variable probability ball entrance 654. It is configured to be a ball. As a result, it is possible to realize a simple game property such that if the ball can be entered into the second specific winning hole 650a, the state of the probability of special symbols changes after the big win is completed. Therefore, since it becomes easier for the player to understand whether or not the special symbols are shifted to the variable probability state, it is possible to provide a game that even a beginner can enjoy. In addition, since the channel switching valve 650d, the induction channel 653, and the normal ball entrance 655 provided inside the second variable winning device 650 in the first embodiment are eliminated, the second variable winning device 650 structure can be simplified. Therefore, the cost of the pachinko machine 10 can be suppressed.

In addition, in this modification, the ratio of the balls that flow into the storage device 600 among the balls hit to the right is adjusted by adjusting the nails 921a and 921b (see FIG. 77) provided at the entrance of the storage device 600. It is configured to be variable.

Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is drawn based on the winning of a game ball into a start winning opening, and whether or not to shift to the probability fluctuation state is determined separately during the winning. There is a lottery. As a result, it is possible to prevent the work from becoming a mere task for obtaining a lot of hit balls, and to make the player play the game while having a feeling of anticipation for the shift to the probability variation state, thereby improving the interest of the player in the game. We are trying to

Some of the gaming machines described above are provided with a predetermined area in which the game ball can enter only during winning. (For example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2003-180999).

However, in conventional gaming machines, the rate at which a game ball enters a predetermined area during a win is set in advance for each model. There was no choice but to introduce a different model on the side. In other words, in the conventional gaming machine, there is no degree of freedom in the rate of transition to the probability variable state, and it is difficult to flexibly respond to business policies that differ from hall to hall. Therefore, a game machine with higher versatility has been demanded.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of this modified example, the ease with which a ball enters the storage device 600 when hitting to the right can be easily changed by adjusting the nails 921a and 921b. It consists of This makes it possible to change the ease with which a ball can enter the second ball inlet 650a provided downstream of the inlet portion of the storage device 600. FIG. Therefore, it is possible to change the playability when the jackpot F is achieved simply by adjusting the nails 921a and 921b by the hall clerk. That is, it is difficult to enter the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602, and the game property that easily shifts to the probability variable state of the special symbol, and the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602 is easy to enter, and the special It is possible to switch between the game property in which it is difficult to shift to the definite variable state of the pattern. Therefore, the performance of the pachinko machine 10 can be easily changed according to the business policy of the hall, so that versatility can be improved.

In this modification, the second specific prize winning opening (second large opening opening) 650a is configured to be opened for a maximum of 5 seconds in the 12 rounds of the jackpot F, but the opening time may be determined arbitrarily. For example, by setting the opening time to 10 seconds, it is possible to make it easier for the ball to enter the second specific winning hole 650a. Therefore, since it becomes easy to shift to the variable probability state of the special symbol, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game. Also, the opening time may be set to 2 seconds, for example. By shortening the opening time, the pachinko machine 10 in which the nails 921a and 921b are made to be more closed by allowing the ball to enter the second specific winning hole 650a in a limited time. can be selected. Therefore, the game by the pachinko machine 10 can make the player enthusiastic.

In this modification, the entrance of the storage device 600 is provided upstream of the second specific winning port 650a, and by adjusting the nails 921a and 921b, it is possible to vary the ease with which the ball enters the storage device 600. However, the configuration for varying the percentage of balls reaching the second specific winning opening 650a is not limited to this. For example, instead of the storage device 600, simply an out port or a prize winning port into which prize balls are paid out when a ball enters may be provided. The second specific prize winning opening 650a may be configured to switch between the open and closed states with a single member. Even with this configuration, by adjusting the nails 921a and 921b to vary the ease with which a ball enters the out hole or the winning hole, the ratio of balls reaching the second specific winning hole 650a can be varied. can be made Also, by replacing the storage device 600 with an out port or a prize winning port, the structure can be simplified, so the cost of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

Also, the ease of flow into the storage device 600 does not necessarily have to be adjustable. That is, instead of the nails 921a and 921b, columnar members fixed to the board surface may be provided. This makes it impossible for the hall side to control whether or not the ball enters the second specific winning hole 650a in the 12th round of the jackpot F, so that the ball enters the second specific winning hole 650a. Even if you don't hit the ball, you can keep that disappointment from going to the hole. That is, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player from having a sense of distrust toward the hole.

In this modification, the second specific prize winning opening 650a and the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 are opened in the 12th round of the jackpot F, but this is not the only option. For example, it may be configured to be opened in the first round. As a result, it is possible to determine at an early stage whether or not to shift to the variable probability state of the special symbol, so that the game can be played with peace of mind in the subsequent special game state (jackpot state). Also, the second specific winning opening 650a may be configured to be opened in the fifteenth round. As a result, it is not decided until the 15th round, which is the final round, whether or not to shift to the variable probability state of the special symbols, so that the player's expectation for the variable probability state of the special symbols can be maintained longer. Therefore, the player's interest in the game during the jackpot game can be improved. Further, for example, when a jackpot F is achieved, the second specific winning opening 650a and the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602 may be opened consecutively in a plurality of rounds. Specifically, for example, it may be configured to be opened in the 12th and 13th rounds. As a result, the balls stored in the upper part of the ball storage section 920 by the end of the 11th round enter the general prize winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 in the 12th round, and enter the ball storage section in the 13th round. There may be no sphere above 920 . Therefore, it is possible to increase the chances of the ball entering the second specific winning hole 650a.

In this modified example, as in the first embodiment, only one ball can be stored inside the storage device 600, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of balls can be stored, For example, it may be configured such that four balls can be stored in the upper portion of the ball storing portion 920 . In this case, the conditions for ending the 12 rounds are changed, and the 12 rounds are ended when, for example, a total of 5 balls enter the first specific prize winning port 65a, the second specific prize winning port 650a, and the general prize winning port 602. It may be configured to In the 1st to 11th rounds of the jackpot, the game is played by trying to make the ball enter the first specific winning hole 65a by hitting to the right. The upper limit number (4) is stored. In other words, 12 rounds are started and the ball storage section 920 is opened, so that the four stored balls all flow into the general prize winning port (high value prize winning port) 602, so immediately after the start of the 12 rounds. Four balls enter the specific winning opening (the first specific winning opening 65a, the second specific winning opening 650a, and the general winning opening 602). Therefore, 12 rounds are completed when one more ball enters the second specific winning opening 650a or the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602 (a total of five balls enter the second specific winning opening). 650a, or the ball enters the general winning hole (large value winning hole) 602), so the chance of entering the second specific winning hole 650a can be limited to one ball. Therefore, it is possible to make the player play the game for 12 rounds with a sense of tension. In addition, in the 1st to 11th rounds of the big win, while hoping that the balls do not flow into the storage device 600 as much as possible (that is, the number of balls stored in the upper part of the ball storage part 920 is 12 instead of 4, which is the upper limit). A jackpot game can be played (hoping for the round to come). Therefore, since the game can be played with a sense of tension even during the big win, it is prevented (suppressed) that the big win is just a work to get the prize balls, and the player can enjoy the big win game. can improve interest in

It should be noted that the number of balls entering a specific winning hole, which is the condition for ending 12 rounds, and the upper limit number of balls that can be stored in the upper part of the ball storing section 920 may be determined arbitrarily. For example, the condition for ending 12 rounds may be less than or equal to the number of balls that can be stored in the upper part of the ball storage part 920 . As a result, the game can be played with a strong hope that the ball will not be stored inside the storage device 600 before the start of the 12th round. Conversely, the upper limit number of balls that can be stored in the ball storing portion 920 may be reduced. As a result, even if the upper limit number of balls is stored in the upper part of the ball storing part 920 by the start of the 12th round, multiple opportunities to enter the balls into the second specific winning hole 650a are given in the 12th round. can be done. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier to shift to the variable probability state of the special symbol, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In this modified example, the effect image shown in FIG. 76 is displayed when the ball storing section 920 is opened in the 12th round of the big win F, but the effect during the big win is limited to this. isn't it. For example, it may be configured to inform whether the big win E or the big win F is made according to the result of the effect executed up to the 11th round of the big win. More specifically, for example, in each round from the 1st round to the 11th round, an effect may be performed in which an ally of justice and a monster fight. Then, if the ally of justice wins by the 11th round, a big win F is reported, and if the ally of justice is defeated, a big win E is reported. That is, when the ally of justice wins, the second specific prize winning opening 650a is opened in the 12th round, so that the player can be made to recognize that it is a chance to shift to the variable probability state of the special symbols. This allows the player to more interestingly observe the result of the performance performed in the jackpot.

In addition, there are variations in the performance content, and the performance content that has a high degree of expectation that the allies of justice will win (easily selected in the case of jackpot F) and the high possibility that the allies of justice will be defeated (in the case of jackpot E) ) may be provided. For example, if the ally of justice attacks the enemy with a special move, or if the ally of justice evades the enemy's attack, the expectation of victory will be high, and the attack of the ally of justice will miss, The player may be configured to increase the possibility of being defeated when the enemy attacks with a special move. As a result, it is possible to predict not only the outcome of whether or not the ally of justice will win, but also the flow of presentation leading up to victory or defeat. Therefore, the player's interest in the jackpot game can be improved.

In addition, the content of the production performed up to the 11th round is not limited to the above-mentioned production of fighting the allies of justice and the monsters, and it is possible to suggest an advantageous jackpot F and a disadvantageous jackpot E than the jackpot F. Any form is acceptable. For example, the boy character 710 may perform a treasure search effect, and if the treasure can be found by the 11th round, the jackpot F may be notified, or the boy character 710 may It is also possible to display a presentation of eating a lot, and to notify that the player has won a jackpot F when all the provided food is eaten.

Since the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment is provided with a storage device 600 that has a unique configuration that is not installed in general gaming machines, an effect is provided to explain the game characteristics related to this storage device 600. You can More specifically, for example, an image of the storage device 600 is displayed as a rear image, and the conditions for opening the storage valve 607a, the merits when it is opened, and the demerits when the ball is hit to the right in the closed state. may be configured to display an image (description image) that explains the As a result, the player can easily understand the playability. Further, the type of the back surface on which the explanatory image is displayed may be configured so that the type of the back surface can be switched by pressing (operating) the frame button 22 . As a result, a player who is accustomed to playing with the pachinko machine 10 and fully understands the game characteristics can change the back face type to one in which the explanation image is not displayed.

In this modified example, both the second specific winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 and the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 were treated as winning openings for obtaining a big prize ball. Winning hole) 602 may be treated as a normal winning hole. That is, as a condition for ending each round of the jackpot, each round of the jackpot ends when 10 or more balls enter the first specific prize winning port 65a or the second specific prize winning port 650a. The number of balls entering the winning hole 602 may be irrelevant). As a result, the more the ball enters the general winning hole (large value winning hole) 602 in the 12 rounds of the jackpot, the more profitable the player can be, so the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

In this modification, by adjusting the nails 921a and 921b so that the ball can easily flow into the storage device 600, it is difficult for the ball to enter the second specific prize winning port 650a, and the ball enters the storage device 600. By adjusting the nails 921a and 921b so that the ball is difficult to enter, the ball can be easily entered into the second specific winning hole 650a. That is, by adjusting the nails 921a and 921b, it was configured to be able to change the ratio of shifting to the variable probability state of the special symbols after the end of the big hit, but the ratio of shifting to the variable probability state of the special symbols is changed. The method is not limited to this. For example, instead of fixing the ratio of balls flowing into the storage device 600, a variable probability ball entrance 654 and a normal ball entrance 655 are provided inside the second variable prize winning device 650 as in the first embodiment. may be configured. Then, it may be configured such that the hall clerk can adjust the ratio of the balls that have flowed into the inside of the second variable prize winning device 650 to the variable probability ball entrance 654 and the normal ball entrance 655 . More specifically, for example, after replacing the second variable winning device 650 in the first embodiment with the second variable winning device 650 (see FIG. 15) in the first embodiment, a channel switching valve 650d and a switching Axis 650e is abolished. Then, for example, a nail may be driven at the branch position of the guide channel 652 and the guide channel 653 (that is, above the location where the switching shaft 650e was provided in the first embodiment). Also, the nailing position may be above the position where the switching shaft 650e is provided in the first embodiment (see FIG. 15), for example, by a distance about the radius of a sphere. In other words, it may be a position at which the ball flowing down the guide channel 651 can contact (collide) and a position at which the ball can flow down the guide channel 652 and the guide channel 653 . With this configuration, if the nail provided inside the second variable winning device 650 is adjusted to the right side, the game ball flowing down the guide channel 651 can easily contact (collide) with the left side of the nail. Therefore, the ball tends to be repelled to the left when viewed from the front. Therefore, the ball can easily flow into the guide channel 652 provided downstream of the second variable winning device 650 and on the left side in front view, so that the ball can easily enter the probability variable ball entrance 654 . Therefore, by adjusting the nail provided inside the second variable winning device 650 to the right side, it is possible to make it easier to change the probability of the special symbol after the end of the big win. Conversely, if the nail provided inside the second variable prize winning device 650 is adjusted to the left side, the game ball that has flowed down the guide channel 651 is more likely to contact (collide) with the right side of the nail. It becomes easier to repel to the right direction. Therefore, the ball easily flows into the guide flow path 653 provided downstream of the second variable winning device 650 on the left side in the front view, so that the ball can easily enter the probability variable ball entrance 654 . Therefore, by adjusting the nail provided inside the second variable prize winning device 650 to the right side, it is possible to make it difficult for the special symbol to be in a probability variable state after the end of the big win. In this way, by making it possible to adjust the ease with which a ball can be entered into the variable probability entrance 654, the specifications of the pachinko machine 10 can be changed according to the business policy of the hall. Therefore, it is possible to provide game characteristics corresponding to the business policy of each hall.

In addition, as another specific example configured to be able to change the ratio of shifting to the probability variable state of the special symbol after the end of the jackpot, instead of the nails 921a and 921b in this modification, the entrance portion of the storage device 600 is opened. A variable member may be provided to switch between the closed state and the closed state. The variable member may be configured to repeat the open state and the closed state while the power is on. In this case, after fixing the length of one cycle composed of the open state and the closed state (for example, 3 seconds), the period set in the open state and the period set in the closed state The ratio may be configured to be Hall adjustable. More specifically, for example, an operating means such as a DIP switch that can be set to a plurality of states is provided. Then, for example, if the state of the switch indicates (00000000B), the inlet of the storage device 600 is configured not to be set to the closed state. That is, since the entrance is always open, a state is set in which game balls are most likely to flow into the storage device 600 . Then, if the state of the switch indicates (11111111B), the inlet of the storage device 600 is always set to the closed state. In other words, no balls will flow into the storage device 600 in the event of a big win, and the state is set in such a way that the balls are most likely to flow into the second specific prize winning port 650a. When the DIP switch is in another state (00000001B to 11111110B), it may be configured such that the closed state period becomes longer as it goes from (00000000B) to (11111111B). In other words, it may be configured such that the ball is more likely to enter the second specific winning hole 650a as it goes to (11111111B), and the variable probability state of the special symbol is more likely to be set after the end of the big hit. With such a configuration, the pachinko machine 10 can be used as a gaming machine with a game property that is unlikely to change the probability of special symbols. The setting of the DIP switch may be adjusted so as to repeat the open state. Conversely, in a hall where the pachinko machine 10 is desired to be used as a gaming machine with a game property that is likely to be in a probability variable state of special symbols, for example, the variable member repeats the closed state for 2.5 seconds and the open state for 0.5 seconds. Just adjust the DIP switch settings accordingly. As a result, the specs of the pachinko machine 10 can be changed according to the business policy of each hall, so that highly versatile game characteristics corresponding to the business policy of each hall can be provided.

<Modification of Second Embodiment>
Next, a modified example of the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 86 to 94. FIG. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment, the guide channel 704 provided inside the storage device 700 can be closed by the storage valve 704a so that one ball can be stored in the upper portion of the storage valve 704a in the closed state. was configured to In the state where the balls are stored, the balls are made easier to enter the general prize winning opening (large value winning opening) 702 or the out openings (small value winning openings) 703d and 703e where many winning balls are paid out. When the storage valve 704a is open, the ball is easily entered into the general prize winning opening (middle value winning opening) 701 where the number of awarded balls to be paid out is small. The storage valve 704a is basically set to a closed state, and is configured to open when the player operates the release button 800. As shown in FIG. In other words, if the storage valve 704a is closed, there is a possibility that the ball may enter any of the general winning port (large value winning port) 702 and the out ports (small value winning ports) 703d and 703e (prize There is a possibility that many balls can be obtained, but there is a possibility that prize balls may not be obtained (highly gambling state), and if the storage valve 704a is in an open state, the ball that has flowed into the storage device 700 is a general prize. A state in which a ball can be entered into the mouth (medium value prize winning mouth) 701 (a state in which a small amount of prize balls can be stably obtained) is established. Therefore, depending on whether or not the release button 800 (see FIG. 67) is operated, the game characteristics of the pachinko machine 10 can be switched by the player, so that each player can select the game characteristics that suit his/her taste. It was configured so that a game could be played by

On the other hand, in this modified example, a maximum of two balls can be stored inside the storage device 700 . In addition, when the storage valve 704a is closed, depending on the arrangement of the stored balls, it becomes easier for the ball to enter the entrance (general winning entrance 702), or to enter the out exit. Is it easier to ball) is configured to change. That is, by confirming the arrangement of the stored balls in a state in which the storage valve 704a is closed, it is possible to easily recognize whether or not the ball is likely to enter the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 702. configured to be able to

The pachinko machine 10 according to the modification of the second embodiment is structurally different from the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment only in that the internal structure of the storage device 700 is different. Other configurations, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are described in the second embodiment. It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in form. Elements that are the same as those of the second embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, referring to FIG. 86, the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in this modification will be described. FIG. 86 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in this modified example. As shown in FIG. 86, also in the pachinko machine 10 of this modified example, a storage device 700 is provided downstream of the path provided on the right side of the game board 13 . As described above, in this modified example, a maximum of two balls can be stored inside the storage device 700 . Details of this storage device 700 will be described with reference to FIGS. 87 and 88. FIG.

FIG. 87 is a diagram showing an example in which the storage valve 704a of the storage device 700 is closed and two balls are stored. As shown in FIG. 87, in this modified example, the storage valve 704a is inclined downward to the lower right when viewed from the front. Therefore, most of the balls that first flowed into the guide channel 704 with the reservoir valve 704a closed stand still while being biased to the right side of the guide channel 704 due to the inclination of the reservoir valve 704a. In addition, as shown in FIG. 87, the portion of the guide channel 704 above the retention valve 704a is longer than in the second embodiment. Moreover, the guiding channel 704 does not have enough width for two spheres to be arranged side by side. For this reason, when another ball flows into the guide channel 704 while one ball is stored on the right side inside the guide channel 704, in most cases, a new ball will appear on the upper left side of the previously stored ball. (a new ball is stored between the previously stored ball and the inner wall portion on the left side of the guiding channel 704).

In the case of the pooled state shown in FIG. 87 (the first pooled ball is on the right side and the second pooled ball is on the left side), the balls that flow into the pooling device 700 after that are It becomes easier to collide with the right side of the second stored ball. Therefore, the ball that has flowed into the storage device 700 changes its traveling direction to the right due to the impact caused by the collision (contact) with the stored ball. That is, the ball flows into the guide channel 708 and enters either the out-port (small-value prize-winning port) 703d or 703e.

Thus, in the case of the pooling state shown in FIG. 87, even if the ball can be made to flow into the pooling device 700, the ball enters the out ports (small value prize winning ports) 703d and 703e. A player cannot get a prize ball because the ball is thrown. That is, the storage state shown in FIG. 87 is a disadvantageous state for the player.

A ball entry sensor 704b is provided on the upper left side of the storage valve 704a in the guide channel 704 to detect a ball when the ball is present in front of the user when viewed from the front. The placement of the ball can be determined by the ball entry sensor 704b. More specifically, when the entering ball sensor 704b continues to detect the ball for a predetermined period (for example, one minute), it is determined that the arrangement shown in FIG. 87 is in place. By determining whether or not the arrangement shown in FIG. 87 is established, an image prompting the player to press the release button 800 (see FIG. 89) when a certain period of time has passed since the arrangement shown in FIG. ) can be displayed. As a result, the disadvantageous arrangement (see FIG. 87) in which the balls that have flowed into the storage device 700 tend to enter the out-ports (small-value prize-winning ports) 703d and 703e continues for a long period of time, which is disadvantageous to the player. It can be suppressed.

Next, another example in which two balls are stored will be described with reference to FIG. In the example shown in FIG. 88, the game ball that first flows into the guide channel 704 with the reservoir valve 704a closed is stored leftward with respect to the guide channel 704, and the second guide channel The spheres that have flowed into 704 are stored on the right side of the guiding channel 704 . When the stored state shown in FIG. 88 is reached, the ball that subsequently flows into the storage device 700 is likely to collide (contact) with the left side surface of the second stored ball. Therefore, since the flowing direction of the ball that collides (contacts) with the stored ball is likely to change to the left direction, it flows down the guide flow path 706 and is paid out. It becomes easier to enter the ball into the winning opening (large value winning opening) 702 .

In this way, in the case of the storage state shown in FIG. 88, by letting the ball flow into the storage device 700, it becomes easier for the ball to enter the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 702. , this is an advantageous situation for players who can expect to win prize balls every time balls flow in.

Since the reservoir valve 704a is inclined downward to the right, the reservoir state shown in FIG. 88 is more difficult to achieve than the reservoir state shown in FIG. For example, after the storage valve 704a is closed, two balls flow into the guide channel 704 at the same time, or the ball that first reaches the storage valve 704a This can be realized, for example, when the second ball flows into the guide channel 704 while colliding with the inner wall portion and repulsing in the upper left direction.

87 in most cases when the reservoir valve 704a is closed, the reservoir valve 704a can be opened by operating the release button 800 in the same manner as in the second embodiment even in this modified example. . That is, the ball can be stored in the storage device 700 in anticipation of resetting the storage state and returning to the storage state shown in FIG. 88 again. As a result, the player can play the game with the aim of achieving the pooled state shown in FIG. 88, so that the player's interest in the game can be enhanced. Further, when the storage state shown in FIG. It can make you feel the expectation of being able to get a lot of balls.

Also, in the arrangement shown in FIG. 88, the arrangement is shifted from the entering ball sensor 704b (the ball does not block the front side of the entering ball sensor 704b), so even if the arrangement shown in FIG. 88 continues for a long time, Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the display of an image (see FIG. 89) prompting the player to press the release button 800 . Therefore, the advantageous state in which it is easy to enter the general prize winning opening (high value winning opening) 702 can be maintained for a longer period of time.

Next, referring to FIG. 89, an image (suggestion display image) prompting the user to press release button 800 will be described. FIG. 89 is a diagram showing an image (suggestion display image) prompting the user to press the release button 800. As shown in FIG. This suggestive display image is an image that is displayed when it is determined that an arrangement disadvantageous to the player continues for a certain period of time (one minute), as shown in FIG. More specifically, when the entering ball sensor 704b continues to detect the ball for one minute, it is determined that the arrangement shown in FIG. 87 is stable, and the suggestive display image is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 89, when the display of the suggestive display image is set, the text "disadvantageous arrangement" is displayed for the small area Ds2. By displaying this character, the arrangement shown in FIG. 89 is a disadvantageous arrangement for the player (the arrangement in which the ball that has flowed into the storage device 700 is guided to the out ports 703d and 703e). can be recognized. Further, below the characters "disadvantageous arrangement", the characters "Press the button to reset the arrangement!" are displayed. By displaying this character, the player can be made aware that pressing (operating) the release button 800 will eliminate the disadvantageous state.

As described above, in this modification, the suggestion display image informs the player of the disadvantageous arrangement, and pressing (operating) the release button 800 prompts the player to cancel the disadvantageous arrangement. A game can be played with the aim of achieving the arrangement shown in FIG. Therefore, it is possible to make the player actively participate in the game.

In this embodiment, when a long period of time (one minute) has passed while the player is in a disadvantageous state (see FIG. 87), the suggestive display image (see FIG. 89) is displayed. Alternatively, the storage valve 704a may be configured to be switched to the open state (released state). That is, when the entering ball sensor 704b continuously detects the ball for a certain period of time (for example, 1 minute), it is determined that the ball is stable in a disadvantageous state, and the arrangement of the balls stored in the storage device 700 is reset. The reservoir valve 704a may be configured to be opened to allow for replenishment. As a result, even a beginner who does not fully understand the mechanism of the storage device 700 can be prevented from playing for a long time without noticing a disadvantageous state.

In this modified example, the storage valve 704a is opened when the incoming ball sensor 704b continuously detects a ball for one minute. ) is not limited to this, and may be set arbitrarily. By shortening the time (for example, 30 seconds), the period during which the player is at a disadvantage can be shortened. Also, by lengthening the time (for example, 5 minutes), the frequency with which the suggestive display image is displayed can be reduced. Therefore, the processing load on the display control device 114 can be reduced.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the modified example of the second embodiment>
Next, referring to FIG. 90, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in this modification will be described. The electrical configuration of the modified example of the second embodiment differs from the electrical configuration of the second embodiment in that the configuration of the RAM 223 of the audio ramp control device 113 is partially changed, and that the configuration of the audio ramp control device 113 is changed. The difference is that an incoming ball sensor 228 is electrically connected to the input/output port 225 . Other electrical configurations are the same as those in the second embodiment, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In addition to the configuration of the RAM 223 in the second embodiment, at least a disadvantageous time counter 223m and a suggestion display flag 223n are added to the RAM 223 in the modified example of the second embodiment.

The unfavorable time counter 223m is a counter used to determine the elapsed time after the player is placed in a disadvantageous arrangement (state in which the ball is guided to the out ports 703d and 703e) shown in FIG. The value of the disadvantageous time counter 223m is incremented by 1 each time a ball is detected by the entering ball sensor 228 (see S4503 in FIG. 92). Also, when the ball is not detected by the entering ball sensor 228 in the state where the counter value has been added (the value is greater than 0), it is reset to 0 (S4508 in FIG. 92). In this modification, when it is determined that the player is in a disadvantageous arrangement (a state in which the ball is guided to the out ports 703d and 703e) shown in FIG. 87 based on the value of the disadvantageous time counter 223m, Control is performed to display the suggestive display image (see FIG. 89) described above.

The suggestive display flag 223n is a flag indicating whether or not the suggestive display image (see FIG. 89) is displayed. If this suggestive display flag 223n is on, it indicates that the suggestive display image (see FIG. 89) is displayed, and if it is off, it indicates that the suggestive display image (see FIG. 89) is not displayed. showing. The suggestive display flag 223n is set to ON when display of the suggestive display image (see FIG. 89) is set (see S4506 in FIG. 92). On the other hand, when a storage state command indicating that the storage valve 704a is set to the open state (released state) is received, it is set to OFF (see S4607 in FIG. 94).

<Regarding the control process of the sound lamp control device in the modified example of the second embodiment>
Next, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the sound ramp control device 113 in the modified example of the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 91 to 94. FIG. First, with reference to FIG. 91, main processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound ramp control device 113 in this modification will be described.

Of the main processing (see FIG. 92) in this modified example, the processing of S1801 to S1817 is the same as the processing of S1801 to S1817 in the second embodiment. In addition, in the main processing (see FIG. 92) in this modified example, when the liquid crystal effect execution management processing (S1810) ends, then the cancellation suggestion display processing for displaying the suggestion display image (see FIG. 89) is executed ( S1821), and the process proceeds to S1811. Details of the cancellation suggestion display process (S1821) will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 93 is a flow chart showing the cancellation suggestion display process (S1821). In this cancellation suggestion display processing, first, it is determined whether or not the entering ball sensor 228 is on (S4501). It is determined whether or not there is (S4502). Then, if the suggestive display flag 223n is on (S4502: Yes), the suggestive display image (see FIG. 89) is already being displayed, and there is no need to determine whether or not to display the suggestive display image. End this process.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4502 that the suggestion display flag 223n is off (S4502: No), the value of the disadvantageous time counter 223m is updated by adding 1 (S4503). It is determined whether or not the value of the counter 223m is greater than 60000 (S4504). Here, since the disadvantageous time counter 223m is updated by 1 (every 1 ms) each time the main process (see FIG. 91) is performed, the counter value of 60000 corresponds to 1 minute.

In the process of S4503, if it is determined that the value of the disadvantageous time counter 223m is 60000 or less (S4504: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the disadvantageous time counter 223m is greater than 60000 (S4504: Yes), it is suggested to notify the player that a long time (one minute) has passed since the disadvantageous arrangement was made. A display background image change command for displaying a display is set (S4505), the suggestive display flag 223n is set to ON (S4506), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S4501, if it is determined that the entering ball sensor 228 has not detected a ball (the entering ball sensor is off) (S4501: No), the arrangement is not disadvantageous (see FIG. 87). Therefore, first, it is determined whether or not the value of the disadvantageous time counter 223m is greater than 0 (S4507). When it is determined that the value of the disadvantageous time counter 223m is greater than 0 (S4507: Yes), the counter value is initialized to 0 (S4508), and this process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the unfavorable time counter 223m is 0 (S4507: No), the unfavorable time counter 223m has already been initialized and there is no need to initialize it again, so the process of S4508 is skipped. to terminate this process.

By executing this cancellation suggestion display process (S1821), the player will not play for a long time while the arrangement of the balls stored in the storage device 700 is disadvantageous to the player (see FIG. 87). can be prevented.

Next, command determination processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device in the modified example of the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 93 is a flow chart showing this command determination process. Of this command determination process, in each process of S1901 to S1919 and S1921, the same process as each of S1901 to S1919 and S1921 of the command determination process (see FIG. 72) in the second embodiment is executed. . Further, in the command determination process in this modification, when it is determined in the process of S1921 that the storage state command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1921: Yes), an image corresponding to the received storage state command is displayed. is executed (S1929), and this process ends.

Details of this stored state command processing (S1929) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 94 is a flow chart showing this storage state command processing (S1929). In the storage state command process (S1929), first, it is determined whether or not it is notified that the storage valve 704a has been switched to the closed state (storage state) by the storage state command (S4601). Then, if it is determined that the switch to the closed state (storage state) has been notified (S4601: Yes), then the image corresponding to the closed state (see FIG. 63(a)) is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 A command for changing the back image for display is set (S4602), the retention state flag 223k is set to ON to indicate that the retention valve 704a is in the closed state (S4603), and the process proceeds to S4604. and migrate.

On the other hand, in the processing of S4601, if it is determined that the state notified by the retention state command is not the closed state (retention state) (the switch to the open state (released state) is notified) (S4601: No) Next, a display back image change command for displaying an image (see FIG. 63(b)) corresponding to the open state (released state) on the third pattern display device 81 is set (S4605), and the storage valve In order to indicate that the current state of 704a is the open state (released state), the storage state flag 223k is set to off (S4606). Then, in order to indicate that the suggestive display image (see FIG. 89) is not displayed, the suggestive display flag 223n is set to OFF (S4607), and the process proceeds to S4604.

In the process of S4604 executed after the process of S4603 or S4607, the flow time counter 223l is checked to determine whether or not it is the ball sweeping period from when the storage valve 704a is switched to when the ball is ejected. A counter value corresponding to 1 second is set (S4604), and this processing ends. By executing this storage state command process (S1931), it is possible to appropriately update the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 in association with the state of the storage valve 704a notified from the main controller 110.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 in the modified example of the second embodiment is configured so that two balls can be stored inside the storage device 700 . Moreover, at least the storage state shown in FIG. 87 and the storage state shown in FIG. 88 can be taken as the storage state when the balls are stored inside. These pooling states have different ball entrances into which balls that have flowed into the pooling device 700 are likely to enter. In addition, since the inside of the storage device 700 is configured to be visible to the player, the storage state can be easily determined by visual inspection. Therefore, it is possible for the player to select whether or not it is better to reset the reservoir state by once setting the reservoir valve 704a to the open state.

Also, an advantageous pooling state (a pooling state in which the ball easily enters the general winning hole 701 shown in FIG. 88) and a disadvantageous pooling state (a pooling state in which the ball easily enters the out hole shown in FIG. 87). , the game can be played in anticipation of an advantageous storage state (see FIG. 88). Then, even if it becomes a disadvantageous retention state (see FIG. 87), the retention state is reset by opening the retention valve 704a, and the game is aimed again at an advantageous retention state (see FIG. 88). can be done. In addition, by being in an advantageous storage state, it is possible to give the player a sense of accomplishment, and at the same time, by continuing to enter the ball into the general prize winning opening (high value winning opening) 702, a large number of prize balls can be obtained. It can give you hope for what you can do.

The pachinko machine 10 of this modified example is configured so that two balls can be stored inside the storage device 700, but it is not limited to this, and an internal structure that can store three or more balls may be used. . In this case, if the incoming ball sensor 228 is provided near the upper end of the guiding channel 704 toward the left, it is possible to easily determine whether or not there is a disadvantageous arrangement leading to the out port.

In the pachinko machine 10 of this modified example, by providing the incoming ball sensor 228 near the upper end of the guide flow path 704 toward the left side, whether the arrangement of the balls stored inside the storage device 700 is disadvantageous to the player. Although it was constructed so as to be able to determine whether or not the entering ball sensor 228 is installed, the mounting position of the entering ball sensor 228 is not limited to this. For example, it may be arranged near the upper end of the guide channel 704 and rightward. That is, when the balls stored in the storage device 700 are arranged as shown in FIG. 87, the stored balls are not detected by the incoming ball sensor 228, but when the balls are arranged as shown in FIG. The incoming ball sensor 228 may be arranged such that the upper ball among the stored balls is detected by the incoming ball sensor 228 . This makes it possible to determine whether or not the arrangement (see FIG. 88) is such that the ball can easily enter the general prize winning opening 702 . Therefore, based on the detection result of the entering ball sensor 228, for example, when the ball continues to be detected by the entering ball sensor 228 continuously for 5 seconds or longer, it can be determined that the ball is stationary in the arrangement shown in FIG. . Therefore, based on the arrangement of the stored balls that are advantageous to the player shown in FIG. 88, it is notified that the current state is advantageous to the player. can be done. As a method of notification, for example, the small area Ds2 of the third symbol display device 81 is configured to display the characters "advantageously arranged" and the characters "big chance with right hit!" You may This makes it possible for the player to easily recognize that the current state is advantageous, so that the player presses (operates) the release button 800 by mistake, causing the balls stored in the storage device 700 to flow down. It is possible to suppress the fact that the arrangement is reset (an advantageous arrangement is reset).

Also, the number of ball entry sensors 228 is not limited to one, and a plurality of sensors may be provided. More specifically, for example, the incoming ball sensors 228 may be provided near the upper end of the guiding channel 704 near the right side and the left side, respectively. As a result, when the sensor provided on the left side continues to detect the ball for five seconds, for example, it can be determined that the arrangement shown in FIG. 87 is stable. Further, when the sensor provided on the right side continues to detect the ball for five seconds, for example, it can be determined that the arrangement shown in FIG. 88 is stable. Therefore, when the arrangement shown in FIG. 87 (arrangement unfavorable to the player in which the ball is guided to the out ports 703d and 703e), the above-mentioned suggestive display image (see FIG. 89) is displayed so that the game It is possible to prompt the person to reset the disadvantageous arrangement. In addition, when the arrangement shown in FIG. 88 (arrangement advantageous to the player whose ball is guided to the general winning opening 702), an image (for example, " By displaying an image in which the characters "Under placement" and the characters "Right-handed, great chance!" Motivation can be improved.

In the pachinko machine 10 of this modified example, the reservoir valve 704a is configured to be inclined downward to the lower right, but the inclination may be reversed. This makes it easier for the player to achieve a pooling state (see FIG. 88) that is advantageous to the player, so that the player can be made to more actively aim at the pooling device 700 and hit the ball. Also, the inclination formed by the storage valve 704a may be eliminated. This makes it completely random whether a favorable or unfavorable retention state occurs.

In the pachinko machine 10 in this modified example, the trigger for opening the reservoir valve 704a is only the depression (operation) of the release button 800, but other triggers may be provided. For example, the storage valve 704a may be configured to be set to the open state during the jackpot, and the storage state may be reset periodically. If the opportunity to reset the pooled state is completely left to the player, once the pooled state becomes advantageous (see FIG. 88), the game will be continued while the pooled state is maintained, and the hole will be inadequate. It may turn out to be profitable. On the other hand, if the storage state is periodically reset, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the advantageous storage state from continuing for a long time, thereby preventing disadvantages to the holes.

In this modified example, the state of the storage valve 704a is switched based on the depression (operation) of the release button 800, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the state of the storage valve 704a may be switched according to the elapsed time, the current time, the number of installation days, or the like. As a result, each player can start playing a game while the storage valve 704a is in a state that matches his or her taste.

Also, the state of the storage valve 704a may be switched based on the result of a lottery performed periodically or irregularly. For example, the storage valve 704a is basically configured to be in the closed state (storage state), and configured to execute a lottery to determine whether to switch to the open state (released state) once per minute. may Further, when the lottery is won, the storage valve 704a may be opened for 10 seconds, for example. As a result, if the arrangement of the balls stored in the storage device 700 is disadvantageous (see FIG. 87) in which the balls are likely to be guided to the out ports (small value prize winning ports) 703d and 703e, the lottery is won. Thus, the game can be played in the hope that the storage valve 704a will be opened. On the other hand, when the arrangement of the balls stored in the storage device 700 is such that the balls are easily guided to the general prize winning opening (high value winning opening) 702 (see FIG. 88), the storage valve 704a is opened. In order to avoid losing the lottery, it is possible to play the game in the hope that the lottery will continue to be lost. Therefore, different lottery results can be expected according to the arrangement of the balls stored in the storage device 700, so that novel game characteristics can be provided. Furthermore, the lottery probability of whether or not to set the storage valve 704a to the open state (released state) may be configured so that the hall clerk or the like can adjust the lottery probability. Thus, when a player selects one machine for playing a game from among a plurality of pachinko machines 10, the machine having a good lottery probability can be predicted and machine selection can be made. Therefore, since the pachinko machine 10 can be selected in consideration of habits, etc., when setting the lottery probability of a hole, the interest of the player can be improved at the stage of machine selection before starting the game. .

In this modified example, since the pooling device 700 having a unique structure not installed in a general gaming machine is provided, an effect for explaining the gameplay related to the pooling device 700 may be provided. More specifically, for example, an image of the storage device 600 is displayed as a rear image, and an image (description image) explaining the conditions for opening the storage valve 704a and the advantages and disadvantages of the opening is displayed. It may be configured to As a result, the player can easily understand the playability. Further, the type of the back surface on which the explanatory image is displayed may be configured so that the type of the back surface can be switched by pressing (operating) the frame button 22 . As a result, a player who is accustomed to playing with the pachinko machine 10 and fully understands the game characteristics can change the back face type to one in which the explanation image is not displayed.

In this modified example, the storage valve 704a is configured to be opened only while the release button 800 is being pressed (operated), but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the storage valve 704a may be set to the open state for a predetermined period of time (for example, 5 seconds) when pressing (operation) of the release button 800 is detected. In this case, the operation of the release button 800 may not be accepted during the predetermined period in which the storage valve 704a is open. This eliminates the need to keep pressing the release button 800 to keep the reservoir valve 704a open. Alternatively, the closed state (storage state) and the open state (released state) may be switched each time the release button 800 is pressed (operated). By configuring in this way, the number of operations performed by the player can be reduced because the release button 800 can be operated only when the state is to be switched. Moreover, contrary to the release button 800, an operating means for closing the storage valve 704a by operating it may be provided. Even with this configuration, each player can be allowed to select a game feature that matches his or her taste, as in the present embodiment.

In this modification, when a certain period of time (one minute) has passed since the arrangement was disadvantageous to the player shown in FIG. 87, the suggestion display image (see FIG. 89) is displayed to cancel the arrangement for the player. Although it is configured to prompt pressing (operation) of the button 800, the method of pressing (operating) the release button 800 is not limited to this. For example, the frame button 22 and the release button 800 may be configured integrally (that is, the frame button 22 and the release button 800 are combined into one operation button, and the main controller 110 and the sound lamp controller 113 may be electrically connected to each other). Then, when it is determined that the entering ball sensor 704b continuously detects the ball for a certain period of time (one minute) or more (that is, the arrangement is disadvantageous to the player as shown in FIG. 87), the frame button 22 is pressed. It may be configured such that the variation type that develops the effect is more likely to be selected. As a result, when the frame button 22 is pressed (operated) in order to develop the effect, the storage valve 704a can be set to the open state (released state) at the same time. In general, the player observes the result of the variable performance that informs whether or not the player wins a big win with the greatest interest, so when the variable performance that develops the performance by pressing the frame button 22 is executed, the player surely presses the frame button 22.例文帳に追加It is possible to make the player recognize that he/she is prompted. Therefore, the disadvantageous state (see FIG. 87) can be reset more reliably.

In this modified example, the first specific winning hole 65a is provided below the first ball entrance 64 in a front view so that the ball enters the first specific winning hole 65a by hitting left-handed. It is not something that can be done. For example, the first specific prize winning port 65a may be provided downstream of the storage device 700 as in the first embodiment. As a result, the ball can flow into the first specific winning hole 65a and the storage device 700 only by hitting right in the special game state (jackpot state), so that the prize ball in the special game state (jackpot state) can be made to flow into the storage device 700. can do more. Therefore, it is possible to improve the expectation of the player for the big win.

In each of the above embodiments, the storage valve 607a of the storage device 600 and the storage valve 704a of the storage device 700 are provided by sliding to the front side in the front view and to the back side in the front view. Although the flow path is closed and the balls can be stored in the upper part thereof, the operation of the storage valve is not limited to this. For example, in the closed state, the reservoir valve is configured to stand upright with respect to the inner wall of the channel to close the channel, and in the open state, the reservoir valve falls down in the downstream direction of the channel, The channel may be configured to allow passage of a sphere. In addition, the reservoir valve 607a and the reservoir valve 704a do not need to completely close the guide channel 607 and the guide channel 704, respectively. For example, when the width of the reservoir valve 607a and the reservoir valve 704a is shortened and the reservoir valve 607a and the reservoir valve 704a protrude to the front side in a front view, the guide channel 607 and the guide channel 704 are partially opened. It may be configured to be Moreover, the width of the storage valve 607a and the storage valve 704a may be set so that the width of the open portion is equal to or less than the diameter of the sphere. As a result, the cost of the storage valve 607a and the storage valve 704a can be reduced. Further, when setting the guide channel 607 and the guide channel 704 to the open state (released state) by the reservoir valve 607a and the reservoir valve 704a, the guide channel 607 and the guide channel 704 do not have to be completely opened. . In other words, a part of the reservoir valve 607a and the reservoir valve 704a may protrude into the guide channel 607 and the guide channel 704, respectively. Also, the width of the open portion of the guide channel 607 or the guide channel 704 may be configured to be equal to or larger than the diameter of the sphere. As a result, the operation range between the open state and the closed state can be narrowed in the storage valve 607a and the storage valve 704a, so that the power consumed for switching the state of the storage valve 607a and the storage valve 704a can be reduced. can. In addition, if the width of the open portion is set to be equal to or larger than the diameter of the ball, the ball that has flowed in may come into contact with the reservoir valve 607a and the reservoir valve 704a, reducing the momentum of the flow, but the ball will eventually flow down. (It can be made difficult to store (hold) at the positions of the storage valve 607a and the storage valve 704a). Therefore, even with this configuration, it is possible to realize the same operations as those of the above-described embodiments. That is, it is possible to form a state in which the balls can be stored in the guide channels 607 and 704 and a state in which the balls flowing into the guide channels 607 and 704 flow downstream. .

In each of the above-described embodiments, out ports are provided at both ends of each ball entrance provided in each storage device, but out ports at both ends may be eliminated. Even if the out-port is abolished and the inner wall is used, the ball can be entered into another ball-in port. Also, by eliminating outlets at both ends, the storage device can be made more compact.

In each of the above-described embodiments, a plurality of outlets are provided inside the storage device. (See FIG. 2). As a result, it is possible to use only one out port, so that it is sufficient to detect only the number of balls entering the out port 66 in order to grasp the number of ejected balls. Therefore, the cost of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced because the number of detection switches for detecting the entry of a ball can be reduced.

In each of the above embodiments, one ball (the first embodiment, the modification of the first embodiment, and the second embodiment) or two balls (the modification of the second embodiment) are stored in the upper part of the reservoir valve. ), but it is not limited to this, and may be constructed so that three or more balls can be stored. Furthermore, when storing a plurality of balls, they may be stored in the vertical direction, or may be configured so that they can be stored side by side. In this case, the number of balls stored in the upper portion of the storage valve may be counted. For example, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, five balls can be stored in the upper portion of the storage valve 607a, and the storage valve 607a may be opened when the fifth ball is stored. . As a result, immediately after the storage valve 607a is opened, the five balls all flow down to the general prize winning opening (large value winning prize opening) 602, so that a large amount (5×15) of prize balls are paid out in a short period of time. can receive Therefore, it is possible to make the player feel that he/she wants to store the balls inside the storage device 600, so that the player's willingness to play can be enhanced.

In each of the above embodiments, the storage valve 607a or the storage valve 704a may be closed while the power is shut off. That is, when the shutdown of the power supply is detected, the storage valve 607a or the storage valve 704a is set to be closed, and when the power supply is turned on, the state of the storage valve 607a or the storage valve 704a at the time of the power supply shutdown is restored. may As a result, it is possible to suppress fraudulent behavior in which a ball is entered into the storage device 600 or the storage device 700 while the power is shut off and prize balls are obtained immediately when the power is restored.

In each of the above-described embodiments, the ball entrance (a prize winning opening) into which the ball that has flowed into the storage device enters is fixed by the guiding flow path through which the ball flows down (that is, the arrangement of each ball entrance was fixed), but it is not limited to this. For example, the position of the entrance may be changed periodically or randomly. More specifically, a well-known croon or the like may be arranged on the bottom surface of the storage device, and each prize-winning opening (entering ball opening) may be provided annularly on the croon. Randomness may be imparted to the prize-winning openings (ball-entering openings) into which the balls that have flowed down the guide channels enter by rotating the krunes. This allows the player to watch with interest the ball entrance into which the ball that has flowed into the storage device enters. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In each of the above embodiments, the inside of the storage device is configured to be visible, but it may be configured so that the inside of the storage device is difficult to view from the front.

In each of the above embodiments, the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 is configured to control the opening and closing of the storage valve, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 may control the reservoir valve. More specifically, reservoir solenoid 610 may be electrically connected to input/output port 225 of audio ramp controller 113 . Thereby, the processing load of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to execute without delay the selection process of the variable effect, the lottery process of the special symbols, etc., which are the main processes related to the game.

In each of the above embodiments, when a ball enters each ball entrance (award winning opening), the number of prize balls is paid out according to the type of the ball entrance (award winning opening). , but not limited to these. For example, it can be applied to pachinko machines that do not give prize balls as game value, such as enclosed pachinko machines. It may be configured to increase the balance.

All or part of the above embodiments may be combined.

The present invention may be applied to a different type of pachinko machine or the like from the above embodiments. For example, once the jackpot hits, the expected value of the jackpot is increased until the jackpot state occurs multiple times (for example, 2 times, 3 times) including the pachinko machine (commonly known as 2 times rights product, 3 times rights product) may be implemented as Further, after the big winning pattern is displayed, the pachinko machine may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game in which a predetermined game value is given to the player under the condition that the ball enters a predetermined area. Also, a pachinko machine having a prize winning device having a special area such as a V-zone and entering a special game state as a necessary condition for winning a ball in the special area may be implemented. Furthermore, in addition to pachinko machines, various game machines such as arepachi, mammoth, slot machines, and so-called game machines combining a pachinko machine and a slot machine may be implemented.

In the slot machine, for example, the pattern is changed by operating the control lever in a state where the pattern effective line is determined by inserting a coin, and the pattern is stopped and fixed by operating the stop button. It is. Therefore, the basic concept of a slot machine is "provided with a display device that confirms and displays identification information after variably displaying an identification information string consisting of a plurality of pieces of identification information, The variable display of the identification information is started, and the variable display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stopping (for example, a stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has passed, and the stop is displayed. It is a slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value under the condition that the combination of time identification information is a specific one. In this case, the game medium is represented by coins, medals, etc. Examples include:

Further, as a specific example of a game machine that combines a pachinko machine and a slot machine, it is equipped with a display device for displaying a symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols in a variable manner and then confirming and displaying the symbols, and is equipped with a ball launching handle. There are things that are not. In this case, after throwing a predetermined amount of balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, the pattern starts to change due to the operation of the control lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or a predetermined As time elapses, the fluctuation of the symbols is stopped, and a special game is generated in which a predetermined game value is given to the player under the condition that the determined symbols at the time of the stop are so-called jackpot symbols, and the player is given a special game. A lot of balls are paid out to the tray at the bottom. If such a game machine is used instead of a slot machine, only the balls can be treated as game value in the game hall. It is possible to solve the problems such as the burden on the equipment due to the separate handling of the medals and the balls and the restrictions on the installation location of the game machine.

In the following, concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention are shown.

<Characteristic group A> (A prize ball is given to the ball that entered the holding device at the time of the big hit)
A specific flow path branched into a first flow path and a second flow path through which a game ball can flow down; a ball entry means provided at a position where a game ball flowing down the first flow path can enter; a specific privilege imparting means for imparting a specific privilege that is more advantageous to the player than when the game ball flows down the second flow path based on the game ball entering the ball entering means; A first distribution state in which the game balls flowing into the specific flow path are easily distributed to the first flow path, and a second distribution state in which the game balls are easily distributed to the second flow path compared with the first distribution state. and a setting means capable of setting the state of the channel distribution means to at least the first distribution state and the second distribution state according to the game state. A gaming machine A1 characterized by:

Here, in some gaming machines such as pachinko machines, lottery is performed to determine whether a game ball will win or not based on the entry of a game ball into a specific winning hole. In addition to the specific prize winning opening, there is known a game machine that is provided with a plurality of winning openings from which prize balls are paid out when the ball wins. In this conventional game machine, the number of prize balls that can be obtained can be changed according to the direction in which the game ball is ejected by the player by varying the number of prize balls to be paid out according to the type of the winning hole. There is (for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2001-129177).

However, since the amount of prize balls that can be obtained by winning is generally larger than the amount of prize balls that are paid out by winning into the winning opening, the player usually decides whether or not to win. A game ball is launched aiming at a specific prize-winning hole that triggers the execution of a lottery. In other words, it was common for the player to keep hitting the game ball in the same direction until it hits. Therefore, when the player hits the ball in the same direction, the ball continues to enter the same winning hole, and the number of winning balls to be paid out tends to be inconsistent. In other words, there is a risk that the game will become monotonous.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A1, the specific flow path branches into the first flow path and the second flow path. A ball entry means is provided at a position where a game ball that has flowed down the first flow path can enter, and the game ball flows down the second flow path based on the game ball entering the ball entry means. A specific privilege that is more advantageous to the player than the above is given by the predetermined privilege giving means. A first sorting state in which the game balls flowing into the specific channel are easily sorted to the first channel, and a second sorting state in which the game balls are more easily sorted to the second channel than in the first sorting state. and the channel distribution means are varied. The state of the channel distribution means is varied between at least the first distribution state and the second distribution state by the setting means according to the game state.

As a result, in the game state in which the flow path distribution means is set to the first distribution state, the game balls flow into the specific flow path, thereby making it easier to give the specific privilege, and the game is set to the second distribution state. Certain benefits are less likely to be granted in this state. Therefore, even if the player hits the game ball toward the specific flow path, the privilege given can be changed according to the game state, so that the game can be prevented from becoming monotonous. has the effect of

In the gaming machine A1, a normal ball entry means provided at a position where a game ball that has flowed down the second flow path can enter, and a predetermined a game value imparting means for imparting a game value, wherein the specific privilege imparting means imparts a game value greater than the predetermined game value as the specific privilege.

According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the normal ball entry means is provided at a position where the game ball that has flowed down the second flow path can enter, and the game value imparting means gives a predetermined value based on the game ball entering the normal ball entry means. A game value is given. A game value greater than a predetermined game value is given as a specific privilege by a specific privilege giving means.

As a result, in the game state in which the flow path distribution means is set to the first distribution state, more games are played when the game balls flow into the specific flow path, compared to the game state in which the flow path distribution means is set to the second distribution state. Easier to get value. Therefore, since the game value to be given can be varied according to the game state, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous.

In a game machine A1 or A2, a lottery means for executing a lottery on the basis of establishment of a lottery condition, and a special privilege game in which the game state is advantageous to a player based on the fact that the lottery result of the lottery means becomes a specific lottery result. game state setting means for setting a state, wherein the setting means changes the state of the channel distribution means to the first distribution state based on the fact that the game state setting means has set the bonus game state. A gaming machine A3 characterized in that it is set to .

According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A1 or A2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, a lottery is executed by the lottery means based on the establishment of the lottery condition, and the game state is set to a privilege game state advantageous to the player by the game state setting means when the lottery result of the lottery means becomes a specific lottery result. is set to The state of the channel distribution means is set to the first distribution state by the setting means based on the setting of the privilege game state by the game state setting means.

Thereby, when the game state is set to the privilege game state, in addition to being advantageous to the player due to the privilege game state, more game value is imparted by the game balls flowing into the specific flow path. easier to be Therefore, the privilege game state can be made more advantageous for the player. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to improve the player's expectation for the privilege game state.

Variable ball entry means capable of changing between a first ball entry state in which a game ball can be entered and a second entry state in which a game ball is more difficult to enter than the first ball entry state in the game machine A3. a specific value imparting means for imparting a specific game value based on the game ball entering the variable ball entering means; and variable control means for varying said variable ball entering means to said first ball entering state until a predetermined condition is established.

According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the variable ball-entering means is varied between a first ball-entering state in which a game ball can enter and a second ball-entering state in which a game ball is more difficult to enter than in the first ball-entering state. A specific game value is given by a specific value giving means based on the game ball entering the ball entering means. Based on the special game state being set by the game state setting means, the variable control means changes the variable ball entering means to the first ball entering state until a predetermined condition is established.

As a result, since the game ball can be entered into the variable ball entry means in the privilege game state, a specific game value can be obtained by hitting the ball aiming at the variable ball entry means. Therefore, in the bonus game state, the player can obtain more game value, so there is an effect that the player's expectation for the bonus game state can be heightened.

In any one of the gaming machines A2 to A4, the game value imparting means imparts a predetermined amount of game media as the predetermined game value when the game ball enters the normal ball entering means, The gaming machine A5 is characterized in that the specific privilege granting means grants an amount of game media larger than the predetermined amount as the specific privilege when a game ball enters the ball-entering means.

According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines A2 to A4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when a game ball enters the normal ball entry means, the game value imparting means imparts a predetermined amount of game media as a predetermined game value. When a game ball enters the ball-entering means, the specific privilege providing means provides game media in an amount larger than a predetermined amount as a specific privilege.

As a result, the player can play the game with the given game medium, so that the player can play the game for a longer period of time. Therefore, there is an effect that the operation rate of the gaming machine can be improved.

In the gaming machine A4 or A5, the variable control means changes the variable ball-entering means from the second ball-entering state to the first ball-entering state based on the special game state being set by the game state setting means. The game state setting means sets the game state different from the privilege game state based on the fact that the variable ball entry means is changed the predetermined number of times by the variable control means. A gaming machine A6 characterized in that it

According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A4 or A5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the variable control means changes the variable ball-entering means from the second ball-entering state to the first ball-entering state a predetermined number of times based on the special game state being set by the game state setting means. A game state different from the privilege game state is set by the game state setting means based on the variable control means changing the variable ball entry means a predetermined number of times.

As a result, in the privilege game state 1, the player is given a predetermined number of opportunities to enter the ball into the variable ball entry means, so that the player can obtain more specific game value. can. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's expectation for the privilege game state can be further heightened.

A game machine A7 characterized in that, in any one of the game machines A4 to A6, the specific value giving means gives a specific amount of game media as the specific game value.

According to the gaming machine A7, in addition to the effects produced by any one of the gaming machines A4 to A6, the specific value providing means provides a specific amount of game media as a specific game value. can be made to play. Therefore, it is possible to allow the player to play the game for a longer period of time, so that there is an effect that the operation rate of the gaming machine can be improved.

In any one of the gaming machines A4 to A7, a guide channel capable of guiding a game ball to the specific channel is provided, and the variable ball entry means selects the specific stream among the game balls flowing into the guide channel. The game machine A8 is characterized in that it is provided at a position where a game ball that has not flowed into the path can enter.

According to the game machine A8, in addition to the effects of the game machines A4 to A7, the game balls are guided to the specific flow path by the guide flow path, and among the game balls flowing into the guide flow path, the game balls flow into the specific flow path. Since the variable ball entry means is provided at a position where the game ball that has not flowed in can enter, the player can enter the specific passage and the variable entry simply by hitting the game ball into the guide passage in the privilege game state. Spheres can be flowed into the means. Therefore, in the bonus game state, it is possible to acquire a specific bonus and a specific game value, so that the player can get more merits in the bonus game state. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's expectation for the privilege game state can be further heightened.

In any one of gaming machines A4 to A8, counting means for counting the number of game balls entered into the variable ball entering means is provided, and the variable control means controls at least the number counted by the counting means to be a predetermined number. The variable ball entry means is changed to the second ball entry state based on the result, and the game state setting means is configured to change the special game state when a specific condition is established in the special game state. The setting means sets the game state different from the state, and the setting means changes the flow path distribution means to the first state for at least a predetermined period from when the special game state is set until the specific condition is satisfied. A gaming machine A9 characterized in that it is set to a 1 sorting state.

According to the gaming machine A9, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines A4 to A8, the following effects are exhibited. Namely, the number of game balls entering the variable ball entering means is counted by the counting means. At least when the number of balls counted by the counting means reaches a predetermined number, the variable control means changes the variable ball-entering means to the second ball-entering state. A game state different from the privilege game state is set by the game state setting means when a specific condition is satisfied in the privilege game state. The channel distribution means is set to the first distribution state by the setting means for at least a predetermined period from when the privilege game state is set until the specific condition is satisfied.

As a result, the opportunity for the player to acquire a specific game value can be limited until a predetermined number of game balls enter the variable ball entry means. Therefore, a game can be played during the privilege game state in hopes that more game balls will flow into the specific flow path before reaching the predetermined number and that the specified privilege will be given more times. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the privilege game state can be improved.

In any one of the gaming machines A3 to A9, a ball entry detection means for detecting that a game ball has entered the normal ball entry means, and a ball entry detection means for detecting that a game ball has entered the normal ball entry means during the privilege game state. and notification means for executing a predetermined notification when it is detected that a game ball has entered the game machine A10.

According to the gaming machine A10, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the gaming machines A3 to A9, the entering ball detecting means detects that the game ball has entered the normal entering means, and the entering ball detecting means detects the bonus game. When it is detected that a game ball has entered the normal ball entry means during the state, the notification means executes a predetermined notification, so that the channel distribution means is set to the privilege game state. When a problem occurs in which the first sorting state is not set, a predetermined notification can be made to make the player or the hall clerk aware of the problem. Therefore, there is an effect that the problem can be eliminated quickly.

In any one of the game machines A1 to A10, the first flow path is provided at a position where game balls that have flowed into the specific flow path flow more easily than the second flow path, The flow path distribution means opens the first flow path in the first distribution state and closes the first flow path in the second distribution state, and the second flow path is configured to open the first flow path in the second distribution state. A gaming machine A11 characterized in that it is provided at a position where a game ball that has flowed into the specific flow path is likely to be guided while the flow path is closed.

According to the gaming machine A11, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines A1 to A10, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the first flow path is provided at a position where game balls that have flowed into the specific flow path are more likely to flow in than the second flow path. The channel sorting means opens the first channel as the first sorting state and closes the first channel as the second sorting state. The second flow path is provided at a position where the game ball that has flowed into the specific flow path is likely to be guided while the first flow path is closed.

Thereby, it is possible to change the flow path through which the game ball that has flowed into the specific flow path flows down depending on whether or not the first flow path is closed. Therefore, even if the game ball is continuously launched toward the specific flow path, the specific privilege may or may not be given, so there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the game from becoming monotonous. .

In the gaming machine A11, the channel distribution means can hold up to a predetermined upper limit number of game balls on the upstream side of the closed position when the first channel is closed in the second distribution state. In the second flow path, in a state in which a predetermined upper limit number of game balls are held on the first flow path, the held game balls come into contact with the game balls flowing into the specific flow path. A game machine A12, characterized in that it is provided at a position where it is easy to flow in based on the change in the flow direction.

According to the gaming machine A12, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A11, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the first channel is closed as the second distribution state, the game balls are held upstream of the closed position up to a predetermined upper limit number by the channel distribution means. In a state in which a predetermined upper limit number of game balls are held in the first flow path, the held game balls come into contact with the game balls that have flowed into the specific flow path, and the flowing direction changes based on A second flow path is provided at a position that facilitates the inflow.

As a result, even if a game ball is continuously launched toward a specific flow path, a specific privilege may or may not be given, so that the game can be prevented from becoming monotonous. be.

In any one of the game machines A1 to A12, comprising display means for displaying an image, and display control means for controlling the display means to display an image corresponding to the state of the channel sorting means. Characterized game machine A13.

According to the game machine A13, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines A1 to A12, the display control means controls the display means so that an image corresponding to the state of the channel distribution means is displayed. , there is an effect that the player can easily recognize the state of the channel sorting means.

In the gaming machine A13, the display control means, based on the setting means setting the flow path distribution means to the first distribution state, displays the specific flow path when the game ball flows into the specific flow path. A gaming machine A14 characterized by displaying an image suggesting that a privilege is likely to be granted.

According to the gaming machine A14, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A13, based on the setting means setting the channel distribution means to the first distribution state, when the game ball flows into the specific channel, the specified The display control means displays an image suggesting that the privilege of is likely to be granted. As a result, even if the player is a beginner, there is an effect that the player can easily understand the advantage when the game ball flows into the specific flow path.

<Feature B group> (Switching the flow path of other balls with the ball held in the holding device)
A specific flow path branched into a plurality of flow paths including at least a first flow path and a second flow path through which a game ball can flow down, and provided at a position where a game ball that has flowed down the first flow path can enter. a first ball entering means for providing a first game value based on the game ball entering the first ball entering means; and a game flowing down the second flow path. A second ball entering means provided at a position where a ball can enter, and the first game given by the first giving means based on the game ball entering the second ball entering means. a second imparting means for imparting a second game value different from the value; a second position at which a game ball that has flowed into said first flow path is less likely to be held on said first flow path compared to a position thereof; A switching means for switching from the first position to the second position is provided, and the variable means holds the game ball so that the held game ball can easily guide the game ball to the second flow path. A gaming machine B1 characterized in that it

Here, in some gaming machines such as pachinko machines, lottery is performed to determine whether or not a game ball wins a prize based on the entry of a game ball into a specific winning hole. In addition to the specific prize winning opening, there is known a game machine that is provided with a plurality of winning openings from which prize balls are paid out when the ball wins. In this conventional game machine, the number of prize balls that can be obtained can be changed according to the direction in which the game ball is ejected by the player by varying the number of prize balls to be paid out according to the type of the winning hole. There is (for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2001-129177).

However, since the amount of prize balls that can be obtained by winning is generally larger than the amount of prize balls that are paid out by winning into the winning opening, the player usually decides whether or not to win. A game ball is launched aiming at a specific prize-winning hole that triggers the execution of a lottery. In other words, it was common for the player to keep hitting the game ball in the same direction until it hits. Therefore, when the player hits the ball in the same direction, the ball continues to enter the same winning hole, and the number of winning balls to be paid out tends to be inconsistent. In other words, there is a risk that the game will become monotonous.

On the other hand, in the gaming machine B1, the specific flow path branches into a plurality of flow paths including at least the first flow path and the second flow path. A first ball entering means is provided at a position where the game ball that has flowed down the first flow path can enter, and the first giving means provides the first ball based on the game ball entering the first ball entering means. of game value is given. In addition, a second ball entering means is provided at a position where the game ball that has flowed down the second flow path can enter, and the first giving means based on the game ball entering the second ball entering means A second game value different from the first game value to be given is given by the second giving means. a first position at which at least one game ball that has flowed into the first flow path can be held on the first flow path; The variable means is changed to a second position that is difficult to hold. The variable means is switched from the first position to the second position by the switching means based on the establishment of the predetermined condition. Here, when the game ball is held by the variable means, the game ball is more likely to be guided to the second flow path by the game ball held.

As a result, even if the player continues to shoot the game ball toward the specific flow path, the game ball entering the specific flow path enters depending on whether or not the predetermined condition is satisfied. can be different. Therefore, the game value obtained by the player can be varied between the first game value and the second game value depending on whether or not the predetermined condition is satisfied. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous.

In the gaming machine B1, the first game value imparted by the first imparting means is larger than the second game value imparted by the second imparting means. Game machine B2 to play.

According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, since the first game value imparted by the first imparting means is configured to be larger than the second game value imparted by the second imparting means, It is possible to make the player feel that he/she wants the game ball to flow into the specific flow path in a state where a predetermined condition is satisfied. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous.

In a game machine B1 or B2, a lottery means for executing a lottery based on establishment of a lottery condition and a privilege game state advantageous to a player are set based on the fact that the lottery result of the lottery means becomes a specific lottery result. A game state setting means, and a variable ball entry state capable of changing between a first ball entry state in which a game ball can enter and a second ball entry state in which a game ball is difficult to enter compared with the first ball entry state. means, specific value imparting means for imparting a specific game value based on the entry of a game ball into the variable ball entry means, and the privilege game state set by the game state setting means. and variable control means for changing the variable ball entry means to the first ball entry state until a predetermined condition is satisfied, wherein the switching means is set to the privilege game state by the game state setting means. The gaming machine B3 is characterized in that the variable means is switched from the first position to the second position based on the above.

According to the game machine B3, in addition to the effects of the game machine B1 or B2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, a lottery is executed by the lottery means based on the establishment of the lottery condition, and the game state is set to a privilege game state advantageous to the player by the game state setting means when the lottery result of the lottery means becomes a specific lottery result. is set to A variable ball-entering means is varied between a first ball-entering state in which a game ball can enter and a second ball-entering state in which a game ball is more difficult to enter than in the first ball-entering state, and the variable ball-entering means is changed. A specific game value is given by a specific value giving means based on the game ball entering the means. Based on the setting of the privilege game state by the game state setting means, the variable ball entry means is changed to the first ball entry state by the variable control means until a predetermined condition is established.

As a result, the player can acquire a specific game value by entering the game ball into the variable ball entering means in the privilege game state, and in addition, by entering the game ball into the first ball entering means A player can obtain a first gaming value. Therefore, it is possible to increase the merits of the player in the special game state, so that there is an effect that the player's expectation for the special game state can be further heightened.

In the gaming machine B3, a guide channel capable of guiding a game ball to the specific channel is provided, and the variable ball entry means controls the game ball that has flowed down the guide channel without flowing into the specific channel. A game machine B4 characterized in that it is provided at a position where a ball can be entered.

According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the game ball is guided to the specific flow path by the guidance flow path. A variable ball entry means is provided at a position where a game ball that has flowed down the guide channel without flowing into the specific channel can enter.

As a result, the player can cause the ball to flow into the specific flow path and the variable ball entry means simply by hitting the game ball into the guide flow path in the privilege game state. Therefore, in the bonus game state, the first game value and the specific game value can be obtained, so that the player's merits in the bonus game state can be increased. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's expectation for the privilege game state can be further heightened.

In any one of the game machines B1 to B4, a third flow path, which is one of the plurality of branched flow paths in the specific flow path, and a position where a game ball that has flowed down the third flow path can enter A third game value different from the second game value imparted by the second imparting means based on the provided third ball entering means and the entry of a game ball into the third ball entering means. a third imparting means for imparting a game value, wherein the variable means causes the held game ball to cause the game ball to enter the second flow path and the third flow path by holding the game ball; A game machine B5 characterized in that it facilitates guidance.

According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines B1 to B4, the following effects are exhibited. A third channel is provided as one of the plurality of branched channels in the specific channel. A third ball entry means is provided at a position where a game ball that has flowed down the third flow path can enter. Based on the game ball entering the third ball entering means, the third giving means gives a third game value different from the second game value given by the second giving means. By holding the game ball by the variable means, the game ball is guided to the second flow path and the third flow path by the held game ball.

As a result, when the game ball is held by the variable means, the game ball that has flowed into the specific flow path can enter either the second ball entering means or the third ball entering means. Become. That is, since the player can obtain one of the second game value and the third game value which are different from each other, the game value obtained by the player can be given randomness. . On the other hand, when the variable means is changed to the second position, the game ball that has flowed into the specific flow path enters the first ball entering means, and the first game value is given by the first giving means. Therefore, the game value obtained by the player can be stabilized. Therefore, different playability can be realized depending on whether or not the predetermined condition is satisfied. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine B5, the third game value imparted by the third imparting means is larger than the first game value imparted by the first imparting means. Game machine B6 to play.

According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B5, the third game value imparted by the third imparting means has more game value than the first game value imparted by the first imparting means. Since the configuration is such that the game ball is held by the variable means, it can be expected that the game ball flows down the third flow path. Therefore, it is possible for the player to more interestingly observe the traveling direction of the game ball that has flowed into the specific flow path, so that there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the game machine B5 or B6, when the game balls are held on the first flow path, the variable means arranges the held game balls so that at least the game balls flowing into the specific flow path are arranged in the second flow path. It is characterized in that it can be held in a first arrangement in which it is easier to be guided to the flow path and in a second arrangement in which it is easier to be guided to the third flow path than in the first arrangement. Game machine B7 to play.

According to the game machine B7, in addition to the effects of the game machine B5 or B6, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when a game ball is held on the first flow path by the variable means, the arrangement of the held game ball is such that at least the game ball that has flowed into the specific flow path is more likely to be guided to the second flow path. 1 position and a second position where it is more likely to be guided to the third flow path than in the first position.

As a result, there is an effect that the player can determine the flow path into which the game balls are likely to flow simply by confirming the arrangement of the game balls.

In the gaming machine B7, a determining means for determining whether or not the arrangement of the game balls held by the variable means is the first arrangement, and an effect for executing a specific effect indicating the result of determination by the determining means. A gaming machine B8 characterized by comprising an execution means.

According to the gaming machine B8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B7, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the determination means determines whether or not the arrangement of the game balls held by the variable means is the first arrangement, and a specific effect indicating the result of determination by the determination means is executed by the effect execution means. , there is an effect that the player can more easily determine the flow path into which the game balls tend to flow.

Any one of the gaming machines B5 to B8 is characterized by comprising adjusting means capable of adjusting the ratio of the game balls flowing into the specific flow path to flow into the second flow path and the third flow path, respectively. Gaming machine B9.

According to the game machine B9, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines B5 to B8, the ratio of the game balls flowing into the specific flow path into the second flow path and the third flow path can be adjusted by the adjusting means. Since it is adjusted, it is possible to make the gaming machine easy to give the second privilege or to make the gaming machine easy to give the third privilege depending on the business policy of the hall. Therefore, there is an effect that the specifications of the game machine can be easily adjusted according to the business policy of each hall.

Any one of the game machines B1 to B9 is provided with operating means operable by the player and detecting means for detecting an operation on the operating means, and the switching means detects an operation on the operating means by the detecting means. A gaming machine B10 characterized in that the variable means is switched from the first position to the second position based on the detection.

According to the game machine B10, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines B1 to B9, the following effects are produced. That is, the detection means detects an operation on the operation means. The variable means is switched from the first position to the second position by the switching means based on the detecting means detecting an operation on the operating means.

As a result, it is possible for the player to switch whether or not to allow the game ball that has flowed down to the specific flow path to flow down to the first ball entering means, so that each player can choose whether or not to allow the game ball to flow down to the first ball entry means. There is an effect that it can be set to the state.

The game machine B11 is characterized in that, in any one of the game machines B1 to B10, the variable means can hold only one game ball on the first flow path.

According to the game machine B11, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines B1 to B10, only one game ball is held on the first flow path by the variable means, so that the variable means is changed to the first position. When the player quits the game at , the game balls remaining on the first flow path can be minimized by being held by the variable means. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel that he or she has lost money when quitting the game.

<Characteristic group C> (Variable probability ratio by adjusting the ratio of balls entering the holding device)
A specific flow path that branches into at least a first flow path and a second flow path through which a game ball can flow down, and a first ball entry provided at a position where a game ball that has flowed down the first flow path can enter. means, a first privilege granting means capable of imparting a first privilege based on the game ball entering the first ball entering means, and a game ball flowing down the second flow path. A second privilege different from the first privilege is given based on a second ball entering means provided at a position where the ball can be entered and a game ball entering the second ball entering means. an adjustment means capable of adjusting the ratio of the game balls flowing down the specific flow path to flow into the first flow path and the second flow path, respectively; A gaming machine C1 characterized by comprising:

Here, in some gaming machines such as pachinko machines, lottery is performed to determine whether a game ball will win or not based on the entry of a game ball into a specific winning hole. In addition to the specific prize winning opening, there is known a game machine that is provided with a plurality of winning openings from which prize balls are paid out when the ball wins. In this conventional game machine, the number of prize balls that can be obtained can be changed according to the direction in which the game ball is ejected by the player by varying the number of prize balls to be paid out according to the type of the winning hole. There is (for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2001-129177).

However, since the amount of prize balls that can be obtained by winning is generally larger than the amount of prize balls that are paid out by winning into the winning opening, the player usually decides whether or not to win. A game ball is launched aiming at a specific prize-winning hole that triggers the execution of a lottery. In other words, it was common for the player to keep hitting the game ball in the same direction until it hits. Therefore, when a player plays a game on a gaming machine of the same model, as long as the ball is shot in the same direction, the ball will continue to enter the same winning hole, and the number of awarded balls will not change. there was a case. In other words, there is a risk that the game will become monotonous.

According to the gaming machine C1, the specific flow path branches into the first flow path and the second flow path through which game balls can flow down. A first ball entry means is provided at a position where the game ball that has flowed down the first flow path can enter, and based on the game ball entering the first ball entry means, the first privilege giving means 1 bonus is given. A second ball entry means is provided at a position where the game ball that has flowed down the second flow path can enter, and the second privilege is different from the first privilege based on the game ball entering the second ball entry means. A second privilege is granted by the second privilege granting means. The adjusting means adjusts the ratio at which the game ball flowing down the specific flow path flows into the first ball entering means and the second ball entering means.

Accordingly, by adjusting the adjusting means, it is possible to make the gaming machine more likely to provide the first privilege or to make the gaming machine more likely to provide the second privilege. Therefore, even if the machine is the same model, it is possible to realize different playability by changing the degree of adjustment by the adjusting means. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous.

In a game machine C1, a lottery means for executing a predetermined lottery on the basis of establishment of a lottery condition, and a privilege game for giving a privilege game advantageous to a player when the lottery result of the lottery means is a specific lottery result. A granting means, a first lottery state in which the probability of the lottery result by the lottery means being the specific lottery result is high, and a second lottery state in which the probability of the lottery result being the specific lottery result is lower than that of the first lottery state. A settable lottery state setting means is provided, and the first privilege granting means controls such that the first lottery state is set by the lottery state setting means as the first privilege. Gaming machine C2.

According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C1, a predetermined lottery is executed by the lottery means based on the establishment of the lottery condition, and the game is played when the lottery result by the lottery means becomes a specific lottery result. A privilege game advantageous to a player is imparted by a privilege game imparting means. A lottery state setting means sets a first lottery state in which the probability of the lottery result by the lottery means being a specific lottery result is high and a second lottery state in which the probability of the lottery result being a specific lottery result is lower than that of the first lottery state. . It is controlled by the first privilege granting means so that the first lottery state is set by the lottery state setting means as the first privilege.

Thereby, the easiness of shifting to the first lottery state can be adjusted by the adjusting means. Therefore, according to the business policy of the hall, the first lottery state is easily set and the privilege game state is easily set, or the first lottery state is difficult to be set and the second privilege is easily given. You can adjust whether Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a highly versatile gaming machine that can be adapted to the business policy of each hall.

In the game machine C1 or C2, the game machine C3 is characterized in that the second privilege giving means gives a predetermined amount of game media as the second privilege.

According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C1 or C2, the predetermined amount of game media is provided as the second privilege by the second privilege providing means, so the predetermined amount of game media is easily provided. can be adjusted by the adjustment means. Therefore, it is possible to adjust whether a game property in which a predetermined amount of game media is likely to be provided or a game property in which the first privilege is likely to be provided according to the business policy of the hall. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a highly versatile gaming machine that can be adapted to the business policy of each hall.

In the gaming machine C2 or C3, there is provided a first position where a game ball can enter the first ball entering means and a second position where a game ball is less likely to enter the ball entering means compared to the first position. and a variable control means for varying the variable means to the first position until a predetermined condition is established, based on the fact that the privilege game is granted by the privilege game imparting means. A gaming machine C4 characterized by comprising:

According to the game machine C4, in addition to the effects of the game machine C2 or C3, the following effects are exhibited. Namely, it is variable by the variable means between a first position where the game ball can enter the first ball entering means and a second position where the game ball is less likely to enter the ball entering means compared to the first position. be done. The variable control means changes the variable means to the first position until a predetermined condition is established based on the fact that the privilege game is granted by the privilege game imparting means.

As a result, the first privilege is more likely to be granted in the privilege game state, so that there is an effect that the player's expectation for the privilege game can be heightened.

In the gaming machine C4, the variable control means changes the variable means to the second position at least based on the lapse of a predetermined time after the variable means is changed to the first position. A gaming machine C5 characterized by:

According to the game machine C5, in addition to the effects of the game machine C4, the variable means is moved to the second position by the variable control means based on the lapse of a predetermined time after at least the variable means was changed to the first position. Since it is variable, the opportunity for the player to acquire the first privilege can be limited until the predetermined time elapses. Therefore, since the rarity value of the first privilege can be increased, the importance of adjustment by the adjusting means can be increased. Therefore, when a player selects a game machine for playing a game, the game machine can be selected by considering the adjustment condition of the adjusting means, so there is an effect that the enjoyment of selecting the game machine can be given. .

In any one of the gaming machines C1 to C5, a specific ball entry means for imparting a specific game value based on the entry of a game ball, and a specific game value higher than the specific game value based on the entry of a game ball. a low-value ball entry means for imparting a low game value, wherein the second flow path includes a specific flow path for flowing the game ball to the specific ball-entry means, and a low-value ball entry means. and a low value flow path for flowing down, and at least one game ball that has flowed into the specific flow path can be held on the specific flow path, and at the first variable position A gaming machine C6 characterized by comprising: a second variable position at which a game ball that has flowed into said specific flow path is less likely to be retained on said specific flow path.

According to the gaming machine C6, in any of the gaming machines C1 to C5, a specific game value is imparted based on the game ball entering the specific ball entering means, and the gaming machine enters the low value ball entering means. A game value less than a specific game value is awarded based on the ball. The second flow path is branched into a specific flow path for causing the game ball to flow down to the specific ball-entering means and a low-value flow path for causing the game ball to flow down to the low-value ball-entering means. A first variable position at which at least one game ball that has flowed into a specific flow path can be held on the specific flow path, and a game ball that has flowed into the specific flow path is held on the specific flow path in comparison with the first variable position. The position variable means is varied to the second variable position where it is difficult to change the position.

As a result, even if the player continues to shoot the game ball toward the second flow path, the ball entry means for entering the game ball that has flowed into the second flow path according to the variable position of the position variable means is provided. can be different. Therefore, the game value obtained by the player can be changed according to the variable position of the position variable means. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous.

The gaming machine C6 comprises holding control means for controlling to vary the position varying means to the second variable position based on the award of the privilege game by the privilege game imparting means; is arranged at a position where the game ball that has flowed into the second flow path is more likely to flow in compared to the low value flow path, and the position varying means holds the game ball by holding it. A gaming machine C7 characterized in that it facilitates guiding the game ball to the low-value flow path by the game ball being played.

According to the gaming machine C7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C6, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the position varying means is changed to the second variable position by the holding control means based on the award of the privilege game by the privilege game imparting means. The specific flow path is arranged at a position where the game ball that has flowed into the second flow path is more likely to flow compared to the low value flow path. By holding the game ball by the position variable means, the game ball is guided to the low-value flow path by the game ball held.

Thereby, the variable position of the variable position means and the ball entry means for entering the game ball that has flowed into the second flow path can be differentiated according to whether or not the game ball is held by the variable position means. . Therefore, the game value obtained by the player can be changed according to the variable position of the position variable means. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous.

A gaming machine C9 characterized in that, in any one of the gaming machines C6 to C8, the variable means and the position variable means are constructed by one member.

According to the game machine C9, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines C6 to C8, since the variable means and the position variable means are composed of one member, the position and position of the variable means can be varied by one control. The positions of the means can be switched at the same time. Therefore, there is an effect that the processing load can be reduced.

In any one of the gaming machines C1 to C9, the adjusting means increases the rate at which the game ball flowing down to the specific flow path flows into the first ball entering means, and the game ball enters the second entering means. When the ratio of game balls flowing into the ball means is reduced and the ratio of game balls flowing into the first ball entering means is reduced, the ratio of game balls flowing into the second ball entering means is increased. A gaming machine C10 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine C10, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines C1 to C9, when the ratio of the game balls flowing down to the specific flow path to flow into the first flow path is increased by the adjusting means, the game can be played. The rate at which spheres enter the second channel is reduced. Further, when the ratio of the game balls flowing down to the specific flow path into the first flow path is reduced by the adjusting means, the ratio of the game balls flowing into the second flow path is increased.

As a result, there is an effect that it is possible to more reliably make it easier for game balls to flow into the channel on the side where the ratio is increased.

A gaming machine Z1, wherein the gaming machine is a slot machine in any one of the gaming machines A1 to A14, B1 to B11, C1 to C10. Among them, the basic configuration of the slot machine is "provided with variable display means for displaying the identification information in a fixed manner after dynamically displaying an identification information string consisting of a plurality of identification information, As a result, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has passed, and the stop time and a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the definite identification information of is the specific identification information. In this case, typical examples of game media include coins and medals.

A gaming machine Z2, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine in any one of the gaming machines A1 to A14, B1 to B11, C1 to C10. Above all, the basic structure of a pachinko game machine is provided with an operating handle, and in response to the operation of the operating handle, balls are shot into a predetermined game area, and the balls are ejected into actuating openings arranged at predetermined positions in the game area. For example, the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is determined and stopped after a predetermined period of time, with the requirement of winning a prize (or passing through an activation opening). In addition, when a special game state occurs, a variable prize winning device (specific prize winning port) arranged at a predetermined position in the game area is opened in a predetermined manner to allow the balls to win prizes, and a value corresponding to the number of prizes won Values (including not only prize balls but also data written to magnetic cards, etc.) can be given.

A gaming machine Z3 characterized in that, in any one of the gaming machines A1 to A14, B1 to B11, C1 to C10, the gaming machine is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the integrated game machine is "provided with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string consisting of a plurality of identification information, and an operation means for starting (such as an operation lever) The identification information starts to change due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has passed. a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stop is the specific identification information; the ball is used as a game medium; A gaming machine configured to require a predetermined number of balls at the start of dynamic display, and to pay out a large number of balls at the occurrence of a special game state.
<Others>
2. Description of the Related Art In some gaming machines such as pachinko machines, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not a game ball wins a prize based on the entry of a game ball into a specific winning hole. In addition to the specific prize winning opening, there is known a game machine that is provided with a plurality of winning openings from which prize balls are paid out when the ball wins. In this conventional game machine, the number of prize balls that can be obtained can be changed according to the direction in which the game ball is ejected by the player by varying the number of prize balls to be paid out according to the type of the winning hole. (For example, Patent Document 1: JP-A-2001-129177).
However, since the amount of prize balls that can be obtained by winning is generally larger than the amount of prize balls that are paid out by winning into the winning opening, the player usually decides whether or not to win. A game ball is launched aiming at a specific prize-winning hole that triggers the execution of a lottery. In other words, it was common for the player to keep hitting the game ball in the same direction until it hits. Therefore, when the player hits the ball in the same direction, the ball continues to enter the same winning hole, and the number of winning balls to be paid out tends to be inconsistent. In other words, there is a risk that the game will become monotonous.
The present technical idea has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of preventing games from becoming monotonous.
<Means>
In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine of Technical Concept 1 includes a specific flow path branched into a first flow path and a second flow path through which game balls can flow, and a game ball flowing down the first flow path. Based on the ball entry means provided at a position where the ball can be entered and the game ball entering the ball entry means, the game ball is more likely to reach the player than when the game ball flows down the second flow path. A specific privilege granting means for imparting a specific privilege that is advantageous, a first distribution state in which game balls flowing into the specific flow path are easily distributed to the first flow path, and the first distribution state are compared. a second distribution state in which the game balls are easily distributed to the second flow path, and the state of the flow path distribution means is set to at least the first distribution state according to the game state. a setting means that can be set to the second sorting state.
The gaming machine according to technical idea 2 is the gaming machine according to technical idea 1, comprising normal ball entering means provided at a position where a game ball that has flowed down the second flow path can enter, and the normal ball entering means. game value imparting means for imparting a predetermined game value based on the entry of the game ball into the game ball, wherein the specific privilege imparting means provides a game value greater than the predetermined game value as the specific privilege. It is given.
The gaming machine of technical idea 3 is the gaming machine according to technical idea 1 or 2, wherein lottery means for executing lottery based on establishment of lottery conditions, and the lottery result by the lottery means becomes a specific lottery result. a game state setting means for setting the game state to a privilege game state advantageous to the player based on the fact that the game state is set to the privilege game state by the game state setting means; Then, the state of the channel distribution means is set to the first distribution state.
<effect>
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Idea 1, the specific flow path branches into the first flow path and the second flow path. A ball entry means is provided at a position where a game ball that has flowed down the first flow path can enter, and the game ball flows down the second flow path based on the game ball entering the ball entry means. A specific privilege that is more advantageous to the player than the above is given by the predetermined privilege giving means. A first sorting state in which the game balls flowing into the specific channel are easily sorted to the first channel, and a second sorting state in which the game balls are more easily sorted to the second channel than in the first sorting state. and the channel distribution means are varied. The state of the channel distribution means is varied between at least the first distribution state and the second distribution state by the setting means according to the game state.
As a result, in the game state in which the flow path distribution means is set to the first distribution state, the game balls flow into the specific flow path, thereby making it easier to give the specific privilege, and the game is set to the second distribution state. Certain benefits are less likely to be granted in this state. Therefore, even if the player hits the game ball toward the specific flow path, the privilege given can be changed according to the game state, so that the game can be prevented from becoming monotonous. has the effect of
According to the gaming machine described in technical idea 2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in technical idea 1, the following effects are achieved. That is, the normal ball entry means is provided at a position where the game ball that has flowed down the second flow path can enter, and the game value imparting means gives a predetermined value based on the game ball entering the normal ball entry means. A game value is given. A game value greater than a predetermined game value is given as a specific privilege by a specific privilege giving means.
As a result, in the game state in which the flow path distribution means is set to the first distribution state, more games are played when the game balls flow into the specific flow path, compared to the game state in which the flow path distribution means is set to the second distribution state. Easier to get value. Therefore, since the game value to be given can be varied according to the game state, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous.
According to the gaming machine described in technical idea 3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in technical idea 1 or 2, the following effects are achieved. That is, a lottery is executed by the lottery means based on the establishment of the lottery condition, and the game state is set to a privilege game state advantageous to the player by the game state setting means when the lottery result of the lottery means becomes a specific lottery result. is set to The state of the channel distribution means is set to the first distribution state by the setting means based on the setting of the privilege game state by the game state setting means.
Thereby, when the game state is set to the privilege game state, in addition to being advantageous to the player due to the privilege game state, more game value is imparted by the game balls flowing into the specific flow path. easier to be Therefore, the privilege game state can be made more advantageous for the player. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to improve the player's expectation for the privilege game state.

10 Pachinko machines (game machines)
65a 1st specific prize winning port (variable ball entry means)
112 launch control device (launching means)
601 General winning entrance (second ball entry means)
602 General winning entrance (first ball entry means)
606 guiding channel (second channel)
607 guiding channel (first channel)
607a storage valve (variable means)
650a Second specific winning port (variable ball entry means)
701 General winning entrance (first ball entry means)
702 General winning entrance (third ball entry means)
703d General winning mouth (second ball entry means)
704 guiding channel (first channel)
704a storage valve (variable means)
706 guiding channel (third channel)
708 guide channel (second channel)
800 release button (operating means)
921a, 921b nails (sorting means)
S218 Variable game execution means S305 Determination means S1103 Switching means S1202, S1203 Variable control means S1302 Switching means S1406 Variable control means S4003, S4007 Switching means S4402, S4404 Variable control means

Claims (1)

A first state is provided at a position where a game ball launched in a specific direction can enter, and the game ball can enter, and a second state makes it more difficult for the game ball to enter than in the first state. variable entry means; and
a determination means for performing determination based on the establishment of a determination condition;
variable game execution means for executing a variable game in which the variable ball entry means is varied from the second state to the first state a predetermined number of times based on a specific determination result obtained by the determination by the determination means; , in a game machine with
a first ball entry means provided at a position where the game ball launched in the specific direction can enter;
A first position at which a game ball launched in the specific direction can enter the first ball entering means, and a game ball is more difficult to enter the first ball entering means than at the first position. a variable means variable to a second position;
a second ball-entering means provided at a position where a game ball launched in the specific direction can enter, and which is different from the first ball-entering means;
By performing specific processing that is not performed when a game ball enters the second ball entering means, the advantage degree when the game ball enters the first ball entering means is set to a high advantage degree. and means for causing
Said second ball-entering means has said variable means changed to said second position more than a game ball that has flowed down in the direction of said variable means while said variable means has been changed to said first position. is provided at a position where the game ball flowing down in the direction of the variable means is more likely to be guided,
The variable means is varied to the first position while the variable ball-entering means is varied to the second state during execution of the variable game, and the variable ball-entering means is variable to the first state. A configuration that can be varied to the second position while being
The game machine is
a specific area through which at least a game ball fired in the specific direction can pass;
Distributing game balls that have reached the specific area into a first flow path that can enter the first ball entering means and a second flow path that cannot enter the first ball entering means. and a sorting means capable of
A game machine characterized in that it has a configuration in which a ratio of game balls to be distributed to the first channel can be adjusted .

Images